I am as God created me.^I

1. Today’s idea will be repeated from time to time.

²For this one thought would be enough to save you and the world, if you believed that it is true.

³Its truth means that you have made no real changes in yourself, nor changed the universe to replace what God created with fear and evil, misery and death.

⁴If you are still as God created you, fear has no meaning, evil is not real, and suffering and death do not exist.

2. Therefore, today’s idea is all you need to let complete correction heal your mind and give you perfect vision.

²It will heal all the errors any mind has ever made at any time or place. ^II

³It is enough to heal the past and free the future.

⁴It is all you need to accept the present as it is.

⁵It is enough to let time be the means for all the world to learn how to escape from time, and every change that time appears to bring.

3. If you are as God created you, appearances cannot replace the truth, health cannot turn to sickness, nor can death be substitute for life, or fear for love.

²None of this has happened, if you remain as God created you.

³You need no thought but this one to bring redemption to the world and free it from the past.

4. With this one thought is all the past undone, the present saved to quietly extend into a timeless future.

²If you are as God created you, there has been no separation of your mind from His, no split between your mind and other minds.

³And only unity has ever existed in your mind.

5. The healing power of today’s idea is limitless.

²It is the birthplace of all miracles, the great restorer of the truth to the awareness of the world. ^III

³Practice today’s idea in thankfulness.

⁴This is the truth that makes you free.

⁵This is the truth God promised you. ^IV

⁶This is the Word in which all sorrow ends.

6. Begin your five-minute practice periods with this quotation from the Text:

²I am as God created me.

³His Son can suffer nothing.

⁴And I am His Son. ^V

⁵Then, with this statement firmly in your mind, try to find the Self Who is the holy Son of God Himself.

⁶Seek Him within you—the Christ in you, God’s Son and Brother to the world;

⁷the Savior Who has been forever safe;

⁸the One with power to save whoever touches Him, however lightly, and asks for the Word that tells him he is his brother. ^VI

7. You are as God created you.

²Honor your Self today.

³And let not any images you made to be the Son of God instead of Him arise in your mind to hide what truly is there. ^VII

⁴Deep in your mind, the holy Christ in you is waiting your acknowledgment as your Self.

⁵And as long as you remain unaware of Him, you are lost and do not know yourself.

8. Seek Him today and find Him.

²He will be your Savior from all the idols you have made.

³For when you find Him, you will understand how worthless are your idols, and how false the images you believed about yourself.

⁴Today we make a great advance to truth by letting idols go and opening our hearts and minds and arms to God. ^VIII

9. With gratitude and joy we quietly remember Him today, and give His Word to all we see, that we may recognize our Self in everyone we meet.

²And thus we say with confidence and love:

³I am as God created me.

⁴Let us declare this truth as often as we can.

⁵This is the Word of God that sets you free. ^IX

⁶This is the key that opens Heaven’s gate and lets you enter into the Peace of God and His Eternity.

---

^I This is the talismanic idea of this Course; the whole of its teaching revolves around it. It is important that you understand it well, or it will serve you little. But if you comprehend what this idea means and accept it as true, it will come to your aid whenever you feel tempted to believe that you are vulnerable or in any kind of danger. It is enough to declare this idea in moments of disturbance for your mind to be restored, for peace to return, and for you to rest in God.

But first, realize that right now you have not the slightest idea of what you truly are. Acknowledge this. You cannot conceive what you are, because you use your mind to imagine things, and you are not an image. You are pure Being—and Being cannot be imagined; it can only be being. The very fact that you have worries already reveals your total ignorance of your own identity. Be very careful when you think about yourself, for you must know that only the ego entertains such foolish notions.

Be completely unconcerned with any concept about yourself that passes through your mind. Rest assured that it has arisen only to deceive and confuse you. Do not follow it.

You are as God created you, for God creates perfectly and forever.

The Being that you are is perfect and can never change.

That Being exists beyond space and time, which are illusory concepts.

That Being is real.

But that is not the being you think you are. You believe you are something else precisely because you are using your mind in “believing” mode. And remember: everything you believe is false. You are nothing that you can “believe.” One can only believe in illusions—and you are no illusion.

It is true that you can believe you are as God created you, and it is also true that believing this will help you in your dark moments, for right now you are so confused that this is the only thing you think you have. But it is not true. You do not even need to believe it; you do not deserve to. You are the Son of God, and you deserve to know that you are His Son.

Forget your beliefs. Stop even believing that you are the Son of God—and pray. Pray from the heart, for indeed you have a great need to pray. You will not reach the knowledge of your true identity through your beliefs—not even through the loftiest or the most “true.” They will not serve you. God did not create you to believe; He created you to create. You are His beloved Son, Whom He loves in such a way that the faintest breath of His Love sweeps away all confusion. You will not reach your Father by your own means; prayer is the call for Him to come to your rescue.

Pray. Pray passionately. And when you say, “I am as God created me,” let it not be an opinion or a belief, but a declaration that arises from the depths of your heart—a prayer you raise to Heaven to claim the end of a dream of anguish you do not deserve.

Never forget today’s idea. Keep it always on your lips, in your mind, and in your heart. It is pure truth. It is salvation.

And when you see all your brothers as you now see yourself, you will be ready to recognize that you are in your Father’s Heart, where you have never ceased to be.

^II John 8:32 “And you shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free.”

^III Realize that, with the awareness of being the Son of God—and the fact of continuing to be so, no matter what appearances may tell you—your perception of the world must inevitably change. To perceive is to imagine what you wish to see, and one who knows he is his Father’s Son can only wish to see miracles—and he will see them.

^IV Again, here is John 8:32. Today’s idea sums up the entire gospel of Jesus: you are the Son of God. And His crucifixion, in this time of Easter, is the testimony that this is true and that death does not exist.

^V This is stated exactly the same in theText, in T-31.VIII.5:2–4.

^VI Mark 5:27–29 “When she heard about Jesus, she came up behind Him in the crowd and touched His cloak, because she thought, ‘If I just touch His clothes, I will be healed.’ Immediately her bleeding stopped, and she felt in her body that she was freed from her suffering.”

^VII Exodus 20:4 “You shall not make for yourself an image in the form of anything in heaven above or on the earth beneath or in the waters below.”

^VIII This is another of the Lessons that can be considered a “giant stride” in learning, for its statement is the same as that of Lesson 94, which is also one.

^IX John 1:1–5 “In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word was God. He was with God in the beginning. Through Him all things were made; without Him nothing was made that has been made. In Him was life, and that life was the light of all mankind. The light shines in the darkness, and the darkness has not overcome it.”

I rest in God.

1. Today we ask for rest, and for a quietness unshaken by the world’s appearances.

²We ask for peace and stillness, in the midst of all the turmoil born of dreams of conflict.

³We ask for safety and for happiness, though we seem to look on danger and distress.

⁴And with our asking, we are given the thought that answers it:

2. I rest in God. ^I

²This thought will bring you rest and quiet, peace and stillness, and the safety and the happiness you seek.

³I rest in God.

⁴This thought has power to awaken truth asleep within you.

⁵The vision that this thought will bring gives eyes to see beyond appearances to that same truth which is in everyone and everything there is.

⁶Here is the end of suffering for all the world, the healing of all pain for everyone who ever came and everyone who yet will come to linger for a while.

⁷This is the thought in which the Son of God is born again, to recognize himself. ^II

3. I rest in God.

²This thought, serene and unshakable, will carry you through storms and strife, past misery and pain, past loss and death, and onward to the certainty of God.

³There is no suffering it cannot heal.

⁴There is no problem that it cannot solve.

⁵And no appearance but will turn to truth before the eyes of you who rest in God.

4. This is the day of peace.

²You rest in God.

³And while the world is torn by winds of hate, your rest remains completely undisturbed.

⁴Yours is the rest of truth.

⁵Appearances cannot intrude on you.

⁶You call to all to join you in your rest, and they will hear and come to you because you rest in God.

⁷They will not hear another voice but yours, because you gave your voice to God, and now you rest in Him and let Him speak through you.

5. In Him you have no cares and no concerns, no burdens, no anxiety, no pain, no fear of future and no past regrets.

²You rest in timelessness while time goes by without its touch upon you, for your rest can never be disturbed.

³Today you rest.

⁴And as you close your eyes, sink into stillness.

⁵Let these periods of rest and respite reassure your mind that all its frantic fantasies were but the feverish dreams of a delirium now past.

⁶Let it be still and thankfully accept its healing.

⁷No more fearful dreams will come, now that you rest in God.

⁸Take time today to slip away from dreams and into peace.

6. Each hour that you take your rest today, a tired mind is suddenly made glad; a bird with broken wings begins to sing; a stream long dry begins to flow again.

²The world is born again each time you rest, and hourly remember that you came to bring the Peace of God into the world, that it might rest with you.

³With every five minutes that you rest today, the world is nearer waking.

⁴And the time when rest will be the only thing there is comes closer to all worn and tired minds, too weary now to go their way alone.

⁵And they will hear the bird begin to sing, and see the stream begin to flow again.

⁶With hope reborn and energy restored, they walk with lightened steps along the road that suddenly seems easier, as they go.

7. You rest today in God’s Peace, and call to all your brothers to rest with you.

²You will be faithful to your trust today, forgetting no one, bringing everyone into the boundless circle of your peace, the holy sanctuary where you rest.

³Open the temple doors and let them come from far and near—your distant brothers and your closest friends.

⁴Bid them all enter here and rest with you. ^III

8. You rest today in God’s Peace, calm and unafraid.

²Each of your brothers comes to take his rest and offer it to you.

³We rest together here, for thus our rest is made complete.

⁴What we give today we have received.

⁵And time is not the guardian of what we give today.

⁶We give to those unborn and those passed on, to every Thought of God, and to the Mind in which these thoughts were born and where they rest.

⁷And we remind them of their resting place each time we tell ourselves:

⁸I rest in God.

---

^I Another absolutely marvelous Lesson of this Workbook. In a way it recalls Lesson 100. That one was centered on happiness, and this one on rest and peace.

Peace is like truth; in fact, peace is the condition of truth; it need not be sought, for it is always there because it is real. Rest is the state enjoyed by those who have peace because they know the truth.

Although we could say that rest is the “effect” of peace, in this Lesson we proceed the other way around. We begin by evoking the effect and follow the river upstream to the cause that produces it: peace. And once established in peace, we naturally gain access to truth, which is its cause. This Lesson works “against the current”; it works in reverse; here we travel to the cause from the effect. This approach has the advantage of employing a concept that is well known because it is associated with the body—rest—to reach another—truth—which, though also known, lies hidden beneath a dense veil of beliefs.

In this Lesson, Jesus is inviting us to a fait accompli: “I rest in God.” But if that seems a bit excessive to you and you feel unable to grant it to yourself, you may frame the idea in another way that may feel more accessible: “I want to rest in God.”

^II John 3:3 “Jesus answered and said to him, ‘Truly, truly, I say to you, unless one is born again he cannot see the kingdom of God.’”

John 3:7 “Do not marvel that I said to you, ‘You must be born again.’”

^III Pay close attention to this Lesson’s proposal. It is very simple: first you evoke an idea aligned with truth—rest in God—and hold it firmly in your mind. Then you share it with others so as to strengthen it in yourself and keep it. And from now on you generalize it and apply it to every circumstance life sets before you, so that you may learn it well.

Giving and receiving are the same in truth.^I

1. Vision depends upon today’s idea.

²In it is light, for it reconciles all apparent opposites.

³And what is light but the resolution born of peace, which brings together all your conflicts and mistaken thoughts into one concept that is wholly true?

⁴Even this one will disappear, for the Thought behind it will appear instead to take its place. ^II

⁵And now we are at peace forever, for the dream is over.

2. The true light that makes true vision possible is not the light the body’s eyes behold.

²It is a state of mind so unified that darkness cannot be perceived at all.

³Thus what is the same is seen as one, while what is not the same remains unnoticed, for it is not there.

3. This is the light that shows no opposites, and healed perception now has power to heal.

²This is the light that extends your peace of mind to other minds, so they can share it and rejoice in their oneness with you and with themselves.

³This is the light that heals, because it brings a single perception, based upon one frame of reference from which one meaning comes.

4. In this light, giving and receiving are seen as different aspects of one Thought, whose truth does not depend on which is seen as first and which as last.

²Now it is understood that both occur at once, so that the Thought remains complete.

³And in this understanding lies the basis on which all opposites are reconciled, because they are perceived from the same frame of reference that unifies this Thought.

5. One single Thought, completely unified, will serve to unify all thought.

²This is the same as saying that one correction is sufficient for all error, or that forgiving one brother completely is enough to bring salvation to all minds.

³For these are but special cases of one law that applies to all learning, when it is directed by the One Who knows the truth.

6. Learning that giving and receiving are the same has special usefulness, because it can be tried so easily and seen as true.

²And once this special case has proved it always works, in every circumstance where it is tried, the thought behind it can be extended to other areas of doubt and double vision. ^III

³And from there it will expand, and finally arrive at the one underlying Thought that unites them all.

7. Today we practice with the special case of giving and receiving.

²We will use this simple lesson in a setting that is obvious, because it produces results we cannot miss.

³Giving is receiving. ^IV

⁴Today we will offer peace to everyone, and see how quickly peace returns to us.

⁵Light is tranquility, and in that peace is vision granted us, and we can see.

8. So we begin the practice periods with today’s idea, saying:

²Giving and receiving are the same in truth.

³I will receive what I am giving now.

⁴Then close your eyes and think for five minutes of what you would hold out to everyone, to have it as your own.

⁵You might say, for example: ^V

⁶I offer serenity to everyone.

⁷I offer peace of mind to everyone.

⁸I offer gentleness to everyone.

9. Say each thought slowly, then pause a while and let the gift return to you in the measure that you gave it.

²You will find you have exactly what you gave, because that is what you asked for. ^VI

³It may also be helpful to select one person in particular to whom to offer your gifts.

⁴He represents the others, and through him you give to all.

10. Our simple lesson for today will teach you much.

²You will begin to understand the law of cause and effect, and you will progress much faster now. ^VII

³Think of today’s exercises as quick advances in your learning, made still faster and more secure each time you say:

⁴Giving and receiving are the same in truth.

---

^I Today’s Lesson is beautiful. It is such a powerful, clear, luminous, and self-evident Lesson that it is exceedingly easy to comment on—and for that very reason, it needs no comment at all. Simply read it with great attention, do exactly what it tells you, and you will see for yourself the immense power it has to open your mind. Indeed, you are very fortunate to be doing this Lesson; take that into account. You will see. Read, do, and awaken!

^II The Thought that underlies the notion of the unity of opposites is the awareness of Being.

^III “Double vision” is where pairs of opposing, or dual, ideas are perceived—usually consisting of one real concept and another imaginary one that refers to the absence of the real concept. For example: love–fear; light–darkness; joy–suffering; having–lacking; reality–illusion…

^IV To give is to extend one’s own being, and, as you already know by now, the world you perceive is a world of ideas—a world of ideas symbolized in forms you call “things.” All those “things” you “see” outside yourself are, in truth, ideas that remain in your mind, for that is the only “place” that exists in the universe. Nothing has ever left it, because there is nothing else: everything happens within your mind.

Giving something you love is a beautiful gesture, for in doing so you are extending love. But to whom or to what could it go if there is nothing outside you? To yourself, of course! And as you will see when you do the exercise that is proposed, it is you who are there to receive it. Nothing could be more evident. It is something you constantly experience throughout your “life” in this world—in fact, you have never experienced anything else.

^V Today it is especially interesting that it is you who choose the mental state you wish to enjoy. Choose the one you prefer, evoke it, visualize it clearly, feel it within you, and then offer it to the entire world.

And then you will see how it returns to you multiplied. In truth, what returns to you is exactly what you gave, but it will seem to have increased, because you were not aware of all that was within you. That is why the best way to enjoy something is to give it.

^VI Realize that this works for both good and bad alike. You will experience in yourself, instantly, both the good and the evil you offer another—exactly in the same terms and in the same measure—for, in the end, the one to whom you offer it is your very own self (though that may still be a little hard for you to accept).

^VII Although the expression is not mentioned specifically, this is another of the “giant strides.”

Truth will correct all errors in my mind.

1. What can correct illusions but the truth?

²And what are errors but illusions that have not yet been recognized as what they are?

³Where truth has entered, errors simply vanish.

⁴They fade away, leaving not a trace by which to be remembered.

⁵They are gone because, without belief to support them, they have no life.

⁶And so they disappear, returning to the nothingness from which they came.

⁷From dust they come and unto dust they return, for only truth remains. ^I

2. Can you imagine what a state of mind without illusions would be like? ^II

²How would you feel?

³Try to remember a time—perhaps just for a moment, maybe even less—when nothing came to interrupt your peace, when you felt certain that you were loved and safe.

⁴Now try to imagine how that moment would extend to the end of time and into eternity.

⁵Then multiply that feeling a hundredfold, and then a hundred more.

⁶And now you have a hint, no more than just the faintest glimpse, of the state in which your mind will rest when truth has come.

3. Without illusions there could be no fear, no doubt, no attack.

²When truth has come, all pain is over, for there is no room left in your mind for passing thoughts or dead ideas.

³Truth takes up your whole mind, freeing you from all beliefs in the temporary.

⁴There is no place left for them because truth has come, and they are nowhere to be found.

⁵They cannot be found, for truth is everywhere and forever.

4. When truth has come, it does not stay a while to disappear or change to something else.

²It does not shift or alter in its form.

³It does not come and go and go and come again.

⁴It stays exactly as it always was, so you can count on it in every need and trust it with a perfect certainty in all apparent difficulties and doubts that come from the appearances the world presents.

⁵All these will simply fade away as truth corrects all errors in your mind.

5. When truth has come, it brings with it the gift of perfect constancy and a Love that looks on pain but does not flinch.

²Here is the gift of healing, for truth needs no defense, and thus no attack is possible.

³Illusions may be brought to truth to be corrected.

⁴But truth stands far beyond illusions, and cannot be brought to them to turn them into truth.

6. Truth does not come and go.

²It does not change or shift.

³It does not take one form and then another.

⁴It does not hide from being found.

⁵It does not try to escape.

⁶It stays in full light, clearly accessible.

⁷It is impossible for anyone to seek it truly and not find it.

7. This day belongs to truth.

²Give truth its due, and it will give you what is yours.

³You were not made to suffer and to die.

⁴Your Father wills these dreams be gone.

⁵Let truth correct them all.

8. We are not asking for what is not already ours. ^III

²We merely ask to recognize what is already given, so we may acknowledge we already have it.

³Today we practice in the happy certainty that comes from truth.

⁴We do not walk with hesitant steps of illusion today.

⁵We are as sure of success as we are of life, of trust, of breathing, and of thought.

⁶We have no doubt today that we walk with truth, and we rely on it to carry us through every practice period we do.

9. Begin by asking Him Who goes with you in this undertaking to make Himself known to you as you follow Him. ^IV

²You are not made of flesh, of blood, and bone, but were created by the very Thought that gave Him life as well.

³He is your Brother, and so like to you your Father knows that both of you are one.

⁴It is your Self you ask to go with you, and how could He be absent where you are?

10. Truth will correct all errors in your mind—all the thoughts that tell you you can be apart from Him.

²Speak to Him today, and promise that you will let His function be fulfilled through you.

³To share His function is to share His joy.

⁴His confidence is with you as you say:

⁵Truth will correct all errors in my mind,

⁶And I will rest in Him Who is my Self.

⁷Then let Him lead you gently to the truth, which will enfold you and bring you peace so deep and quiet that you will find it hard to return to the familiar world you know.

11. And yet you will rejoice to look upon that world again.

²For you will bring with you the promise of the changes truth will bring to it, as you allow truth to be corrected in your mind.

³These changes will multiply with every five minutes you give, and the errors that cover the world will be corrected as you allow them to be corrected in you.

12. Do not forget your function today.

²Each time you say with confidence, “Truth will correct all errors in my mind,”

you speak for all the world, and for the One Who would release the world by setting you free.

---

^I If you feel inclined to think about truth—if the idea of truth arises in your mind—it means you have a serious problem. Only a sick mind can consider the idea of “truth.” For what is truth? Obviously, truth is what is, what exists; that is what you call “truth.” Truth is your Being. You are the truth. Truth is what you are. That is why Jesus said, “I am the way, the truth, and the life” (John 14:6).

Then what makes the notion of truth meaningful to you? Why should it be? How is it that the mind seriously entertains the idea of “seeking the truth”? Why would anyone ever need to seek what is, what exists? Do you realize that this very fact already shows that something is wrong?

If you believe you must seek the truth, that can only mean that your mind is not functioning properly. If truth is something to be sought, it means that the mind does not know reality—and if the mind does not know reality, what does it know, then? With what does it relate? That mind must be engaging with something unreal, with something that is not true. And what sense does that make? What purpose could it serve?

A mind that seeks the truth is a mind relating to illusions—to ideas devoid of real content, to imaginations. And how does it do this? How can the mind become interested in something that is nothing, that does not exist? All this is explained in Section VIII of Chapter 7 of the Text: The Ego’s Use of Projection.

Though words fall short—for they are symbols used to describe reality, which itself is not symbolic—we could put it this way: in this Course, the word “mind” is used to refer to the active principle of “spirit,” which may be understood as the condition of “Being,” of “reality,” of what “exists.” Reality is spiritual. It can be intuitively understood that the terms “being,” “manifesting,” “giving,” “loving,” and “extending” are closely related, and that is why the Text says that the fundamental law of the mind is the law of extension.

We can grasp the idea that “Being,” through the “mind,” manifests by giving or extending its own existence—what Being itself is—and that this is what is called “creation.” Everything related to Being is purely real, that is, entirely abstract, limitless, and timeless, and it cannot be understood by the concrete or personal mind, for they belong to different realms, of which only one is real, while the other is imaginary.

The mind creates when it extends its own entity, its own being—and this is intrinsically logical. However, it also happens that the mind can project—if it so wills—what it itself is not, what does not exist. To this surprising fact, this Course gives the name “believing,” which could be understood as the spurious form of creating.

In this case, the mind projects outside itself what does not exist, what is nothing, and believes in it—that is, it regards it as real and even fears it, though it also feels drawn to it, for although it is unlike itself, it is its offspring, and thus it calls that belief its “child.” Obviously, that quality of reality is exclusive to the mind that conceived it, and to no one else. Thus, the mind believes that what is not itself—and does not exist—is real and true.

Since being and loving are the same, when the mind projects what it is not (believing), it is projecting what it does not love—it is projecting absences of love. In fact, in such a case, the mind is not truly projecting anything at all, for love is the only thing that is real and that exists. In this confused state, the mind projects outside itself (rejects) the opposite of what it is, and that is why the illusions the mind believes in are concrete and frightening. They are not real, yet to the mind that conceived them they are, because it believes in them. This multitude of illusions constitutes the imaginary world in which the mind that seeks the truth believes it exists.

It is perfectly understandable that a sick mind would seek the truth, for everything it thinks it perceives feels profoundly unsatisfying—precisely because it constructed it by projecting absences of love, and now that fearful landscape fills its awareness.

This is a Course for sick minds that seek the truth. They are minds submerged in a permanent hallucination, populated by fearful illusions—among them their own imagined identity, which is itself an illusion. The mind that believes in all these falsehoods cannot find the truth by itself, for it was the cause of that confusion, and therefore its “doing” will not save it. But the opposite—its “not doing”—will. This is why this Course constantly urges you not to do, for you do not know how to do; you do not know how to extend love; you have forgotten how to create and are focused instead on believing. Yet you can—and must—stop believing in your illusory offspring.

Perhaps at this point you are wondering what on earth you must believe in to be saved, to know the truth, and to enjoy the infinite joy of being. Well, the answer is very simple: you do not need to believe in anything. Believing is a misuse of the mind; it is precisely what has led you into this miserable state. But there is something very important you must never forget, for in it lies salvation: to think that you are in a miserable state, in a fearful world, and in need of seeking the truth is also a belief—and it, too, is not true. Rejoice, then, and realize that, in truth, you have no need to be saved from anything, nor to seek the truth; it will find you, because the truth is you.

But until you realize this—and if you wish to take some time for that discovery—you may begin to dismantle that intricate scaffolding of beliefs you have built little by little, yet relentlessly. To begin with, you should look with a touch of disbelief at anything that comes to your mind: you can be absolutely certain that it is false. Nothing you think with your personal mind is true, nor will it ever be. Perhaps some things that occur to you may be somewhat aligned with truth, but it is better not to take them too seriously or give them much importance. Remember that whenever you have given importance to something, you have ended up suffering, so better not go down that road. Stop giving importance to things—to everything—even to the idea of the salvation of your immortal soul. Do not worry about that; rest assured that it does not. Empty your mind of everything and adopt a receptive attitude. That will always do you good.

Practice the exercises of this Workbook with detachment, yet with good cheer and confidence, and be happy in the present—right now.

Genesis 3:19: “By the sweat of your brow you will eat your food until you return to the ground, since from it you were taken; for dust you are and to dust you will return.”

^II In this Lesson, the term “illusions” is not used in the usual sense it often has in the Course, where it refers to false or distorted perceptions of reality. Here it refers instead to another kind of deception: the expectations you have placed upon idols—the forms of the world—in the hope that they will fill your supposed lacks and provide what you think you need. This semantic nuance comes closer to the everyday meaning of the expression “to build illusions,” that is, to form unfounded hopes or to trust in something that in reality lacks substance or true capacity to satisfy you. Therefore, in this context, “illusions” does not refer to what you see, but to what you mistakenly expect to receive from the world and its forms.

This Lesson associates peace and truth with the absence of expectations—that is, with the transcendence of every sense of lack. To understand it this way is to recognize that expectations arise from a perception of insufficiency—from the belief that something external must come to complete you. When that demand disappears—that yearning projected toward the future—a direct and present experience of fullness opens, where there is no longer any search, for nothing is missing. It is there that peace reveals itself as a natural state, and truth as something that has always been present but was veiled by the desire for things to be different.

^III Of course! When it speaks of truth, it is speaking of you—of your essential reality. Truth is one of the three aspects of Being (Truth–Love–Power).

^IV “The One Who walks with you” is your Self—Christ—Who accompanies you on the journey Home as Companion and Brother, yet when you awaken, you will recognize Him as your very Self.

I will be still today and listen to the truth.

1. If you set aside the ego’s voice today, no matter how loudly it may seem to call to you,

²If you do not accept its petty gifts that bring you nothing you really want,

³If you listen with an open mind that does not tell itself what salvation is,

⁴Then you will hear the mighty Voice of truth: quiet in Its power, strong in Its stillness, and absolutely certain in Its messages. ^I

⁵Listen—and hear your Father speak to you through the Voice He appointed, which silences the meaningless and shows the way to peace to those who cannot see.

2. Be still today and listen to the truth. ^II

²Do not be fooled by the voices of the dead, who claim to bring you life and offer it to you as if you should believe in them. ^III

³Pay them no heed.

⁴Listen to the truth.

⁵Be not afraid today to bypass the voices of the world.

⁶Walk lightly past their meaningless persuasion.

⁷Do not listen.

3. Be still today and listen to the truth.

²Go past all things that do not speak of Him Who holds your happiness within His Hand, and offers it to you in love and welcome.

³Listen to Him alone today.

⁴Delay no longer in going to Him.

⁵Listen today to one Voice alone.

4. Today the promise of God’s Word is kept.

²Listen in silence.

³He will speak to you.

⁴He comes with miracles a thousand times more joyful and more wonderful than anything you ever dreamed or wished for in your dreams.

⁵His miracles are true.

⁶They will not fade when dreaming ends.

⁷For they are the ones that end the dream and last forever, sent from God to His beloved Son—whose other name is what you are.

⁸Prepare yourself today for miracles.

⁹Let the ancient promise of your Father be fulfilled today, to you and all your brothers.

5. Hear Him today, and listen to the Word that lifts the veil that covers earth, and wakes all those who sleep and cannot see.

²God calls to them through you.

³He needs your voice to speak to them, for who but your Father could reach His Son except by calling to him through your Self?

6. Hear Him today, and offer Him your voice to speak to all the multitudes who wait to hear the Word He will speak today.

²Be ready for salvation.

³It is here, and it will be given you today.

⁴And you will learn your function from the One Who chose it in God’s Name for you.

7. Listen today, and you will hear a Voice that echoes through the world through you.

²The Bearer of all miracles needs you to first receive them, so you may become the joyous giver of what you received.

³This is how salvation begins, and this is how it ends:

⁴When all is yours, and all is given away,

it remains with you forever.

⁵And thus you learn the lesson. ^IV

8. Today we practice what it means to give, not in the way you understand it now, but as it truly is.

²Begin each hour’s exercise with this request for enlightenment:

³I will be still today and listen to the truth.

⁴What does it mean to give and to receive?

⁵Ask, and expect an answer.

⁶The answer to your asking has been waiting long to come to you.

⁷With this answer begins the ministry for which you came to this world, and which will set it free from thinking giving is a way to lose.

⁸And thus the world is made ready to understand and to receive.

9. Be still today and listen to the truth.

²For each five minutes that you spend in listening, a thousand minds are opened to the truth, and they will hear the holy Word you hear.

³And when the hour passes, you will once again release a thousand more who pause to ask that truth be given them, as you receive it now. ^V

10. Today, the holy Word of God is kept, for you receive it to give it, so you may teach the world what giving means—by listening and learning it from Him.

²Do not forget today to reinforce your choice to listen and receive the Word by repeating to yourself as often as you can:

³I will be still today and listen to the truth.

⁴I am God’s messenger today.

⁵My voice is His, to give what I receive.

---

^I Jesus has just made you a very interesting proposal. He tells you that if you turn a deaf ear to the voice of the ego, you will hear the Voice of your Father—the Voice of Truth. Stop for a moment. Let us see what we are talking about.

By now you will have practiced a little of what the Course calls “mental vigilance,” and you will have begun to learn how to identify the voice of your ego. It is that voice which articulates all your desires and all your fears, no matter whether they are great or small, mild or intense; all of that is part of the voice of your ego. And you will also have realized by now that this is your usual mental state, which means that you hear the voice of your ego constantly and probably pay attention to it most of the time.

Let us do the math. If you hear the voice of your ego many times per minute—which is certainly true—it means that you hear it thousands of times a day. Multiply that, and throughout your life you may have heard the ego’s proposals more than a hundred million times. Think about what that represents, and realize that you should not take lightly what the ego is doing with your mind. If you truly want to hear the Word of God, you must understand the kind of opposition the Voice of the Holy Spirit faces within you. Jesus does not offer you much; Jesus offers you everything. But become fully aware of the challenge before you.

This Course speaks constantly of forgiveness. It urges you to forgive your brother, to forgive the world, to forgive yourself—to forgive everything and everyone, all the time. The truth is that it may seem like there are countless different kinds of forgiveness. Do not be mistaken. Simplify: the only thing you have to forgive—to let pass—is the voice of your ego. Do not concern yourself with your brothers, or your problems, or your circumstances; in truth you do not know what they are, because you do not see them as they truly are. What you are dealing with are only your interpretations, and that is precisely the voice of the ego. That is the only thing you have to forgive.

Observe carefully and you will see where the problem truly lies. Certainly it is not in the world you see outside. The problem is always found in your problematic interpretations. The problem is what Jesus calls “the voice of the ego.” That is what you must forgive—but do not be overwhelmed. Now, at least, you have simplified the problem. Now you have only one problem. Celebrate it! For now you need only one solution—and you already know it: you need only stop paying attention to the voice of the ego. Nothing else.

However, telling you not to do something is a negative statement, and like everything negative, it can be discouraging. You may have felt your heart sink a little when you heard that you must not listen to that voice which has spoken to you and will speak to you so many times. Do not be distressed; it need not be so. This is an extraordinarily positive Course. In fact, it is so positive that it tells you that the negative does not truly exist, and therefore you need neither fear it nor attend to it. Remember, “…nothing real can be threatened. Nothing unreal exists. Herein lies the peace of God.”

^II Psalm 46:10 “Be still, and know that I am God; I will be exalted among the nations, I will be exalted in the earth.”

^III Matthew 8:18–22 “When Jesus saw the great crowds around Him, He gave orders to cross to the other side of the lake. Then a teacher of the law came to Him and said, ‘Teacher, I will follow You wherever You go.’ Jesus replied, ‘Foxes have holes and birds of the air have nests, but the Son of Man has no place to lay His head.’ Another disciple said to Him, ‘Lord, first let me go and bury my father.’ But Jesus told him, ‘Follow Me, and let the dead bury their own dead.’”

^IV This is the second part of today’s Lesson: listen to the Truth. This is the positive part—the only part that truly exists. You need only quiet your mind so that the truth may reveal itself. Do not be afraid. You need do nothing—simply listen in the silence of your mind. Quiet your mind and trust. Do nothing more, and wait in happiness.

And this is the truth; this is the holy Lesson that ends the greed of the ego, the mother of all perversions. Giving is the greatest happiness, for giving is loving, and loving is being love—and to Be, to Know, and to Create—and there is nothing greater than that, nothing you long for more, nothing you deserve more. You are love, born of Love. You were created to love… and you had forgotten it… though only to a certain extent, for, without being aware of it, that is exactly what you have always been seeking among illusions.

Do you see that this is the Truth? And do you see that to recognize it is salvation?

^V Jesus has told you that your mission is very simple and very easy: you have come into this world to save it, for you are the savior of the world. Do you see now how easy it is? You need only quiet your mind to know the truth! And to know the truth is to save the world.

You need do nothing more. The rest will be done for you, through you, and because of you. Pay no attention to the ego. Quiet your mind, hear the Truth, and save the world.

God’s Peace and Joy are mine.^I

1. God’s Peace and Joy are yours.

²Today we will accept them, knowing they belong to us.

³And we will try to understand that they increase as we receive them. ^II

⁴They are not like the gifts the world can give, where the one who gives loses by the giving, and the one who receives is richer for another’s loss.

⁵Such gifts are not real gifts, but bargains made with guilt.

⁶A true gift entails no loss.

⁷It is impossible for one to gain at the expense of another.

⁸For this would mean that limits and lack are real.

2. No gift is given in that way.

²Such “gifts” are but deals to gain a greater return; loans with interest that must be paid in full; temporary credits with a promise to repay more than what was received.

³This strange distortion of what it means to give prevails at every level of the world you see. ^III

⁴It robs all giving of its meaning and renders anything you receive worthless.

3. One of the major learning goals of this Course is to reverse your view of giving, so you may receive.

²For giving has become a source of fear, and thus you cannot receive by means of it.

³Accept God’s Peace and Joy, and you will see giving in a different light.

⁴God’s Gifts never diminish when they are given.

⁵Instead, they increase.

⁶Just as the Peace and Joy of Heaven grow when you accept them as God’s Gift to you, so does your Creator’s Joy increase when you accept His Joy and His Peace.

4. True giving is Creation.

²It extends the limitless to the limitless, the eternal to the timeless, and Love to Itself.

³True giving adds to a fullness already complete—but not by adding more, for that would imply it lacked before.

⁴It adds in the sense that it allows what cannot be contained to fulfill its purpose of giving all of Itself away, increasing and preserving Itself forever.

5. Accept God’s Peace and Joy as yours today.

²Let Him complete Himself as He defines completion.

³You will understand that what completes Him must also complete His Son.

⁴He cannot give through loss.

⁵And neither can you.

⁶Accept today His Gift of Joy and Peace, and in doing so, He will thank you for the gift you give to Him.

6. Today our practice sessions will begin a little differently.

²Begin the day by thinking of those brothers to whom you have denied the peace and joy that rightfully belong to them under God’s just and equal Laws.

³In doing so, you denied them to yourself.

⁴And that is where you must return to reclaim them as your own.

⁵Think for a while of your “enemies,” and say to each one who comes to mind:

⁶My brother, I offer you peace and joy,

⁷That God’s Peace and Joy may be mine.

7. In this way you prepare yourself to recognize God’s Gifts to you, and let your mind be freed of everything that might prevent success today. ^IV

²Now you are ready to accept the gift of peace and joy that God has given you.

³Now you are ready to experience the joy and peace you have denied yourself.

⁴Now you can say: God’s Peace and Joy are mine, for you have given what you wish to receive.

8. If you prepare your mind as we suggest, today will be a day of success for you, for you will have removed all obstacles to peace and joy, and what is truly yours will come to you at last.

²So say to yourself: God’s Peace and Joy are mine, close your eyes for a while, and let His Voice assure you that the words you speak are true.

9. Give Him five minutes as often as you can today. But if you cannot, do not let that thought discourage you.

²At the very least, remember to say each hour the words that call Him to give you what it is His Will to give, and yours to receive. ^V

³Resolve not to interfere today with His Design.

⁴And if a brother seems to tempt you to deny the Gift of God, see it as another chance to let yourself receive the Gifts of God.

⁵Then bless your brother gratefully, and say:

⁶My brother, I offer you peace and joy,

⁷That God’s Peace and Joy may be mine.

---

^I The Peace and Joy of God are what I am, for to have and to be are the same.

^II The Gifts of God are ideas, and they increase both when they are given and when they are received, because ideas grow through awareness, which occurs in both instances.

^III Perhaps the most surprising thing about the thinking that governs the world is that no one realizes how absurd it is. Everyone thinks more or less the same way and believes more or less in the same things. That is what we could call “the human condition.” The variations among people’s ways of thinking are minimal, yet their vision is so incredibly focused on this shared madness that those variations seem significant, though in truth they are not at all.

One of the characteristics of this shared insane thought system is that the less meaningful an idea is, the more important it becomes.

Think, for example, of the notion of “having.” Certainly, “having” is an extremely important idea in the world’s thought system—but what does it mean “to have”? Have you ever asked yourself that? What does it mean to “have” something?

Now think of the richest man in the world. What does it really mean that he has so much money? If he does nothing with that money, then having such a fabulous amount means nothing at all; we could say that, in that case, he is just like you, who do not have what he has. If that millionaire does not spend his money, you are exactly the same—which means that the notion of “having,” in itself, has no meaning at all. Yet the world gives it enormous importance.

The difference between that person and you is that he can give much, and you cannot. But again, notice that the difference between you and him manifests only when he gives, not because he has. The only way to become aware of what one has is to give it.

Only “giving” makes “having” meaningful. The value and the power of “having” do not lie in possession but in giving—that is, precisely in the opposite of “having,” in ceasing to have.

This may at first appear to be a play on words, but it is not. The value lies in giving, not in having—and that is why happiness is found in giving, not in having. Yet the world sees it the other way around. The world interprets “having” as a happy fact, and “giving” as something stressful.

Do you see now that this is madness? The more absurd an idea is, the more important it is to the world.

And indeed, the opposite is also true. The ideas that are fully meaningful are those the world does not understand at all, and its thought system does not know what to do with them. Do you think there is anything more meaningful than the idea of “being”? But do you understand what “being” means? Probably not.

The first two paragraphs of this Lesson may seem attractive to you and you may sympathize with what they say, but acknowledge that you are still among those who, when they give something, experience a certain sense of loss.

This happens because you still do not understand what it means to “give,” and this, in turn, is because you do not yet understand the idea of “being.” If you understood it, you can be sure that you would never again experience any sense of loss. Indeed, you would never have any problem or any concern, and you would know with absolute certainty that the Joy and the Peace of God are yours.

To put the idea of “being” into words is not difficult—it is impossible. To understand the idea of being collapses perception, and then the world disappears. And that may frighten you a little; you close your eyes and say to yourself, “My God! I don’t want the world to disappear!” But do not worry—when you open them, the world will still be there. Such is the power of your will, and your will is always fulfilled, for you are the holy Son of God and have the power to perceive the world if that is your will. And since it seems that it is—voilà—there is the world!

^IV Few exercises in this Workbook have greater power than this one. Recognize that this is an incredibly powerful practice when done wholeheartedly, and that it produces immediate effects. If you perform it correctly, at the very moment you offer peace to your brother, you will feel it yourself and emerge from the practice strengthened, serene, and joyful.

When you practice it honestly, you are proclaiming with all your strength, and in the most radical way, that you would rather be happy than be right; that you are willing to stop listening to your ego when it tells you all those awful things your brother has done to you, because you desire peace and joy more than paying attention to it.

Practice sincerely, and be certain that you are already on the path to happiness. Do not turn away from it.

^V Perhaps, having read the previous note, you are now more willing to reconcile yourself with the idea of giving. That is good—but it is only half the story.

It is also essential that you acknowledge, and make your own in mind and heart, the notion of receiving, which is equally valuable. In fact, giving and receiving are the same.

In this world, very few know how to give wholeheartedly, but even fewer know how to receive naturally.

Now, in your present condition, before giving, it is essential that you learn to recognize and receive your Father’s Gifts, for unless you open yourself to receive them, you will never be able to give them.

Everything you have and can give is borrowed; it has been given to you so that you may receive it with gratitude and give it with joy, for thus does the extension of love work in Creation.

Look around you and notice how few people you know who are willing to be loved, how few believe they deserve God’s Love, your own, or that which life itself feels for them.

The poor opinion they hold of themselves has made them ungrateful, withdrawn, cynical, and resentful. Be not among them, and heal them by showing yourself willing to receive the love they have, so that they may thus become aware of the love they are.

I seek only what truly belongs to me.^I

1. Today’s idea continues the thought that joy and peace are not idle dreams.

²You are entitled to them because of what you are.

³They come from God, Who cannot fail to give you what He wills.

⁴But there must be a place made ready to receive His Gifts.

⁵For His Gifts are not welcomed by a mind that has instead accepted the gifts it made for itself, to take the place of His.

2. Today we would set aside all the foolish gifts we gave ourselves, and place upon the holy altar—where God’s Gifts belong—those very gifts that are truly ours. ^II

²These are the gifts that truly belong to us.

³These are the gifts we inherited before time was, and that will still be ours when time has passed into eternity.

⁴These are the gifts that dwell within us now, for they are timeless.

⁵And we do not need to wait to have them.

⁶They are ours today.

⁷And so we choose them now, knowing that in doing so we simply join our will with what God wills, and recognize that His Will and ours are One.

3. Our longer practice periods today—the five minutes each hour we dedicate to the truth for our salvation—should begin with this:

²I seek only what truly belongs to me.

³Joy and peace are my inheritance.

⁴Then set aside all worldly conflicts that offer other gifts and other goals—gifts and goals that witness to illusions and are found only in a world of dreams.

4. Today we let all that go, and seek instead what is truly ours by asking to recognize what God has given.

²We clear a sacred space in our minds today before His altar, where His Gifts of peace and joy are welcomed, and where we come to find what He has given us.

³We come in confidence today, knowing that what truly belongs to us is what He gives.

⁴And we will want for nothing else, for nothing else truly belongs to us.

5. Thus, today we clear the way for Him, simply by acknowledging that His Will has already been fulfilled, and that joy and peace belong to us as His eternal Gifts.

²We will not let them slip from our awareness during the time between our practice periods of seeking where He placed them.

³To do so, we will bring this reminder to mind as often as we can:

⁴I seek only what truly belongs to me.

⁵The only things I want are God’s Gifts of joy and peace.

---

^I I seek only what I truly am.

This Lesson speaks of how the mind can focus in two opposite directions in its search for what it so deeply longs for. One of these is outward, into an imaginary realm it calls the world, where it has projected its supposed lacks onto symbols it calls “things” or “circumstances,” and which this Course calls “symbols.”

The other direction is inward, into itself, to find the reality of its own Being.

^II This is the most important part of today’s Lesson.

You may sincerely say that you seek the gifts God gave you, but in truth you do not seek them; rather, you search for them among all those things you have gathered for yourself and that now clutter your mind. “My God,” you ask, “where could those gifts that they say God gave me possibly be? Surely they must be somewhere—but there are just so many things here!”

Do you really believe you must search for God’s Gifts? Do you think He hides from you the things He gives you? The truth is you do not have to search for anything; you only need to let go of all that you have been accumulating in your mind because you thought it would make you happy. But realize that these are not objects, but ideas; the material things that may come to mind are nothing more than “idols,” physical symbols to which you attributed the underlying ideas you were truly seeking. Those things, places, circumstances, or even people, merely represented your own deep longings, which, if you reflect a little, you will have no difficulty identifying.

Anything you imagine and find attractive is an idol to you; it is what the world offers so that you may find the joy and peace you so greatly desire. The list is nearly endless. The first things that may come to mind are likely physical—beautiful clothes, delicious food, a comfortable home, or a body that attracts you. But to that list you may also add more abstract things, such as a spectacular sunrise, inspiring music, social prestige, greater intelligence, or romantic love… And also included are those spiritual qualities you believe would make you a better person, which, indeed, they would—virtues such as kindness, patience, generosity, or even trust.

Notice how, without realizing it, you have built a pyramid with a base grounded in the coarser things—those you might be ashamed of—and with upper levels increasingly abstract.

The world has the lower ones for sale; the higher ones you search for within yourself, and there are many that you find in between. But all of them share one thing: you desire them because you believe you do not have them and that you need them.

But do you truly believe that God created His Son to concern himself with such things?

You do not need to search for anything—not even for the gifts God has given you. Jesus, in truth, does not want you to search for them; He wants you to find them. He tells you to seek them only to draw your attention, to make you realize that you already have them, that all of this is already within you. Notice how He speaks of “recognizing what God has given us.”

What is imperative is that you stop searching for anything else, because you would only be wasting your time and the little energy you believe you have. That is why He exhorts you to clear “a holy place.”

Do not be distressed, and do not blame yourself when you find yourself searching for something you think you need and want, even that distressing problem that torments you or someone you love.

Forgive yourself, but become fully aware that you are losing direction and wasting time in this world of illusions.

You need nothing—except perhaps a miracle for yourself that brings you this understanding. You need nothing! Well, perhaps only a little faith.

Be at peace.

As God is Love, He is also happiness.

1. Happiness is an attribute of Love.

²It cannot be apart from It, nor can it be experienced where Love is not.

³Love has no limits, for It is everywhere.

⁴And therefore, joy is everywhere as well.

⁵But the mind can deny that this is so by believing there are gaps in Love through which sin can enter, bringing pain instead of joy. ^I

⁶This strange belief seeks to limit happiness by redefining Love as something limited, and by introducing opposites into that which has no limits and no opposite. ^II

2. Fear is then associated with Love, and its effects become the inheritance of minds that think what they have made is real. ^III

²These images, which are truly unreal, bear witness to the fear of God, forgetting that since God is Love, He must also be Joy.

³Today we will once again bring this fundamental error to the truth, and teach ourselves:

⁴As God is Love, He is also happiness.

⁵To fear God is to be afraid of joy.

⁶Begin your longer practice periods today by joining these ideas, which correct the false belief that God is fear.

⁷And they also affirm the idea that happiness is yours because of what God is. ^IV

3. Let this correction enter your mind every hour today.

²Then welcome all the happiness that comes from replacing fear with truth; and joy will become what you expect to take the place of pain.

³And since God is Love, that is what will be given you.

⁴Strengthen this hope often throughout the day, and quiet all your fears with this gentle and entirely true assurance:

⁵As God is Love, He is also happiness.

⁶And happiness is what I seek today.

⁷I cannot fail, because I seek the truth.

---

^I As theText points out, the “gaps in love” are the apparent “gap between you and your brother” (T-28.VII.3:1) and the world itself: “What is the world except a tiny gap that seems to tear eternity apart and fragment it into days and months and years?” (T-28.III.6:4).

Review also the first section of Chapter 29 of the Text: “The Closing of the Gap.”

^II The “strange belief” is to conceive, value, and uphold the idea that absences exist, which has already been discussed in the previous Lesson and in many others.

However, because it is the root idea of all illusions, it will continue to appear frequently throughout the Workbook.

Becoming aware of this harmful cognitive bias is crucial for the healing of your mind. Try to remain aware that everything you perceive, feel, or think is in continual change; therefore, it has no reality and, in truth, does not exist: it is illusion—everything is.

In this world of illusions, the only thing that saves you from it—from believing it is real and allowing it to affect you—is your forgiveness.

Forgive everything. Let it pass, for it is not real.

^III Questioning the message that comes from a perceptual system that regards absences as entities is the next step in freeing your mind from the terrifying stories you now tell yourself. What you see and what you think you did are not real. You are misusing your mind; therefore, the conclusions you reach are mistaken, and your heart warns you of this at every moment.

Pay attention to your heart and understand that an absence of love is not to be permitted. Do not allow it; do not fall into the self-absorption of the world; there is nothing for you in what does not exist.

Your heart will warn you of this, for when you do not feed it with something real—with love—it goes hungry and protests: your heart reacts like a baby when you stop feeding it… with the Love of God.

^IV Jesus speaks to you as to a frightened little child because, in truth, that is what you now are because of the way you think. Mature a little, be reasonable, order your mind, think clearly. Quiet your mind and become aware of your own existence; think of nothing else. Stay only with that—with your very existence—rest in existence.

Existence is your Mother, it is your Father, and it is what you are: the infinite fullness of your Being. Do not be afraid; mature, grow, do it by giving, by loving.

I share God’s Will for me to be happy.

1. You do not want to suffer.

²You may think that suffering brings you something, and you may still believe, to some extent, that it can give you what you want. ^I

³Yet it is likely that this belief is now beginning to waver—at least enough for you to question it and suspect that it truly makes no sense.

⁴It has not yet disappeared, but it no longer has the deep roots that once held it firmly in the dark and hidden places of your mind.

2. Today we will try to loosen its weakened hold even more, and realize that pain has no purpose, no cause, and no power to accomplish anything at all.

²Pain can bring you nothing.

³It offers you nothing, and it does not exist.

⁴And all that you believe it offers you is equally unreal.

⁵You have been enslaved by nothing. ^II

⁶Be free today to join in the joyful Will of God.

3. For several days we will continue devoting our longer practice periods to exercises designed to help you reach the happiness God’s Will has placed in you.

²There is where your home and safety lie.

³There is your peace, and there is no fear.

⁴There is salvation.

⁵There is where you finally find rest.

4. Begin today’s longer practices by accepting what God’s Will provides for you:

²I share God’s Will for me to be happy.

³And I now accept happiness as my function.

⁴Then seek this function deep within your mind, for there it is, awaiting only your decision. ^III

⁵You cannot fail to find it once you realize that your function is also your will—the same will you share with God.

5. Be happy, for your only function here is happiness.

²Be not less loving to the Son of God than He Whose Love created him as loving as Himself.

³In addition to your five-minute rest each hour, take frequent pauses today to remind yourself that you have now accepted happiness as your only function.

⁴And you can be sure that in doing so, you are joining with God’s Will.

---

^I Today we continue to go deeper into the world’s concept of morality.
It may seem unnecessary to you to repeat ideas already covered, but make no mistake: reversing your way of thinking is such an immense task that it cannot be achieved through mere intellectual acceptance. Your mind has a strong tendency to fall back into its old habits, and if you are not very watchful, you will soon find yourself thinking as you did before. The repetition of fundamental ideas is, for a while, a necessary pedagogical tool.

However, there is an even more effective way to anchor these new concepts in your mind: teach them to others. You will see how, in doing so, they truly become yours.

The idea that suffering is redemptive is deeply rooted in almost everyone’s consciousness. The origin of this strange belief lies in the assumption that evil exists—that is, that the absence of good exists.

Human beings are essentially utilitarian; they understand everything in terms of usefulness. Therefore, if evil exists, they reason that it must serve some purpose and must somehow be positive.

According to this insane logic, the negative must also be positive—which is, of course, absurd. From there, attributing to God the creation of evil and its function is but a small step. Now God has not only created good but also evil—probably for some obscure reason.

Thus, God must will evil, and it must be His Will that His Children suffer for their wickedness. Suffering becomes the medicine that will heal the Son of God so that he will not transgress His Laws again. And from all this, pure logic concludes that if God has created defective creatures, God Himself must be a clumsy craftsman, for He makes things that do not work properly.

As can clearly be seen, the entire preceding reasoning—deranged as it is—arises from conceiving the existence of evil, from thinking that the absence of something that exists must also exist. Once again: the cognitive bias of believing in the existence of absences is so widespread that it cannot even be recognized. Human beings think that what is missing is real, and they treat it as though it existed—and thus absences rule their sad lives.

When this Course tells you to fix your gaze on light and love, and not to consider sin because it does not exist, it is simply trying to heal that cognitive distortion which afflicts your mind with terrible consequences. That is why it is important that you pay attention and recognize in yourself this pernicious distortion.

The idea that suffering is redemptive also derives from the idea of sacrifice. In a world where everything has a price, and where to obtain something one must lose something else, it is inevitable to conclude that the cost of salvation must be suffering.

Thus, suffering becomes a revered and precious concept that, sadly, has managed to penetrate the very core of many religions.

^II Pain, evil, suffering, darkness, separation, and death—these are all negative concepts, and therefore imaginary. They are not real; they are interpretations, not facts.

They do not exist, but the mind is free to consider them, and from there, it can either entertain them or reject them.

Therefore, you must watch your mind carefully and be conscious of what you accept and what you choose to dismiss. Choose wisely, for anything unreal that you allow to dwell in your holy mind will cause you suffering—and then you will likely blame God for it.

God has created only the positive. Do you not see that it is impossible to create otherwise? God has not created evil for the simple reason that He cannot. No one can create the impossible—neither can God. That is precisely why it is called impossible.

The Will of God is that you be happy—not because God is “good,” but simply because God is God.

It is not that God is good because He is not evil; He is good because to be evil is to not be, and God Is.

The same is true of you—and of your brother. To be “evil,” to suffer, to die, or to be alone are not realities—they are merely considerations of the condition of non-being.

For God’s sake, do not think such madness! Do not torture yourself anymore. It serves no purpose—and besides, it is not the Will of Him who created you.
Quiet your mind, look within, and become aware of your own existence—and of the fact that existence itself is utterly satisfying and is happiness.

Rejoice and delight in your Being, for when you become fully aware of It, you will realize that you need nothing else—and that there is nothing else.

In any case, do not become anxious, depressed, or distressed over your apparent inability to be happy. Realize that when this happens, it is simply because you have returned to your favorite activity: hurting yourself. You have long confused pain with pleasure, and that is why you need to train your mind into healthier habits.

You can be absolutely certain that you will succeed. Your happiness is not only possible—it is inevitable, because it is timeless, and your confusion exists only within an illusory, transient time.

All the suffering you experience comes from your great efforts to protect error. A moment will come when you will cease to do so and finally rest in truth. This Course merely aims to hasten that process.

^III The happiness you so deeply long for lies in the very depths of your mind, waiting for you to accept it, claim it, and enjoy it forever.

Happiness is not something you have, but what you are.

God’s Will for me is perfect happiness.

1. Today we will continue with the theme of happiness.

²This is a key idea for understanding what salvation really means.

³You still believe that salvation demands suffering as penance for your “sins.”

⁴But it does not.

⁵Yet that is what you will surely think as long as you believe that sin is real and that the Son of God can sin.

2. If sin is real, punishment is both just and unavoidable.

²Therefore, salvation can only be attained through suffering.

³If sin is real, then happiness must be an illusion, for both cannot be true.

⁴Sinners deserve only death and pain; and this is what they seek.

⁵For they know this is what awaits them, what will pursue them, and what will find them in the end.

⁶It will come for them somewhere, sometime, in some way that will settle the debt they owe to God.

⁷They want to escape Him out of fear.

⁸But He will hunt them down, and they cannot escape.

3. If sin is real, salvation must be pain. ^I

²Pain is the cost of sin, and if sin is real then suffering is inevitable.

³Salvation must be feared, for it will kill—but slowly—taking everything before granting its victims the pleasant mercy of death, when they are little more than bones and dust.

⁴Its wrath is vast and ruthless, but entirely just.

4. Who would seek such savage punishment?

²Who would not run from salvation and try in every way to silence the Voice that offers it?

³Why would anyone try to listen and accept its gift?

⁴If sin is real, then what that Voice offers is a cruel death, in keeping with the twisted wishes in which sin was born.

⁵If sin is real, salvation has become your fiercest enemy—God’s curse upon you, for having crucified His Son.

5. Today you must practice with all your heart.

²These exercises are teaching you that sin is not real, and that all the things you think must come from sin will never happen, for they have no cause.

³Accept the Atonement with an open mind—one that does not hold to the persistent belief that you have turned the Son of God into a devil. ^II

6. Sin does not exist. ^III

²Today we will practice this thought as often as possible, for it is the foundation of today’s idea.

³God’s Will for you is perfect happiness, because sin does not exist and suffering has no cause.

⁴Joy is wholly fitting; pain is only a sign that you have misunderstood yourself.

7. Do not be afraid of God’s Will.

²Instead, go toward it with full confidence, knowing it will free you from all the consequences that sin has brought about in your feverish imagination.

³Say:

⁴God’s Will for me is perfect happiness.^[iv]

⁵Sin does not exist, and it has no effects.

⁶This is how your practice sessions should begin.

⁷Then, once again, try to find the joy these thoughts will bring into your mind.

⁸Gladly give five minutes to lifting off the heavy burden you laid upon yourself with the mad belief that sin is real.

8. Escape from madness today.

²You are already on the path that leads to freedom, and now today’s idea gives you wings to quicken your advance, and hope to go still faster toward the goal of peace that waits for you.

³Sin does not exist.

⁴Remember this today, and tell yourself as often as you can:

⁵God’s Will for me is perfect happiness.

⁶This is the truth, because sin does not exist.

---

^I If the sin (of my brother) is real, then salvation (mine) must be his pain.

This is the world’s way of thinking; but if history has proven anything, it is that this way does not work. It resolves nothing: the fear of punishment does not dissuade the guilty from doing evil; on the contrary, it fuels them. The most punitive societies are also those that harbor the greatest number of criminals.

It is obvious that we must think differently.

^II This is an extremely important point in the ontology of this Course and one that must be well understood.

The “moral” reasoning of the world’s thought system runs more or less as follows: your sins deserve punishment in the form of suffering so that you may learn not to sin again; and sinning means doing wrong deliberately—voluntarily breaking the laws of the world.

Those who sin believe that the world is real, that their wrongful actions are real, and they also hold an ingrained sense of “justice,” which leads them to believe that their wrongdoings deserve a just punishment that will cause them real suffering.

Everyone believes and accepts—even the vast majority of students of this Course—that those who do evil suffer and that those who do good are happy, because deep down, everyone assumes there is a kind of retributive system that punishes the wicked and rewards the good. And isn’t that, after all, what our life experience constantly seems to confirm? Do we not feel good when we act rightly and bad when we act wrongly?

The moral principle of good and evil is so deeply rooted in our consciousness that it is almost impossible to see that, in truth, morality is the foundational structure of the ego—its nourishment. Recall how Genesis describes the birth of the ego and of guilt after eating from the tree of the knowledge of good and evil.

This Course, very gently and tenderly, urges you—vehemently—to discard the idea of evil, and, in a far subtler way, it also encourages you to forgive the idea of good as something relative to the world.

What do you think it means when it says that the world is an illusion? What could you possibly find in an illusory world but illusions of evil and illusions of good?

You will not find anything real in this world, because this world is not real. Reflect deeply and recognize that this Course is not moral. How could it be, if God is not? Do you see it now?

Morality is a dualistic code that presupposes the existence of good and also of its opposite—its absence: evil.

You probably remember that absences do not exist. How could they? Only a confused mind could take them into account.

This Course constantly urges you to forgive—to forgive everything—because everything you will let pass was never really there: neither evil nor good.

Your best experience in this world is to witness the miracles that your healed mind will perceive, but understand that even those miracles you see will be illusions—the only real component in them is the Love that inspires them.
Remember the third principle of miracles. Only from this perspective will you understand expressions such as “sin is not real” or “sin does not exist.”

You probably make a great effort to be a good person—but wake up! You are not a person! You are the Son of God!

When this Course tells you to forgive, it is not so that you may become a better person; it tells you this because there is nothing to forgive. Sin, offense, harm, resentment, and pain are not real. That is why you must forgive everything. It has nothing to do with good or evil—it has to do with the unreality of evil.

This is not a moral Course, but neither is it amoral. This is a Course on Truth, and Truth is Goodness—Reality—the infinite Love of God, your unlimited Self, the only thing that exists.

Yet as long as you believe yourself to be in this world, all that will be, for you, little more than beautiful words. That is why what you need now is to train your personal mind with patience and perseverance, so that little by little it may be purified of the fearful beliefs that now enslave it.

^III 1 John 3:5 “You know that He appeared to take away sins, and in Him there is no sin.”

^IV Today’s idea is very simple, very beautiful, and very obvious—but notice that it is supported by a basic premise: sin is not real, and therefore it has no consequences. And perhaps you ask again: how, then, is it possible that when I act wrongly, I feel bad, and when I act rightly, I feel good?

Again, none of that is real. Everything you interpret as something happening in your mind or your emotional system is a projection of beliefs arising in the mind of the Son of God.

The first belief—derived from the idea of separation—is that you are a person, a separate being. To this belief—false, like all beliefs, and mother of illusions—are added countless others that, although not truly related, appear to be: the moral beliefs.

Now, the belief in being a person becomes the belief in being a good or bad person, a happy or suffering one, and that is why you always feel as the mind believes it ought to feel. It is the moral principles that feed the ego principle, which cause what you—as a now-separated person—interpret as your emotions. All this is nothing but a fable of the mind. None of it is true. You are the holy Son of God.

The ego will always recoil in horror at the notion of being an effect and not a cause. But trust—you are not an ego, nor a person. You are the holy Son of God, and the sins you believe to be real—yours or anyone else’s—are not real.

To accept this, the separated mind requires the Grace of faith. The real Self that you are, however, knows nothing of such intrigue.

Yet as a separated mind, you will need all your good will and constant practice to heal your nightmare and turn it into a happy dream—a fiction that serves as the antechamber to your true awakening.

Rejoice, then, for you are walking in the right direction.

My part is essential in God’s plan for salvation.

1. Just as the Son of God completes His Father, your contribution completes your Father’s plan.

²Salvation must reverse the insane belief in separate thoughts and separate bodies, living separate lives and going their separate ways.

³When separate minds share one single function, they are united in one purpose, for each of them is equally essential to all the rest.

2. God’s Will for you is perfect happiness.

²Why would you choose to go against His Will?

³The role He has assigned to you in His plan was given so you could be restored to what He wills.

⁴That role is as essential to His plan as it is to your happiness.

⁵Your joy must be complete so that those to whom He sends you may understand His plan. ^I

⁶They will see their own function in your shining face, and hear God calling to them in your happy smile.

3. Indeed, you are essential to God’s plan.

²Without your joy, His is incomplete.

³Without your smile, the world cannot be saved.

⁴As long as you remain sad, the Light God Himself appointed as the means to save the world is dim and without brilliance.

⁵And no one smiles, for all laughter is but an echo of your own.

4. Truly, you are essential to God’s plan.

²Just as your Light increases the radiance of every Light that shines in Heaven, your joy on earth calls all minds to leave behind their sorrow and take their place with you in God’s plan.

³God’s messengers are joyful, and their joy heals all sorrow and despair.

⁴They are the proof that God wills perfect happiness for all who will accept their Father’s gifts.

5. Today we will not allow ourselves to be sad.

²For if we are, we are failing to assume our role, which is essential to God’s plan and to our vision.

³To be sad is to signal that you would prefer to play another part, rather than the one God has given you.

⁴In that way, you are unable to show the world how great is the happiness He wills for you.

⁵And so, you do not recognize that it is already yours.

6. Today we will try to understand that our function here is to be happy.

²If you are sad, you are not fulfilling your role, and then the whole world is deprived of joy along with you.

³God asks you to be happy so that the world may see how much He loves His Son, and that His Will is that no sorrow shall diminish his joy, nor fear disturb his peace.

⁴Today you are God’s messenger.

⁵You carry His Happiness to everyone you look upon, and His Peace to all who gaze on you and see His message in your happy face.

7. Today we will prepare for this in our five-minute practices, feeling happiness rise within us, just as it is the Will of our Father—and our own.

²Begin the exercises with the thought that contains today’s idea.

³Then realize that your role is to be happy.

⁴This is the only thing ever asked of you or anyone who wants to take their rightful place among the messengers of God.

⁵Think of what this means.

⁶Truly, you were very mistaken in believing that you were asked to sacrifice.

⁷According to God’s plan, you only receive, and never lose anything, nor sacrifice, nor die.

8. Now let us try to find that joy which proves to us—and to the world—the true Will of God for us.

²Your function is to find it here and now.

³This is why you came. ^II

⁴Let this be the day you succeed.

9. Look deep within yourself, undismayed by all the foolish thoughts and meaningless goals you pass as you rise to meet the Christ in you.

²He will be there.

³And you can reach Him now.

⁴What would you rather look upon instead of Him Who waits for you to see Him?

⁵What petty thought could hold you back?

⁶What foolish goal could keep you from success, when it is God Himself Who calls to you?

10. He will be there.

²You are essential to His plan.

³Today you are His messenger.

⁴And you will surely find what He would have you give.

⁵Do not forget today’s idea between your longer practice periods.

⁶It is your Self Who calls to you today.

⁷And it is to Him you answer each time you remind yourself that you are essential to God’s plan for the salvation of the world.

---

^I John 15:11 “These things I have spoken to you, that My joy may remain in you, and that your joy may be full.”

John 16:24 “Until now you have asked nothing in My name. Ask, and you will receive, that your joy may be full.”

^II At last we are told what our function and our role are in God’s plan for the salvation of the world! This is the answer to that fundamental question that few ever ask: What am I living for?

Perhaps you have never asked yourself this question so directly, and it is curious that, although everyone recognizes the importance of asking it, the world offers no satisfactory answer—and probably no one has ever offered you one. It is also quite surprising that, while you can find endless manuals explaining the purpose of every object imaginable, not one of them explains what you are for—what your function is, the reason you have come.

Well, now you know why you were created; now you know what your role is—which should not surprise you either. Is it not precisely what you have instinctively sought throughout your existence: to be happy? For it is perfectly evident that everything you do and have ever done—absolutely everything—has always had exactly that purpose: happiness. You will find nothing truer than this—you were born to be happy.

Therefore, when you are not happy, it is also evident that you are malfunctioning, just like any mechanism with a broken internal part. In fact, when you are sad, depressed, or feel fear, anger, or any state of mind other than happiness, it is because you too have a damaged internal mechanism—your mind. Whenever you are not happy, it is because your mind is functioning wrongly; it is because you are thinking things that are not true. It is as simple as that.

Perhaps you understand this reasoning, which is perfectly logical, and probably you agree with it, and yet you will often find yourself feeling bad—fully aware that you are not happy—and unable to escape that situation.

When that happens, remember that it is because your mind is conceiving falsehoods, erroneous thoughts, and unjust condemnations. At times these are conscious contents—and those are relatively easy to address, as long as you have the humility to recognize that you must have been mistaken when you thought that way. Only your pride can prevent the healing of such thoughts; only if you cling to the need to be right can you deprive yourself of happiness in that instant.

But other times—and this happens with most human beings, most of the time—it is old mental contents buried deep in consciousness which, though not surfacing in identifiable form, manifest as nameless depression, anonymous apathy, or a tendency toward anger that betrays hidden fears. These are ancient habits of erroneous thinking, forgotten by the conscious mind, yet still active in its depths.

This Course heals in both cases, and if practiced wholeheartedly, it always heals. Be honest and courageous with the first kind. Acknowledge the harmful thought that poisons your heart and correct it at once. You can be healed of that in an instant. It is very easy. Look upon the situation with clean eyes and correct it. Change your way of thinking by seeking the light present in every circumstance—you already know how; you need only place your will in it. And of course it is worth it! The relief is immediate and the reward immense. As said: this is very easy and requires only honesty, humility, and courage.

The old hidden resentments require another strategy. Here patience, perseverance, and faith are needed. You will have noticed the great emphasis this Course places on mental discipline. You will also have noticed that you are asked to do the same thing, many times, and over many days. Changing your old mental habits requires deep work over a long period. Understand that you have been deceiving yourself for most of your life. This is not about a single specific error that you can easily identify and immediately correct—it is about completely reversing an entire thought system. It is no trivial task. Still, you will accomplish it.

You may recall that at the beginning of the Text of this Course you were told that everyone is entitled to miracles, but that purification must first come. This is precisely that: the purification your mind needs in order to work miracles as a natural habit—because of your miracle-mindedness, and because you are happy. You always see the luminous side of life because you live in the certainty of being the Son of God—you know it, you live it, and you are joyful. You have been healed, and now you inevitably heal others. You need not even try to—you heal because you are happy and have become a healer.

Rejoice that you are practicing today’s Lesson of happiness—number one hundred. Never forget it. Think of how far you have come and how much you have discovered about yourself and about truth. It is a genuine privilege and an honor to be where you are and to be doing what you are doing. Make no mistake: you did not arrive here by chance—you have earned it.

Take this opportunity and recognize what true happiness is: joy in the heart, peace in the mind, and the absolute certainty that it will always be so.

How simple it is to be happy!

But how difficult it is to be simple!

(Gururaj Ananda Yogui)

Being happy is very easy, but it requires a condition that is often difficult to meet: you cannot focus on or follow the world’s interpretation of reality. You need another—one that is almost its opposite.

This individual who has said “yes” to God’s plan for salvation and who has found happiness—what must he do to maintain that happiness and bring and offer it to others?

He must completely disregard all the world’s stories and keep his mind fixed on God. If this is not the case, it is utterly impossible to be truly happy in this world.

If you believe the story the world tells about itself, how could you be happy?
How could you be happy if you believe the stories you see on television, those you read in newspapers, the misfortunes your friends, neighbors, or family recount—or those you tell yourself most of the time?

Believing those, how could you possibly be happy? Thus, to be happy is impossible.

How can you be happy if, after hearing those stories, you believe that they are true, that they are important, and that they concern you?

For, look closely: all the world’s efforts at communication are aimed at involving you in its insane way of interpreting reality.

Do you see now why happiness is impossible that way?

In that discouraging situation, the first thing you must tell yourself is: those problems are not real, they are not important—but they do concern me, because I have the responsibility of assuming my role in God’s plan for salvation. And next: the remedies the world proposes are not the solution. They will never work. They will only perpetuate and worsen the problems.

God’s plan for salvation is spiritual, because the problem is spiritual. The world is disturbed by effects but knows nothing of the true cause. The world’s problem is separation, and by addressing that single cause, all the world’s problems are resolved.

The mind of the Son of God is fractured, like two tectonic plates colliding deep beneath the sea. The world is concerned with the devastating effects of the waves that the quake causes on the surface, but the problem lies at the depths.

Heal that—and you will have healed everything.

My only function here is salvation.

1. Salvation and forgiveness are the same. ^I

²Both imply that something has gone wrong—something from which you need to be saved or forgiven; something mistaken that calls for a corrective shift; something apart from or different than the Will of God.

³Both terms, therefore, imply the impossible, yet something that seems to have occurred, now resulting in a state of conflict between what is and what could never be.

2. Truth and illusion are now placed on equal footing, for both appear to have occurred.

²The impossible becomes that which you must forgive or be saved from.

³Salvation is the borderland between truth and illusion.

⁴It reflects truth, for it is the means by which you can escape illusions.

⁵But it is not the truth, because it undoes what never happened.

3. How can there be a meeting place where earth and Heaven may be reconciled within a mind that holds both?

²The mind that sees illusions believes they are real.

³They exist, in that they are thoughts.

⁴But they are not real, for the mind that thinks such thoughts is separate from God. ^II

4. What could join a separated mind and its thoughts with the Mind and the Thought that are forever One?

²What plan could preserve truth untouched, while also recognizing the needs that arise from believing in illusions, and provide the means to undo them without attack and without pain?

³What plan could this be but a Thought of God by which what never happened is overlooked, and sins that never were are gently left behind?

5. The Holy Spirit holds this plan of God exactly as He received it from Him, within the Mind of God, and also within your own.

²This plan is not bound by time, because its Source is timeless.

³Yet it works within time, because you believe time is real.

⁴The Holy Spirit is unmoved by all you see—sin, pain, death, grief, separation, and loss.

⁵For He knows one thing remains forever true: God is still Love, and what you see is not His Will. ^III

6. This is the Thought that brings illusions to the truth and sees them as appearances behind which lies what is changeless and sure.

²This is the Thought that saves and forgives, for it places no faith in anything not created by the only Source it knows.

³This is the Thought whose function is to save, by offering you Its Function as your own.

7. Salvation is the function you must fulfill, together with Him to Whom the plan was given.

²Now that plan is entrusted to you, along with Him.

³He has one answer to all appearances, regardless of their form, their size, their intensity, or any attribute they seem to have:

⁴My only function here is salvation.

⁵God is still Love, and this is not His Will.

8. You, who are destined to work miracles, be sure to practice today’s idea well.

²Try to feel the strength in what you say, for these words hold your freedom.

³Your Father loves you.

⁴That world of pain is not His Will.

⁵Forgive yourself for believing that He wanted that for you.

⁶Then let the Thought with which He has replaced all your errors enter the shadowed places of your mind that gave birth to such thoughts, which were never His Will.

⁷That part of your mind belongs to God, as does the rest.

⁸It holds no private thoughts, nor makes them real by hiding them from Him.

9. Let the Light come in, and you will see no obstacles to what He wills for you.

²Open your secrets to His gentle Light, and see how bright this Light still shines in you.

³Practice His Thought today, and let His Light seek out and light up all your darkened corners, shining upon them to unite them with the rest of your mind.

10. God’s Will is that your mind be One with His.

²God’s Will is to have one Son.

³God’s Will is that His only Son is you.

⁴Reflect on this during today’s practice, and begin the longer sessions with this teaching that leads the way to truth:

⁵My only function here is salvation.

⁶Salvation and forgiveness are the same.

⁷Then turn to Him Who shares your function with you, and let Him teach you what you need to learn to leave behind all fear, and know your Self as Love, which has no opposite within you.

11. Forgive all thoughts that stand in opposition to the truth of your wholeness, your oneness, and your peace.

²The gifts your Father gave you cannot be lost.

³You do not want to be someone else.

⁴You have no function but the one God gave you.

⁵Forgive yourself the function you believed you made for yourself.

⁶Forgiveness and salvation are the same.

⁷Forgive what you think you have done, and you will have been saved.

12. Today a special message has been given you that holds the power to remove all doubt and fear from your mind forever.

²If you are tempted to believe your doubts and fears are real, remember that no appearance can withstand the truth contained in these mighty words:

³My only function here is salvation.

⁴God is still Love, and this is not His Will.

13. Your only function tells you that you are One.

²Remind yourself of this often when you are not spending five minutes with the Voice that speaks for God.

³Remind yourself:

⁴My only function here is salvation.

⁵In this way, you place forgiveness in your mind, and gently lay all fear aside, so that Love may find Its rightful place in you and show you that you are the Son of God.

---

^I Forgiveness is the act of ceasing to give importance to illusion—that is, to what does not exist—and in that very instant… you have already been saved, for from then on you remain only with what is real. How, then, could forgiving and being saved not be the same?

^II Without a doubt, this is the most difficult Lesson in this Course. It is so difficult, in fact, that it cannot be understood. It is impossible for your particular mind to understand it for the simple reason that your particular mind does not exist—it is illusory. And this statement is also impossible to understand, and the personal mind will never understand it, because mind is not personal. This is the ontological principle upon which this Course is based: you are not the being you believe yourself to be, and the place in which you think you find yourself is an illusion conceived by a confused mind. You are everything you long for and believe you lack.

Acknowledge that it is difficult for you to accept that the world you perceive is an illusion, even though reason confirms it, for you see nothing permanent in it—everything changes. What is now soon ceases to be, and that disturbs you. You cannot halt that constant change which time imposes upon matter; physics itself confirms it. On the microscopic level, everything moves at dizzying speed. Then, what does it mean “to be”? For in that way of being there is no being, only becoming—but Heraclitus said that long ago. Parmenides, the enlightened one, on the other hand, says that this is not existence, that it is an illusion of existence—it is not being, but only seeming to be. What, then, could it be but a deception of the mind?

At this stage of the Course, though you may not have fully accepted the illusory nature of the world, you have opened your mind to the possibility, and perhaps even regard it sympathetically, for you understand that your liberation lies precisely in that. Yet what triggers all the alarms is the realization that your personal mind—the “instrument” with which you perceive this illusory world—is itself an illusion, and therefore does not exist. The being you believe yourself to be does not truly exist. And your mind rebels against that—how could it not?

Indeed, that which so fervently resists acknowledging its own nonexistence is precisely your ego. But is it not perfectly legitimate for something to refuse to recognize that it does not exist? Could anything be more legitimate than that? What is happening here? Where is truth? Do you now understand why this is the most difficult Lesson of the Course? Now, probably, you do.

The idea you hold of yourself is false. You are not what you think you are. How, then, can this be?

Try to see it this way: you are, indeed, real—you are a real mind; you exist. What has happened is that this real mind that you are conceived a thought whose content is untrue: the idea that it is a separate being. And it has identified itself with the content of that idea which it itself conceived. Now the mind no longer believes itself to be the mind that conceived the thought, but the very content of that false idea—that separate being.

The situation is simple yet utterly perverse. The mind has remained fixated on that bastard conception for an illusory span of time seemingly immense. And now that mind lovingly “nurtures” that aberrant “creature”—alone and separate—for it gave birth to it. That ghastly content is the idea the confused mind harbors. Is the mind separated? No! But it believes it is.

This is the tangle Jesus seeks to undo with this Course: the restoration of the mind to its natural state by dissolving the fictitious idea of separation. This he calls the healing of the mind. Realize, however, that Jesus invites you to heal a mind that in itself is perfectly whole, for it remains exactly as God created it. But since that mind believes in the madness it conceived, Jesus has no choice but to relate to it on its own terms, for in order to communicate with a mind that believes itself an individual, alone and separate, he must use its own language.

This Course does not operate within a real realm—it operates within an illusory one, for that is where it is needed, since the individual mind to which it is addressed does believe that what it perceives in its hallucination is real. Within the realm of the world, everything this Course says is strictly true and absolutely helpful—therefore, you would do well to give it your full attention. Yet in Reality, this Course is completely superfluous, for there it is not only unnecessary but inconceivable. But remember: your personal mind does not know Reality—it perceives only illusions. And as long as you believe yourself to be an individual in this world, so it will seem to be. That is why Jesus urges you to “forgive,” to disregard what you perceive—even your own thoughts.

Do not worry if you do not understand all this; it is not understandable, nor do you need to understand it. Nevertheless, you will probably grasp intuitively the idea that the Mind of your One Self—which is the Mind of God—does not “comprehend” anything. To comprehend is to grasp and incorporate, and the real mind does not do that; the real mind is everything. So return to your affairs, joyful in your new consecration, and celebrate that you are on the path to peace. Nothing more is needed.

A time will come when time itself will end for you—and with it, all your fears and doubts. Remember these words you will find in T-7.I.7: “We have said that the final step in the reawakening of knowledge is taken by God. This is true, but it is hard to explain in words, because words are but symbols, and what is true needs no explanation. Yet the Holy Spirit always has the task of translating the useless into the useful, the meaningless into the meaningful, and the temporal into the timeless. He therefore can tell you something about this last step. But this you must know: through this step you know what you are. This step is your being.”

^III 1 John 4:8 “He who does not love does not know God, for God is love.”
1 John 4:16 “And we have known and believed the love that God has for us. God is love, and he who abides in love abides in God, and God in him.”

I will accept my part in God’s plan for salvation.

1. Today is a day of special dedication.

²Today we take a stand on one side only.

³We align ourselves with Truth and abandon illusions.

⁴We will not waver between these two choices, but instead take a firm position in favor of what is One.

⁵Today we devote ourselves to Truth and to salvation as God has planned it.

⁶We will not argue that it is something else, nor will we seek it where it cannot be found.

⁷We gladly accept salvation as it is, and take on the role God has given us.^I

2. How joyful it is to be certain!

²Today we set aside all our doubts, and take our stand with clear purpose, grateful that doubt has vanished and certainty has come. ^II

³We have a mighty purpose to fulfill, and all that we need to reach the goal has been given to us.

⁴Not a single mistake stands in our way.

⁵For we have been absolved of every error.

⁶All our sins have been forgiven in the understanding that they were nothing but mistakes.

3. Those who are guiltless are unafraid, for they feel secure and know they are safe. ^III

²They do not turn to magic, nor invent ways of escaping from imagined threats.

³They rest in the quiet certainty that they will do what has been given them to do.

⁴They do not question their own ability, for they know they will fulfill their function perfectly, in the perfect time and place.

⁵They made the choice we make today, that we may share their certainty, and so increase it by accepting it for ourselves.

4. All those who have taken the stand we now take will be with us, and gladly offer us all that they have learned and every gain they made.

²Those who still feel uncertain will also join us, and by sharing our certainty will make it stronger still.

³Even those yet unborn will hear the call we heard, and answer it when they come to choose once more. ^IV

⁴Today we do not choose for ourselves alone. ^V

5. Is it not worth five minutes of each hour to accept the happiness God has given you?

²Is it not worth five minutes of each hour to recognize your special function here?

³Do you not think five minutes is a small request in exchange for such a great reward it cannot be measured?

6. You have made thousands of bargains in which you gave away everything.

²Yet here is an offer that guarantees your full release from every kind of pain, and joy not of this world.

³You are asked to exchange a little of your time for peace of mind and certainty of purpose, with the promise of complete success.

⁴And since time means nothing, you are being given everything for nothing.

⁵This is a bargain you cannot lose. ^VI

⁶And what you gain is truly unlimited!

7. Give Him your small offering of five minutes each hour today.

²He will infuse the words you use in practicing today’s idea with deep conviction and the certainty you lack.

³His Words will join with yours, making each repetition of today’s idea a full dedication, with faith as perfect and as firm as His in you.

⁴His trust in you will light up every word you speak, and you will go beyond their sound to what they truly mean. ^VII

8. Practice with Him today, saying:

²I will accept my part in God’s plan for salvation.

³In every one of the five minutes you spend with God, He will accept your words and give them back to you radiant with faith and trust, so firm and sure they will light the world with hope and joy.

⁴Miss not one chance to be the happy bearer of His Gifts, that you may give them to the world today.

9. Offer your words to God, and He will do the rest.

²He will help you understand your special function.

³He will open the path to happiness, and peace and trust will be His Gifts and His answer to your words.

⁴God will respond with all His faith, His joy, and His certainty that what you say is true.

⁵And then you will possess the same conviction as He Who knows the function given you, both on earth and in Heaven. ^VIII

⁶God will be with you in every practice you share with Him, and He will exchange every moment you offer Him for timelessness and peace.

10. Spend the rest of each hour joyfully preparing for the next five minutes you will spend again with Him. ^IX

²Repeat today’s idea as you wait for this happy time to come.

³Repeat it often, and remember that each time you do, you prepare your mind for the joyful moment that approaches.

11. And when the hour has passed, and He is there once more to spend another moment with you, be grateful and lay aside all worldly tasks, all petty thoughts and limited ideas, and enjoy another blessed moment with Him.

²Tell Him once again that you accept the role He would have you take, and that He helps you to fulfill, and God will give you the certainty that you truly want this choice He has made with you, and you with Him.

---

^I Today’s Lesson is a firm declaration of will. You are urged today to place your will wholly and exclusively in one direction: to fulfill the role assigned to you by God for the salvation of the world.

You do not yet know exactly what is required of you. Do not worry: in two Lessons you will. In the preceding Lessons we have learned who we truly are, and now the time has come to begin the work. We have moved from contemplation to being called to action—to profess our newfound faith.

^II Since you have chosen, the alternatives have vanished from your mind, and with them, all doubts. You can now rest relieved of all tension. There are no longer any conflicts draining your energy. Today you have consecrated yourself to a single cause.

^III You will not only cease attacking yourself with your doubts—you will, above all, stop attacking yourself by feeling guilty. What for? Under the new interpretation you have already recognized that guilt serves no good purpose. You have realized that guilt does not make you a better person—quite the opposite. Now you know that you have never sinned. Now you understand that, yes, you have made mistakes—but to sin? Never!

You can now use all your energy to correct your mind, and even to repair whatever harm your errors may have caused—but you will do so joyfully and relieved, for you no longer feel guilty. Now you will truly be effective.

^IV This is a veiled allusion to the illusory process of reincarnation in bodies.

^V With today’s consecration you enter the company of God’s messengers. You are not alone; you join with many others who have made the same decision you make today. With the Love of God in your heart and your mind radiant with light, you embody in yourself the gospel of Jesus.

Now you have chosen the salvation of the world, for that is the mission entrusted to you. And to fulfill it you need neither speak a word nor act on your own. In a couple of Lessons your single role will be clearly defined.

^VI It is indeed touching how Jesus presents salvation to you in almost mercantile terms. Moreover, it is a genuine offer! Give that little bit that is asked of you with all your heart, and you will see what happens. Nothing more need be said.

^VII The support given to your little faith is entirely real—it is no abstraction. You need only give it a chance to manifest itself, and it will appear in your awareness. All that is asked of you is a little willingness on your part, and you will see how the path to a new understanding opens in your mind. Try it. It costs you nothing, and you will see it for yourself.

^VIII The function that has been assigned to you will soon be revealed.

Matthew 6:10 “Thy kingdom come. Thy will be done in earth, as it is in heaven.”

^IX During those five minutes you reaffirm your consecration to your new function, and for the rest of the time you enjoy the certainty and peace that come from having unified your will. You do not need to neglect your worldly affairs—on the contrary, you carry them out joyfully and impeccably, applying your new way of seeing. You will find that everything goes much better for you. You are no longer alone. You walk through the world performing your tasks accompanied by Jesus, for he goes beside you and is at your disposal for all that you may need.

And when doubts assail you and you feel without strength, recognize that:

① Your consecration is an idea.

② Your doubts are also an idea.

③ Feeling that you have no strength is also an idea, which you may associate with either of the other two.

And then…

④ Associate the idea of lacking strength with the idea of harboring doubts, and you will find you have no strength left to doubt.

Then rest your mind, reaffirm your special consecration, and move forward.

I am Spirit.

1. Today’s idea identifies you with your one Self. ^I

²It accepts no split identity, nor attempts to weave opposing factors into unity.

³It simply states the truth.

⁴Practice this truth today as often as you can, for it will bring your mind out of conflict and lead it into the calm fields of peace.

⁵Now no fear can enter, for your mind has been absolved of madness by abandoning the illusion of a divided identity.

2. Today we reaffirm the truth about your Self, the holy Son of God Who rests in you, whose mind has been restored to sanity.

²You are the Spirit, lovingly endowed with all the Love, the Peace, and the Joy of your Father.

³You are the Spirit Who completes God Himself, and Who shares His function as Creator.

⁴He is always with you, as you are always with Him.^II

3. Today we seek to bring reality still closer to your mind.

²Each time you practice, you become at least a little more aware, and sometimes thousands of years or more are saved. ^III

³The minutes you give are multiplied again and again, for the miracle makes use of time but is not ruled by it.

⁴Salvation is a miracle—the first and the last.

⁵The first is also the last, for salvation is a miracle that is one.

4. You are the Spirit in Whose Mind the miracle in which all time stands still abides, the miracle in which one moment spent in using these ideas becomes a time of timelessness and infinite release.

2Give these minutes gladly, and count on Him Who promised to infuse them with eternity. ^IV

³He will strengthen every little effort you make with all His Strength.

⁴Give Him the minutes He needs today, that He may help you understand with Him that you are the Spirit who abides in God, who calls through His Voice to every living thing.

⁵He offers His Vision to all who ask, and replaces error with the simple truth.

5. The Holy Spirit will be glad to take five minutes of each hour from your hands and carry them around this aching world, where pain and misery seem to rule.

²He will not overlook one open mind that is ready to accept the healing gifts your practice brings and He will place them everywhere He knows they will be welcomed. ^V

³And every time someone accepts them as his thoughts and uses them to heal, their healing power will grow.

6. Thus will every gift you give be multiplied a thousandfold and tens of thousands more.

²And when it is returned to you, it will surpass in might the little gift you gave, just as the sun outshines a fading spark from a firefly that only lives a moment and is gone.

³The lasting brilliance of this light will stay with you, guiding you out of darkness, and you will never forget the way again.

7. Begin these happy exercises with the words the Holy Spirit speaks to you, and let them echo throughout the world through Him:

²I am Spirit,

³A holy Son of God,

⁴Free of all limits,

⁵Safe, healed and whole,

⁶Free to forgive,

⁷And free to save the world.

⁸And once you have expressed this, the Holy Spirit will accept the gift you received from Him, increase its power, and return it to you.

8. Gladly give Him each practice today.

²And He will speak to you, reminding you that you are Spirit, that you are one with Him and with God, with your brothers and with your Self.

³Listen to His promise every time you speak the words He gives you today, and let Him tell your mind they are the truth.

⁴Use them in every moment of uncertainty, and you will escape the mournful consequences of believing you are something else.

⁵The Holy Spirit brings you peace today.

⁶Receive His words, and offer them to Him.

---

^I This is the fifth and final consecutive Lesson devoted to your One Self—a sign of the crucial importance the Course gives to this concept. This term expresses the consistency and integrity of your reality. You are much more than merely analogous to God; you are identical to Him, for you were created exactly in His image and likeness. You are His Extension, His beloved Son.

Being One—identical and forever unchangeable—alternatives are impossible, and with them, conflict and doubt. This is the perfect monopolarity of Existence, of What Is, of God, of what you are.

You are That: pure Being, Being pure. Your only function is to be What You Are—the perfect and sole expression of the three aspects of Being: Love, Knowledge, and Will, manifested without limit, infinitely and eternally. You love Reality with infinite love—all that exists—which is what you are and which you know perfectly, because it is your own Self, which you create in eternity by extending your own existence without end.

Words fall far too short to describe your Reality. That is your One Self. Your ego is utterly dazzled by even the faintest vision of your Self. And it cannot even be said that your light “dispels” the darkness of your ego, for there never was any darkness—only the faint belief that once there had been, in an illusory time. That is what you are: all that is, has been, and ever will be.

^II Matthew 28:20 “…and lo, I am with you always, even unto the end of the world.”

Amen.

^III In the dream, a thousand years of sleep are saved; Reality continues within its own continuity. Reality is forever and ever.

^IV Here—and in the three lines that follow—the reference is to the Holy Spirit.

^V These lines highlight the importance and profound value of time dedicated to sincere contemplation and prayer. They remind us that any moment given to the Holy Spirit becomes a powerful instrument of healing for the world. Every receptive mind receives the benefit of such dedication, for mind—being shared—is positively influenced by the spiritual practice of a few.

In this sense, the quiet yet extraordinarily effective work of those who, like cloistered monks and nuns, offer their entire lives in contemplation and prayer stands out in particular. Their silent, constant, and humble commitment contributes significantly to transforming and healing the collective consciousness, thus expanding peace and alleviating suffering in a world where pain seems to predominate.

Salvation comes from my one Self.

1. Though you are one Self, you experience yourself as if you were two.

²You see yourself as both good and evil, loving and hating, mind and body.

³This sense of being split into opposites induces constant conflict within you, and leads you to try frantically to reconcile the opposing views of what you think you are.

⁴You have sought many such solutions and none has worked.

⁵The opposites you see in you will never be compatible.

⁶Only one of them is true. ^I

2. To be saved, you must accept the fact that truth and illusion cannot be reconciled.

²No matter how you try, what means you use, or where you see the problem,

³Until you accept this, you will pursue a countless string of goals that you cannot reach.

⁴You will invest in time and effort, in hopes and doubts, over and over again.

⁵And each attempt will fail as the one before, and as the one to come.

3. Nonsensical problems cannot be resolved within the frame in which they are set.

²Two selves in conflict is a condition that cannot be resolved.

³There is no meeting ground between good and evil.

⁴The self you made can never be your Self.

⁵And your Self cannot be split in two and still remain what It is and must forever be.

4. Mind and body cannot both exist.

²Do not try to reconcile the two, for one denies the other’s presence as reality.

³If you are physical, your mind has disappeared into a concept of yourself in which it has no meaning.

⁴But if you are Spirit, then the body must be meaningless to your concept of yourself.

5. The mind is the means by which Spirit expresses Its Self. ^II

²And the mind that serves Spirit is at peace and full of joy.

³Its power comes from Spirit, and it fulfills its function gladly.

⁴Yet mind can also see itself divorced from Spirit, and believe it dwells within a body, confused and limited.

⁵In that case, it does not fulfill its function, is not at peace, and cannot even grasp the idea of happiness.

6. Moreover, a mind apart from Spirit cannot think.

²It has denied its Source of strength and sees itself as helpless, limited, and weak.

³Dissociated from its function, now it thinks it is alone and separate, attacked by enemies it cannot understand, and hiding in the fragile shelter of a body.

⁴Now it must reconcile the different with the same, for it believes that is its function. ^III

⁵Waste no more time on this.

⁶Who can resolve the senseless conflicts a dream presents?

⁷What could their resolution mean?

⁸What purpose could it serve?

⁹What use could it be?

7. Salvation cannot make illusions real, nor solve a problem that does not exist.

²Perhaps you hope it can.

³But would you have God’s plan for your deliverance be only painful, and not release you?

⁴Your Self retains God’s Thoughts, and They remain within your mind and in the Mind of God.

⁵The Holy Spirit holds salvation in your mind and offers it the way to peace.

8. Salvation is a Thought you share with God, because His Voice accepted it for you and answered in your name that it is done.

²Thus, salvation is among the Thoughts your Self cherishes and keeps for you.

³Today we will try to find this Thought, whose presence in your mind is guaranteed by Him Who speaks to you from your one Self.

⁴Our five-minute practices each hour will be devoted to the search for your Self within your mind.

⁵Salvation comes from this one Self, through Him Who is the bridge between your mind and It. ^IV

9. Wait patiently and let the Holy Spirit speak of your Self and what your mind can do, restored to It and free to serve Its Will.

²Begin by saying:

³Salvation comes from my one Self.

⁴Its Thoughts are mine to use.

⁵Then seek Its Thoughts, and claim Them as your own.

⁶These are your real thoughts, which you have denied while you wandered aimlessly through a world of dreams in search of substitutes.

⁷Here are your Thoughts—the only ones you have.

⁸Salvation is among Them.

⁹Find it there.

10. If you succeed, the Thoughts that come to you will tell you you are saved and that your mind has found the function it had sought to lose.

²Your Self will welcome it and give it peace.

³And after its strength is restored, it will flow from Spirit to Spirit, throughout all creation, in loving blessing and perfect union.

⁴Your mind will bless all things.

⁵And now that confusion has ended, you are restored to your Self, for you have finally found It.

11. Your Self knows that today you cannot fail.

²Perhaps your mind is still uncertain for a time.

³Do not be dismayed by this. ^V

⁴The joy your Self experiences It will save for you, and you will come to be fully aware of it once more.

⁵Each time you devote five minutes of each hour to seeking the One Who joins your mind to your Self, you add another treasure to the store He keeps for you.

12. Each time today you remind your restless mind that salvation comes from your one Self, you add another treasure to your growing store.

²And all of it will be given to anyone who asks and will accept the gift.

³So think of how much you can give today, so that it may be given you.

---

^I The fundamental idea of this Lesson is the monopolarity of existence, which, from a strictly ontological standpoint, is self-evident: existence is one and positive. This is the foundational idea of the non-dualistic paradigm, which in itself is a tautological declaration: only what exists, exists. Yet the simplest and truest ideas are often inaccessible to minds that function poorly.

The world’s thought system, adhering to a dualistic paradigm, is complex, magical in nature, and, at its core, extraordinarily naïve. The world—though for no clear reason—assumes that if something exists, its absence must also exist, and on that assumption it builds its entire thinking. To accept the existence of absences is the conclusion of a sick mind, and it constitutes in itself a disastrous cognitive bias. It is a bias so universally shared that the world does not recognize it as such. This belief is devastating to the mind, which then derives from it an imaginary world based on something that is not there—and does not exist.

Only what is exists, what is there, and that is always positive. This is a truth so simple that any small child can understand it. But when people grow up, sadly, they begin to see phantoms, for they have trained their eyes to show them what is not there. Thus they go mad and begin to dream and to fear.

To consider the existence of the nonexistent is the mental illness of this world. To think that if love is real, its opposite—its absence, fear—must also be real is madness. Yet that is how everyone thinks. And then they call the absences of light “shadows,” seeing them everywhere and fearing them—for are they not “there,” they say? But shadows neither are nor exist, for they are the absences of what does exist. And so they build in their fragmented minds a world made of absences of love, and they believe they see it—and live in it. Does it seem logical to think in that way? Probably not. You are too accustomed to it, and to you the sole existence of love seems an appealing proposal, but nothing more than a fantasy.

The idea of separation in the mind of the Son of God—the ego as cause—has led him to regard the absence of being as a real possibility, one that has now become significant. Now the egoic mind—the ego as effect—believes in absences, perceives itself as lacking, and projects, and believes it lives, in an imaginary world constructed from absences of love.

For God’s sake—absences do not exist! Only what exists, exists. What is real is not, has never been, and can never be in danger. And all that you think is in danger is not real and should not concern you at all. That is why the peace of God is guaranteed.

You are a Single Being—what else could you be? Something that simultaneously is and is not? Stop dreaming that you are evil or that you lack something. Existence is a strictly positive condition, and that is so evident that it is almost embarrassing to have to declare it. Only Existence exists. You may regard it, if you wish, as love, as light, or as will—but that is only a way of conceiving it, for in essence, Existence is One and ineffable. What exists cannot be perceived, because that is Reality, and that can only be known. And indeed, that is what you know well, and, moreover, you know nothing else. Everything else is addition—fabrications of your own invention that dull your mind with sinister imaginings. That is your eternal reality, and it is not “experiential,” for only subjects (note the word) perceive and experience—but you are not a subject; you are Existence Itself.

You, as a subject—to your own interpretations of reality—will perceive this Course as something profoundly negative precisely because this Course is absolutely positive. Here error is denied, everything that is not true is denied—and that includes everything you now believe in, for belief is what has led you to that pitiful condition. You need believe in nothing! You do, however, need to stop believing. When you do, suddenly and for a brief instant, you will understand your immense mistake with astonishment—and then you will see it dissolve into the nothingness that never was.

It is also true that, from the conflicted thought of the world, these statements are incomprehensible—but what is truly incomprehensible is the world’s thought. Now, in your present state of confusion, simply allow for another possibility—another way of seeing. Practice these Lessons of light diligently, and trust. The Love of God and your One Self await that small gesture of yours.

Read this Lesson with gentleness and attention. Each of its lines is filled with light and truth. Relax your mind and seek understanding. Do not struggle, do not defend, do not attack, and do not believe anything—simply open your mind and trust.

^II In very few instances of this Course is the ontological nature of the mind discussed. This is one of them. Another appears in the Glossary: “The term ‘mind’ is used to represent the active principle of spirit, which supplies it with its creative energy.” (G-2.1:1)

Mind here is not the ultimate origin, but an instrument, a channel, a medium of communication. Spirit—the spiritual essence—is the true nature of Being: eternal, unlimited, and perfect. Yet to manifest its identity, Spirit uses the mind, which functions as a medium capable of reflecting, recognizing, and expressing its authentic reality.

To put it abstractly, mind would be the vehicle of Will; Love, its content; the light of Truth, its direction; and Creation, its destination.

Thus mind has no autonomy or independent power, for it is a potential realm that acquires meaning only when it is placed in service to Spirit, allowing Its Light, Its Love, and Its Truth to flow through it. When the mind recognizes and accepts this role, it becomes a transparent instrument that facilitates the manifestation of the true Self. Conversely, when the mind mistakenly identifies with the ego, it blocks that communication and obscures the knowledge of our real identity.

The fundamental teaching implied here is that healing and spiritual awakening occur when we consciously allow our mind to fulfill its true function: to express faithfully the Self we are—that is, the perfect presence of Spirit.

^III Mind, which is spiritual in nature, differs from all the things of the world, which are alike among themselves because they are “physical.” The mind believes its function is to manage its interests with the things of the world—something impossible, for they belong to completely different realms. The mind is abstract and real, whereas the things of the world are concrete and illusory.

^IV The Holy Spirit is the bridge uniting your mind—divided and afflicted by the ego—with your Self.

^V The phrase “Do not be dismayed” appears several times in the Bible. For example, Isaiah 41:10 “Fear not, for I am with you; be not dismayed, for I am your God; I will strengthen you, I will help you, I will uphold you with My righteous right hand.”

I am one Self, united with my Creator.

1. Today’s idea accurately describes how God created you.

²You are one within yourself, and One with Him.

³Yours is the unity of all creation.

⁴Your perfect oneness makes change in you impossible.

⁵Yet you do not accept this, and you fail to realize that it must be so.

⁶This is only because you believe you have changed yourself already.

2. You see yourself as a ridiculous parody of God’s creation: weak, vicious, ugly, and sinful, miserable and beset with pain.

²This is your version of yourself—a self divided into many warring parts, separated from God, and held together by a capricious and unstable maker, to whom you pray.

³He does not hear your prayers, for he is deaf.

⁴He does not see your oneness, for he is blind.

⁵He does not understand that you are the Son of God, for he is senseless and understands nothing. ^I

3. Today we will try again to be aware only of what your Self can hear and see, and what makes perfect sense. ^II

²Once again we direct our exercises toward reaching your one Self, united with Its Creator. ^III

³With patience and hope, we try again today.

4. Devoting the first five minutes of each waking hour to practice today has certain advantages at the stage of learning in which you are currently.

²It is difficult for you not to let your mind wander during a longer practice period. ^IV

³You must already have noticed this.

⁴You have seen how much you need discipline for your mind.

⁵It is necessary that you be aware of this, for it is a real obstacle to your progress.

5. Frequent, shorter practice periods also have distinct advantages for you at this stage.

²Besides recognizing your difficulties with sustained attention, you must also have noticed that unless you are reminded of your goal frequently, you tend to forget it for long periods.

³You often forget the brief applications of the idea for the day, and you have not yet developed the habit of using it as a constant response to temptation.

6. Therefore, now you need a carefully structured approach, including frequent reminders of your goal and regular attempts to reach it.

²A set schedule, as such, is not the ideal requirement for your training in salvation.

³It is, however, advantageous for those whose motivation is inconsistent and who still resist learning.

7. So we will continue for a while with the five-minute-an-hour practice format, urging you to omit as few as possible.

²Using the first five minutes of the hour will be especially helpful, since it imposes a more structured discipline on your mind.

³But do not use your lapses from this schedule as an excuse not to return to it as soon as you can.

8. You may be tempted to view the day as lost because you failed to do what was required.

²But this should merely be recognized as what it is: a refusal to correct your mistake and a lack of willingness to try again.

³Your errors do not delay the Holy Spirit in His teaching.

⁴Your unwillingness to let them go does.

9. Let us therefore be determined, especially for the coming week, to be willing to forgive ourselves for our lack of diligence and our failure to follow the instructions for practicing today’s idea.

²This tolerance for weakness will enable us to overlook it, rather than give it the power to delay our learning.

³If we give it that power, we will see weakness as strength, and we will be confused about what strength is.

10. When you fail to meet the requirements of this course, you are merely making a mistake.

²This calls for correction, and nothing more.

³To allow the mistake to continue is to make additional mistakes, which are based on the first and reinforce it.

⁴It is this process that must be laid aside, for it is nothing but a defense of illusion against the truth.

11. Let all these errors go by simply recognizing them as what they are.

²They are attempts to keep you unaware that you are one Self, united with your Creator, at one with every aspect of creation, and limitless in power and in peace.

³This is the truth, and nothing else is true.

⁴Today we will affirm this truth again, and try to reach the place in you where there is no doubt that only this is true.

⁵Begin today’s longer practice periods by giving your mind this assurance, with all the certainty you can give:

⁶I am one Self, united with my Creator,

At one with every aspect of creation,

And limitless in power and in peace.

12. Then close your eyes and repeat this statement slowly to yourself, letting its meaning sink into your mind and replace your false ideas:

²I am one Self.

³Repeat this several times, then try to experience the meaning that the words convey.

⁴You are one Self, united and secure in light and joy and peace.

⁵You are the Son of God, one Self with one Creator and one goal: to bring awareness of this oneness to all minds, so that true creation may extend the totality and unity of God.

13. You are one Self, complete, healed and whole, with the power to lift the veil of darkness from the world and let the light in you shine forth to teach the world the truth about itself.

²You are one Self, in perfect harmony with all there is and all that will be.

³You are one Self, the holy Son of God, united with your brothers in that Self, united with your Father in His Will.

14. Feel this one Self in you, and let It shine away all your illusions and your doubts.

²This is your Self, the Son of God Himself, sinless as His Creator, with His strength within you and His Love forever yours.

³You are one Self, and it is this Self you can feel within you and free the world from all illusions through this one Mind which is this Self—the holy truth in you.

15. Do not forget today.

²We need your help, your little part in bringing happiness to all the world.

³And Heaven looks to you in confidence that you will try today.

⁴Share its certainty, for it is yours.

⁵Be vigilant.

⁶Do not forget today.

16. Throughout the day, keep your goal in mind.

²Repeat the idea for today as often as you can, and understand that each time you do, someone hears the voice of hope, the stirring of the truth within their mind, the gentle rustling of the wings of peace.

³Your own acknowledgment you are one Self, united with your Father, is a call to all the world to be at one with you.

17. Be sure to offer the promise of today’s idea to everyone you meet, by saying silently:

²You and I are one Self, united with our Creator.

³I honor you because of what I am, and because of what He is,

Who loves us both as one.

---

^I This is, more or less, the idea you hold of God in your innermost being. Notice that your prayers are usually filled with instructions and imperatives. In them you “inform” God of your apparent needs, assuming that He is ignorant and unaware of what is happening, and you find it entirely natural that you should be the one to tell Him what is going on. Moreover, you also assume that God is at your service and ready to carry out your commands.

You tend to conjugate the verbs in your prayers in the imperative mood: “Give, forgive, listen, heal…” Reflect on the immense insanity of your ego which, on the one hand, tells you that you are a wicked sinner—wretched, limited, powerless before the hazards of this world, and doomed to die—yet, on the other hand, urges you to address your Creator with astonishing arrogance.

^II Today you are going to learn to relate to the things of the world from your Self. And that manner makes perfect sense because of what you truly are. To establish any other kind of relationship would be an imposture and a betrayal of your true identity.

Prepare yourself to know how a Being who possesses the dignity of the holy Son of God—no more and no less—relates to the world.

^III You will see that throughout this Lesson great emphasis is placed on the idea that your Self is One. This idea contrasts radically with the one you now hold of yourself, for you believe you are a being scattered among many aspects, often in conflict with one another—that one part of you wants one thing and another part wants something else—and that stresses you and produces great tension.

That is nothing but a fantasy, an illusion, and the result of the attention you give to the voice of your ego. You are not like that at all. You are perfectly unified and absolutely whole, full, and complete. You have one single purpose and one single will, and that is the very Will of God.

^IV Pay close attention to what is said in this paragraph and the next six. Notice how well Jesus knows you. The counsel he gives you there is crucial for your learning. Jesus warns you of the difficulties and temptations your poorly trained mind will experience. Read carefully, and heed him. Keep in mind that it matters less how precisely you follow the instructions for the day’s practice than your willingness to fulfill your function.

If your will to reach the goal is genuine but your mind is weak, do not worry; you will progress. But if your practice does not arise from a sincere and deep longing to change your mind, you will still advance, though not very far. Be honest. Search within yourself for the best in you and lay it upon the altar of your devotion. The angels of God will descend to lift you far beyond where your small strength could take you. Remember, Jesus is always by your side. Persevere with all your soul. Much is at stake.

I am as God created me.^I

1. Today we continue with the idea that alone brings complete salvation.

²It is the statement that renders all temptation powerless.

³It is the thought that silences the ego and completely undoes it.

⁴You are as God created you.

⁵This one idea silences the sounds of the world, removes all thoughts it ever held, and makes the world disappear entirely from sight.

⁶With this, salvation is accomplished.

⁷With this, sanity is restored.

2. True light is strength, and strength is sinlessness.

²If you remain as God created you, you must be strong, and the light must be in you.

³He who guaranteed your sinlessness must also be the guarantee of your strength and your light.

⁴You are as God created you.

⁵Darkness cannot obscure the glory of the Son of God. ^II

⁶You are in the light, and you are strong in the sinlessness in which you were created, and in which you will remain for all eternity.

3. Today we will again devote the first five minutes of every waking hour to attempting to feel the truth about you.

²Begin each hour with these words:

³I am as God created me.

⁴I am His Son eternally.

⁵Now try to reach the Son of God in you.

⁶This is the Self that never sinned, nor made an image to replace reality.

⁷This is the Self that never left its home in God to walk the world uncertainly.

⁸This is the Self that knows no fear, and cannot conceive of loss or suffering or death.

4. Nothing is asked of you to reach this goal except to lay aside all idols and images you have made of yourself;

²To go beyond the long list of traits, both “good” and “bad,” you have assigned to yourself;

³And to wait in quiet expectancy for the truth. ^III

⁴God Himself has promised that it will be revealed to all who ask for it. ^IV

⁵You are asking now.

⁶You will not fail, because He cannot fail.

5. If you do not meet the requirement of practicing the first five minutes of every hour, at least remind yourself hourly:

²I am as God created me.

³I am His Son eternally.

⁴Tell yourself often today that you are as God created you. ^V

⁵And be sure to respond to anyone who seems to irritate you with these words:

⁶You are as God created you.

⁷You are His Son eternally.

⁸Make a strong effort today to do the hourly exercises.

⁹Each one you do will be a giant step toward your release and a landmark in learning the thought system this course sets forth. ^VI

---

^I This statement perfectly and succinctly summarizes all the teachings of this Course. This is the luminous evangelical message of Jesus. This is the single thought the sleeping mind must remember in order to transcend the dream of separation. Nothing else is needed.

But to accept a new idea, it is necessary to abandon the one that asserts its opposite. Thus, this is a Lesson for replacing beliefs.

I have spent more than ninety days training my mind to use it differently from how I was using it before, and at last I understand the purpose of all that practice. All that work was simply to understand who I truly am and why I believed myself to be something else. Today’s idea explains it to me: “I am the holy Son of God.” This is the answer to the famous question: What am I?

Now I understand why nothing I see means anything: I have been the author of those insubstantial meanings. Yet this disturbs me, because deep within I know they are not true. I have believed my own stories, and now I constantly recall them by bringing them into the present—but what is really happening is that my mind is absorbed in what I once imagined in the past.

Those stories—my thoughts—certainly have no intrinsic meaning, but to me they are very important, because I invented them and thought they were true, and all that I have imagined frightens me.

Now I want to see everything differently, for I have realized that everything I think I see is a form of vengeance against myself. That does not serve me, for it makes me suffer—but now I know that if I relinquish my own interpretations, I can escape all that madness. I need do nothing more than that.

In truth, I do not know what anything is for—but because I am afraid of that emptiness, I try to fill it with my own content.

I want to see! I want to see everything differently!

If God created me perfect, as His holy Son, my mind is the Mind of God; my mind is holy, and I am blessed. My holiness is omnipotent, and in my mind there is only Peace, Light, and Love. What else could there be?

If I think I see something else, it can only be illusions—things that are not true and that I can, and must, let pass; things I must forgive.

The Love of God sustains me, and I am the Love of God.

Because I am the Love of God, I am the Light of the world. My only function in this illusory world is to forgive the illusions I think I see.

It is very important that I do not forget that function; if I do, I will again believe that illusions are real and will harbor resentments—and that is terrible, for resentments completely obscure the Light in me, and I want there to be Light.

There is no Will but God’s Will, for God is all that exists.

God does not command, but in this world of light and shadow it is wise for me to focus my attention on the Light, which is the only real component of my mind, for shadows have no substance.

Before every scene, I will fix my gaze on the Light, not on the shadows, and then I will see miracles. Thus will I become aware that truly there is no problem, nor has there ever been one.

I thought I saw conflict everywhere because I believed that shadows had meaning. Now I know they do not.

Now Light, Joy, and Peace dwell in me.

^II Matthew 25:31 “When the Son of Man comes in His glory, and all the holy angels with Him, then He will sit on the throne of His glory.”

^III Like most of the five-minute-per-hour practices, today’s is a meditation exercise. Here you set aside all the attributes you have assigned to yourself, and then, instead of diving into your mind—as in most previous meditations—you simply wait in a state of stillness in which the only thing that occupies your mind is expectancy: the anticipation that your true Self will be revealed to you.

This is the first appearance of a meditation method that will become the predominant form of the Workbook during the second half of the year.

^IV Matthew 7:7 “Ask, and it will be given to you; seek, and you will find; knock, and it will be opened to you.”

^V Whenever something disturbs you, say to yourself, “I am as God created me,” and you will witness a titanic struggle. You will witness your ego battling against the truth. The moment you pronounce those words, you will see how the ego, in a thousand different ways, will try to convince you that it is not true.

The first thing it will do is try to persuade you that it is you. That is the hardest part of its entire strategy to overcome, for although its only argument is that it is a voice in your mind—which is true—it in no way follows that this voice is what you are. You are not that voice. In fact, you are no voice at all. That is absurd. It is crucial that you understand this, because if you cannot disassociate yourself from the thought that you are that voice you hear in your mind, you are lost. From that point on, you will begin to see everything on its own terms, thinking that it is you who is thinking—which is not true at all. That is merely the ego manifesting in your mind the very idea that conceived it: the idea of separation.

To understand what is happening, you must notice that in the process of hearing that voice, your will plays no part at all. The voice of the ego always arises in your mind of its own accord, entirely unbidden—it comes suddenly, uninvited, and by itself. And that is what you call thinking. In reality, you are not thinking at all. You are merely witnessing madness; the fact is, you are so accustomed to that voice that you believe it is your reality. Recognize that although that voice appears constantly in your mind and is your most familiar personal experience, it in no way means it is valid, real, or well-guided. That phenomenon merely indicates that you have been deceived all along—nothing more. The proof is that that voice has never given you anything it promised and has never truly made you happy.

Again, be prepared, and you will see that when you say, “I am as God created me,” the voice of the ego will try to convince you that this is fantasy—and that what it says, on the other hand, is as real as the world you see, as all your memories, all your fears, and all your desires. It is not so. All that is as real as the dream you had last night, and now you think your waking dream is reality—just as you thought your nighttime dream was real while you were dreaming it. It is almost the same dream, with small variations, but its substance is identical: this one, too, is made of lies.

Awakening to your true Self may be very easy or very hard—it depends on you. As long as you believe you are in this world, you will always hear the voice of your ego. That will always happen—but it depends on you whether you listen to it or not. Hearing and listening are two very different things, and the only thing that distinguishes them is your will. Your ego wants to hijack your will. Do not let it. You are your will, and your will is free—precisely because you are as God created you.

You are not at all defenseless against the ego; you still have all the power. Use it well, and do not let yourself be deceived by its proposals. Be steadfast in your purpose, and inevitably you will awaken. Moreover, if you choose rightly, while you still dream you will have complete control over your dream and will witness many miracles. You will not awaken by your own effort, but you will be awakened—for that is your will, and your will is always fulfilled, for you are as God created you.

^VI This Lesson is the third “giant step” of the Workbook. See the note for Lesson 61 for the list of all the giant steps.

Light and joy and peace abide in me.

1. You think you are the home of evil, darkness, and sin.

²You believe that if anyone could see the truth about you, they would recoil in horror, as if from a poisonous snake.

³You believe that if the truth about you were revealed, a terror so intense would seize your heart that you would rush to death by your own hand, unable to bear to live after seeing such a thing. ^I

2. These beliefs are so firmly fixed in your mind that it is difficult to help you see they are based on nothing. ^II

²That you have made mistakes is obvious.

³And, given what you now believe about yourself, it is also true that you have sought salvation in strange ways;

⁴That you have been deceived, and have deceived;

⁵That you have been afraid of foolish fantasies and savage dreams,

⁶And have bowed down to idols made of dust.

3. Today we question all of this, not from your point of view, but from a very different one, one that makes such silly beliefs quite meaningless.

²These thoughts do not agree with the Will of God.

³He does not share these strange ideas with you.

⁴This alone is proof enough that they are wrong.

⁵But you do not see it so.

4. How joyful is it to know that you are not what you think you are.

²That all the evil you believed you did was never done.

³That all your “sins” are nothing.

⁴That you are as pure and holy as you were created.

⁵That light and joy and peace abide in you.

⁶You think God’s Will is death, but it is life.

⁷You think you are being destroyed, but you are being saved.

5. The self you made is not the Son of God.

²Therefore, it does not exist at all.

³And anything it seems to do or think means nothing.

⁴It is neither good nor bad.

⁵It is unreal, and nothing more than that.

⁶It does not fight against the Son of God.

⁷It does not hurt him or attack his peace.

⁸It has not changed creation, nor reduced eternal sinlessness to sin, and love to hate.

⁹What power can this self you made possess, when it would contradict the Will of God?

6. Your sinlessness is guaranteed by God.

²This needs to be repeated often, until it is accepted.

³It is the truth.

⁴God Himself guarantees your sinlessness.

⁵Nothing can touch it or change what God created eternal.

⁶The self you made, evil and full of sin, is meaningless.

⁷Your sinlessness is guaranteed by God, and light and joy and peace abide in you.

7. Salvation requires the acceptance of but one thought—

²You are as God created you, not what you made of yourself.

³Whatever evil you may think you did, you are as God created you.

⁴Whatever mistakes you made, the truth about you has not changed.

⁵Creation is eternal and unalterable.

⁶Your sinlessness is guaranteed by God.

⁷You are, and always will be, exactly as you were created.

⁸Light and joy and peace abide in you because God put them there.

8. In our longer sessions today, which would be most beneficial if practiced during the first five minutes of every hour, we will begin by affirming the truth about our creation:

²Light and joy and peace abide in me.

³My sinlessness is guaranteed by God.

⁴Then lay aside the foolish images you hold of yourself, and spend the rest of the practice period trying to experience what God has given you in place of what you have made.

9. You can only be either what God created or what you made.

²One Self is true; the other is not there.

³Try to experience the unity of your One Self.

⁴Try to appreciate Its holiness and the Love from which It was created.

⁵Try not to interfere with the Self which God created as what you are, by hiding Its majesty behind the tiny idols of evil and sin you made to replace It.

⁶Let It be Itself.

⁷Here you are.

⁸This is you. 

⁹And light and joy and peace abide in you because that is so.

10. You may not be willing or able to devote the first five minutes of every hour to the exercises today.

²Try, however, to do so when you can.

³At the very least, remember to repeat these thoughts each hour:

⁴Light and joy and peace abide in me.

⁵My sinlessness is guaranteed by God.

⁶Then close your eyes for a moment and realize that this is a statement of the truth about you.

11. If any situation arises that seems to disturb you, quickly dispel the illusion of fear by repeating these thoughts again.

²And should you be tempted to become angry with someone, tell them silently:

³Light and joy and peace abide in you.

⁴Your sinlessness is guaranteed by God.

12. Today you can do much for the world’s salvation.

²You can do much today to bring yourself closer to accepting the role God has given you in salvation.

³And you can do much today to convince your mind of the truth of today’s idea. ^III

---

^I It is quite possible that this statement may seem somewhat exaggerated to you. Perhaps you think that, although you are not perfect, you are, deep down, a good person—that you do not seem to yourself as bad as it paints you there.

Open your mind to the possibility that, rather, that is the idea of yourself that allows you to keep going—the one that makes you still trust your own judgment, that allows you to get up in the morning to attend to your tasks and to relate to other people who are more or less like you, the one responsible for your judging others and everything from a position of a certain superiority.

Have you ever wondered why the idea of opening your mind completely to others repulses you so much? Not to mention your heart. Have you ever wondered why you fear heights, darkness, or death?

Why do you think there is so much evil and suffering in the world? Why are you terrified by pain, loss, and loneliness? Why does your heart shrink when someone does not love you? Why do you sometimes feel a murderous rage over a small offense?

Just as you think the world is a dangerous place with areas you would never dare to go, your mind too is full of deep shadows you prefer not to visit.

Where have you known all the evil you have believed you saw in the world? Where have you experienced all the pain and fear you have ever felt? Has it not been in your mind? And what is your mind, if not yourself?

If all the horror you have witnessed—and all that you are capable of imagining—has been or is in your mind, and if your mind is you, then it is evident that you have quite a problem.

Moreover, if you are cause, effect, or condition of so much evil, it is rather unlikely that the solution to such abomination is also within you—at least not as you have been managing it until now.

It would seem most prudent to seek it elsewhere, or by some other method. Could that be possible?

^II Last night I had a terrible dream. The very embodiment of horror was pursuing me, and I ran absolutely terrified, trying to escape, until a moment came when it caught me, cornered me, and I could no longer flee. The horror hurled itself upon me, and in a desperate effort to free myself, I turned quickly—and fell out of bed.

I do not think I have ever been so happy, despite the pain I caused myself. Then I climbed back into bed, but I could no longer sleep. I began to think about how ridiculous the whole situation was, and then I asked myself, “What if all that I call ‘my personal life’ were nothing but a dream—a dream from which, for some reason, I cannot awaken?” After all, that is what dreams are: something that seems very real and from which you cannot awaken, for if you awaken, it is no longer a dream.

On closer inspection, the question itself makes little sense, for if it truly is a dream, and if while dreaming you cannot—or will not—wake up, what can you do?

Since I was wide awake and could not fall asleep again, I began to reflect on what I would say to my other self who was immersed in that terrible nightmare—to that very self from a short while before whom I still remembered with chills.

I thought long about the matter, and in the end I arrived at two possible strategies.

The first, what seemed essential to me, was to whisper to that frightened character not to worry—that it is all a dream—and that all he needs to do to escape that dire situation is to wake up. That is obvious.

As I thought about this, imagining how to whisper it to my other self, I realized that it was not as simple as it seems.

What if my other self becomes frightened by that whispering voice? What if, instead of helping, what I am doing is driving him into a deeper panic? Perhaps now he thinks that, in addition to the horror chasing him, there is some strange being from another dimension trying to confuse him with dark intent.

Or worse, perhaps my poor sleeping self thinks he is going mad. It certainly is not an easy situation to resolve.

Besides, waking up is easier said than done. How does one wake up? I do not recall ever having done anything to wake myself up. It is something that simply happens.

The second thing I thought, if that waking up did not work, was to advise my frightened self at least to handle the situation well—to understand that all the evil threatening him is not real, that it is only the product of his imagination, and that if he wishes, he can control it.

I would tell him not to worry—that in reality he is lying peacefully in his bed, and that sooner or later he will awaken. That is inevitable.

Because my nightmare was so recent, it was easy for me to foresee my sleeping self’s reactions to my comments from outside the dream, and after much consideration, I could think of little else to say to him.

Finally, I lost patience and blurted out, “You know what? If you can’t wake up, and you can’t or won’t do anything to change that horror, let it catch you—after all, nothing will happen to you. Maybe that way you’ll wake up at last!”

I think I now understand better how difficult Jesus’ work is.

^III Dictated on September 24, 1969.

Miracles are seen in the light, and light and strength are one.

1. Today’s idea is an extension of the previous one.

²You do not associate light with strength, nor darkness with weakness.

³This is because your idea of what it means to see is tied to the body, and to its eyes and brain.

⁴That is why you believe you can change what you see by placing small pieces of glass or other transparent material before your eyes, held in a frame or placed against the eye.

⁵This is one of the many magical beliefs that arise from the conviction that you are a body, and that the body’s eyes can see.

2. You also believe that your body’s brain can think.

²If you understood the nature of thought, you would laugh at such an insane idea.

³It is as if you believed you hold the match that lights the sun and gives it all its heat, or that you kept the world imprisoned in your hand, firmly grasped, until you let it go.

⁴Yet this is no more insane than believing that the body’s eyes can see, or that the brain can know.

3. The Strength of God in you is the light in which you see, and His is the Mind with which you think.

²His Strength denies your weakness.

³It is your weakness that looks through the body’s eyes, that peers into the darkness to behold what is like itself: the small, the weak, the sick and dying, the needy, the helpless and afraid, the sad, the poor, the hungry, and the unhappy.

⁴This is what is seen through eyes that cannot see and cannot bless. ^I

4. Strength overlooks all these things by looking past appearances. ^II

²It keeps its gaze fixed on the light that lies beyond them.

³It joins with the light, of which it is a part.

⁴And it beholds itself.

⁵It is this that gives you the light in which your Self appears.

⁶In darkness you perceive a self that does not exist.

⁷Strength is the truth about you.

⁸But weakness is the idol you falsely worship and revere, that light may be displaced by darkness, where God intended there be light. ^III

5. Strength comes from truth and shines with the light its Source has given it.

²Weakness, on the other hand, reflects the darkness of its maker.

³It is sick and sees only sickness, which is like itself.

⁴Truth is a savior, and it can only create happiness and peace for all the world.

⁵And it gives its strength in limitless supply to everyone who asks.

⁶It sees that if anyone lacks anything, then all must lack.

⁷And so it gives its light, that all may see and benefit as one.

⁸Truth shares its strength, that miracles may be offered to all, in unity of purpose, forgiveness, and love.

6. Weakness, which looks in darkness, sees no purpose in forgiveness or in love.

²It sees all others as different from itself, and finds nothing in the world it wants to share.

³It judges and condemns, but does not love.

⁴It stays hidden in the dark, and dreams it is strong and victorious, a conqueror of ever-mounting limitations that grow huge in the dark.

⁵Weakness fears itself, attacks itself, and hates itself.

⁶Darkness covers all it sees, leaving it in dreams as fearsome as itself.

⁷There are no miracles here, only hatred.

⁸Weakness separates from what it sees, while light and strength perceive themselves as one.

7. The light of strength is not the light you see.

²It does not shift, nor waver, nor go out.

³It does not pass from night to day and back to darkness until the morning comes again.

⁴The light of strength is constant, sure as Love, and always glad to give, for what It gives is always given to Itself.

⁵No one can ask to share Its vision in vain, and none who enter Its dwelling can leave without a miracle before their eyes and strength and light within their heart.

8. The strength in you will offer you the light, and guide your seeing so that you do not dwell on idle shadows the body’s eyes provide to fool the mind.

²Strength and light unite in you, and where they meet, your Self awaits to welcome you as Its own.

³This is the meeting place we try to find today.

⁴Here we will rest, for in the Peace of God does your Self, His Son, await to meet Itself again and become as One.

9. Let us devote twenty minutes, twice today, to joining in this meeting.

²Let yourself be led to your Self.

³Its strength will be the light in which the gift of vision will be given you.

⁴So leave the darkness for a little while today, and practice seeing in the light.

⁵Close the body’s eyes and ask the truth to show you how to find the meeting place where Self and self unite, and where light and strength are one. ^IV

10. We will practice this in the morning and again at night.

²After the morning session, use the day to prepare for the evening one, in which, full of hope and confidence, we will meet again with our Self.

³Repeat today’s idea as often as you can.

⁴Realize that you are being introduced to the gift of vision. ⁵And recognize that you are being led from darkness to the light, where miracles alone can be perceived.

---

^I Jeremiah 5:21 “Hear now this, O foolish people without understanding, who have eyes and see not, and who have ears and hear not.”

Mark 8:18 “Having eyes, do you not see? And having ears, do you not hear? And do you not remember?”

^II You see everything backwards because you are looking wrongly—and the proof of this is that what you see displeases you. When your heart is uneasy, it is warning you that your mind is malfunctioning.

Your “emotional system” is the “resonance” of your “intellectual system.” The heart—the symbol of love—is the “organ” that reflects the state of the mind—the symbol of knowledge.

Remember again the functions of the soul: to love, to know, and to create. These functions are attributed to the heart, the mind, and the will. In this world, every person possesses a functional heart—an “organ” that responds faithfully and reliably to his or her mental states. Yet it is no less true that their minds are sick and malfunctioning.

This is because they are affected by the idea of separation. In fact, the very belief in having an individual mind is the result of that perverse idea.

That is why this Course places immense emphasis on healing the mind, and to achieve this, it proposes that you place it under the guidance of the Holy Spirit.

The Voice of the Holy Spirit—Teacher of Knowledge and therefore of the mind—aligns your perception with Knowledge and allows you to interpret the dream in the most helpful and benevolent way possible. The proof of this is that when you follow His guidance, your heart is joyful and your mind is at peace.

This means that now your emotional and intellectual systems are functioning “properly.” The work this Course does with the mind has as its goal to open it to the “light” of knowledge, which is the natural state of the Mind of Being.

All this concerning the heart and the mind, by now, you more or less know. But now something more is proposed to you. This Lesson introduces the idea of strength. Strength is precisely the condition of will—that which makes Being a “creator.”

Understand that a sick mind—without light, malfunctioning—implies a fearful heart and a weak will.

This represents the perfect inversion of the joy, light, and strength—or peace, which is the same—of Being.

It is essential to understand that the central element in this equation is the mind. That is why this is a Course in mind training, which, through symbols—since that is the only way your fragmented mind can relate—provides you with a perfectly integrated vision of your present condition and your future goal—to be the Son of God—which is also your past and your eternal present.

For all these reasons, pay close attention to the idea of strength presented here. Strength is your natural condition, and the idea of weakness is an aberration that has entered your mind hand in hand with that other insane idea of being separate.

Your present condition—completely artificial—you yourself maintain in your mind through an endless stream of falsehoods you compulsively repeat to yourself.

You are unaware of doing this, yet it is enough to analyze honestly the language you use to communicate, and you will see that its very syntax, crowded with personal pronouns—mostly in the first person—is a constant reaffirmation of your dual mind.

Try to understand—though it will be very difficult—that all of this is completely fictitious, and that is why it requires your constant effort to remain in your holy mind as a hypnotic belief that diminishes you infinitely.

In reality, it would not even be necessary to evoke what you truly are in order to be it; it would be enough simply to stop deceiving yourself. But since you are so unwell, any means is useful for bringing light into your mind so that you may again enjoy what you have always been—and still are.

^III Genesis 1:3 “Then God said, ‘Let there be light’; and there was light.”

^IV If fortune is kind to you, and even for the briefest instant you so much as brush lightly against the experience of Being proposed here, your doubts will be gone forever. From that moment on, you will live in a state of permanent incredulity toward what the eyes of your body report.

You will not understand how any of it is possible—and indeed, it is not. Yet you will no longer lose the disposition, now natural within you, to be patient and to practice forgiveness.

Now everything will make sense, and you will need no one to convince you of anything—not even to undertake a Course like this. It will no longer be necessary; you will have become the Course itself.

Miracles are seen in the light.

1. It is important to remember that miracles and vision always go together.^I

²This needs to be repeated, and repeated often.

³It is a central idea in your new thought system and the perception it produces.

⁴Miracles are always there.

⁵It is not your vision that brings them about.

⁶Your vision is not their cause.

⁷And if they are not seen, it is not because they are not there.

⁸They are not the effect of your seeing.

⁹You are simply unaware of them.

¹⁰You will see them in the light.

¹¹But you will not see them in darkness. ^II

2. Light, then, is essential for you.

²As long as you remain in darkness, you will not see miracles.

³And so you will be convinced they are not there.

⁴This conclusion follows from the premises that produce darkness.

⁵Denying light leads to the failure to perceive it. ^III

⁶And by not perceiving light, you perceive darkness instead.

⁷Thus, the light becomes useless to you, though it is there.

⁸You cannot use it because you do not know it is there.

⁹And the apparent reality of darkness makes the idea of light seem meaningless.

3. To be told that what you do not see is there sounds like insanity.

²It is very hard to be convinced that what is truly insane is not seeing what is there, and instead seeing what is not. ^IV

³You do not doubt that the body’s eyes can see.

⁴You do not doubt the reality of the images they show you.

⁵You have placed your faith in darkness, not in light.

⁶How can this be reversed?

⁷By yourself, it is impossible.

⁸But you are not alone in this. ^V

4. Your efforts, however small, are strongly supported.

²If you realized how great this strength is, your doubts would vanish.

³Today we will devote the day to trying to feel that strength.

⁴When you feel the strength in you that easily makes all miracles accessible, you will no longer doubt.

⁵The miracles your sense of weakness hides will rise to your awareness as you feel that strength in you.

5. Set aside about ten minutes, three times today, for a quiet time in which you will try to leave your weakness behind.

²This is easily achieved by telling yourself that you are not a body.

³Faith goes to what you want, and you will train your mind to go where you choose.

⁴Your will remains your teacher, and it has all the strength needed to do what it wills. ^VI

⁵You can escape the body if you choose.

⁶You can experience the strength within you.

6. Begin the longer practice periods with this statement of true cause and effect relationships:

²Miracles are seen in the light.

³The body’s eyes do not perceive the light.

⁴But I am not a body.

⁵What am I?

⁶The question that ends this statement is absolutely essential for today’s exercises.

⁷What you think you are is a belief to be undone.

⁸But what you truly are must be revealed to you.

⁹The belief that you are a body must be corrected, for it is a mistake.

¹⁰The truth of what you are calls upon the strength in you to bring into your awareness what error has concealed.

7. If you are not a body, what are you?

²You need to become aware of what the Holy Spirit uses to replace the image of a body in your mind.

³You need to feel something to place your faith in, as you withdraw it from the body.

⁴You need a real experience of something else—something more solid and more secure,

⁵Something more worthy of your faith, and truly there. ^VII

8. If you are not a body, what are you?

²Ask yourself this question sincerely, and then spend a few minutes letting your mistaken thoughts about your attributes be corrected, and their opposites take their place.

³Say, for example:

⁴I am not weak, but strong.

⁵I am not helpless, but all-powerful.

⁶I am not limited, but unlimited.

⁷I am not doubtful, but certain.

⁸I am not an illusion, but a reality.

⁹I cannot see in darkness, but in light.

9. In the second phase of the exercise, try to experience these truths about yourself. ^VIII

²Focus especially on experiencing strength. ^IX

³Remember that every sense of weakness is associated with the belief that you are a body—a belief that is wrong and unworthy of your faith.

⁴Withdraw your faith from it, if only for a moment.

⁵As we go along, you will become more accustomed to placing your faith in what is truly worthy in you.

10. Relax for the remainder of the practice period, trusting that even your smallest effort is fully supported by the Strength of God and all His Thoughts.

²Your strength will come from Them.

³With Their mighty support, you will feel the strength in you.

⁴God and all His Thoughts join you in this practice, in which you share a purpose like Their own.

⁵Theirs is the Light in which you will see miracles, for Their Strength is yours.

⁶Their Strength becomes your eyes, so you may see.

11. Five or six times an hour, at reasonably regular intervals, remind yourself that miracles are seen in the light.

²Also be sure to respond to any temptation with today’s idea.

³This form may be helpful for that specific purpose:

⁴Miracles are seen in the light.

⁵I will not close my eyes because of this.

---

^I This Lesson was dictated on September 21, 1969.

Miracles are what you perceive when you look in a certain way. They are nothing special and, in reality, they change nothing. They simply show you what was already there but what you had not seen before. For the truth is that before, you were not seeing anything either—you were merely imagining things, building stories in your mind from the shadows that the eyes of your body brought you, and which made you believe that what you thought you saw was real. And what you believed you saw, you called “reality.”

Now think of a whiteboard on which is written in black ink the following phrase: “The sky is blue and the sea is vast.” What happens in your mind when you see that? Most likely, you begin to imagine a blue sky and a wide marine horizon. It is also possible that you start speculating that someone with a poetic inclination must have passed by, and perhaps you wonder what led them to write that. It may even be that your mind takes flight and goes further still—you might feel the desire to see the sea, to meet that person, or who knows what else!

Now consider the situation differently—this is an allegory. What are you actually seeing? The truth is that your eyes have merely conveyed to the optic nerve, through the pupils, a certain quantity of photons coming from the white surface of the board. Certain areas of the board—where the black ink was—reflected no photons, and your brain did the rest.

A story appeared in your mind! You might even begin a discussion with the person beside you about your interpretation. But what is intrinsically true is that you have merely witnessed a play of light and shadow, and your mind has chosen to create a story based solely on the darkness—on that where nothing was.

The illusion of the world works in much the same way. Your will can decide what you will focus on: on the light or on the darkness, on what is there or on what is missing. The world you see you build in your mind from absences of light—from absences of love. You do not realize it, but the truth is that your mind is enchanted by things that do not exist, yet which you believe you see.

And the convincing power of your belief is such that you are willing to fight to defend that what you interpret is true; in fact, that is what you do all the time, though you are unaware of it.

This is a Course in mind training so that, by beginning to look differently, you begin to see everything differently. In a sense, what it proposes is that you reverse the mechanisms governing your perception—hence the Course speaks of “reversing” the thought system.

Where before you saw a grievous offense, it tells you it is only an illusion; where before you perceived an attack, it proposes that you interpret it as a call for help; and of the one you consider your enemy, it tells you he is your Savior. Do you see? Everything reversed.

This Course also tells you that it is not necessary at all to believe its proposals. It only asks that you consider them respectfully and put them to the test; then, you yourself will decide by their results.

Indeed, it even warns you against any belief—“good” or “bad.” It cautions that to believe is to misuse the mind, and that you are better guided only by certainty, always distrusting your “good” intentions.

You have never been a good guide for yourself—and you never will be.

^II This meaning of the term “miracle”—as something you see—is the same as in Lesson 78. The Course usually uses the term miracle as an agent (a cause), something that brings about a perceptual change; but here, it is what true perception beholds (an effect).

^III Realize that the reason you do not see the light is because of your will to deny it. The light is indeed there, but you deny it, and therefore you do not see it. Remember, you perceive what you will to see and have.

^IV Notice that although it is said constantly that this Course is very simple, it does not necessarily follow that it is easy.

Here, Jesus tells you that seeing the light is difficult—but not because it is difficult in itself, for seeing the light is natural. It is difficult because you have identified with the ego, and that makes it practically impossible to see the light of which he speaks.

To achieve it, you must break with that identification. Seeing the light is as easy—or as hard—as letting go of your ego.

^V Matthew 19:26 “But Jesus looked at them and said to them, ‘With men this is impossible, but with God all things are possible.’”

^VI Realize that this is primarily a Course about will. You will notice that throughout it you are constantly urged to forgive illusions and are often taught about love—but you are exhorted even more insistently to use your will and align it with the Will of God, following the guidance of your inner Voice and your heart.

^VII It is crucial that you recognize that what you are seeking is an experience, not an explanation. Do not attempt to conceptualize what you are by assigning it attributes or images drawn from the storehouse of memory. None of that is real.

If you wish to take a journey, you need a car—not a drawing of a car. Do not settle for anything that comes to your mind while you still cling to the idea you have of yourself. Those are merely artificial attributes that will further burden your troubled, little self.

The experience of being is without attributes—it is absolute.

^VIII Strictly speaking, Being is an absolute idea and has no attributes. Yet the ideas mentioned above are characteristic traits of Being—as considered from the individual mind—with which it is beneficial for the mind to associate itself.

In truth, this is an exercise in straightening or aligning the individual mind with its true identity. Do not think that what is being proposed to you is a well-intentioned, idealistic abstraction devoid of substance. Nothing could be further from the truth. The ideas proposed here will become for you experiences as real as your will allows them to be.

You can use your mind to grant yourself the small or the limitless—such is the power of your mind. Choose wisely, and do not allow yourself to think thoughts that make you feel bad.

Remember that your heart will always alert you by its mood to whether you are using the mind rightly or not. It is very simple: attend to its guidance.

^IX This is a fundamental mental technique that should be practiced as often as possible throughout the day. It consists, first, of evoking in your mind the idea of strength in the most vivid and authentic way you can; it is not enough merely to think it—you must feel it within yourself.

To do so, bring to mind an image that represents energy and power: a raging sea, a hurricane wind, the engines of an airplane roaring at full power before takeoff—any scene that awakens in you the sense of immense force.

Then, expand that sensation as much as you can and remain in it, fully enjoying it.

Finally, claim that idea and make it yours permanently, as something that belongs to you forever. This is the closest the individual mind can come to what true creation really is.

Be extremely careful not to allow the ego to seize upon the powerful ideas you evoke. The ego covets them with all its might; do not let it.

Remember: you, as an ego, are not that. Rather, that is what you are—the Son of God.

Throughout the day, you will inevitably find yourself in situations that tempt you toward weakness, smallness, or helplessness.

Do not yield.

Focus on experiencing the strength within you—which, in truth, is you. In the next Lesson, you will understand why.

Today’s review covers these ideas: W-79 and W-80

1. W-79. “Let me recognize the problem so it can be solved.”^I

2. Let me understand today that every problem is always some form of grievance I want to keep. ^II

²Let me also understand that the solution is always a miracle I allow to take the place of that grievance. ^III

³Today I want to remember the simplicity of salvation by applying the lesson that there is only one problem and only one solution.

⁴The problem is a grievance, and the solution is a miracle.

⁵And I welcome the solution as I forgive the grievance and invite the miracle to take its place.

3. These specific applications of the idea may be helpful:

²This presents a problem to me, and I want it to be resolved.

³The miracle behind this grievance will resolve it for me.

⁴The solution to this problem is the miracle the problem hides.

4. W-80. “Let me recognize my problems have been solved.”^IV

5. I believe I have problems only because I misunderstand time.

²I think the problem comes first, and that time must pass before it can be resolved.

³I do not see that the problem and the solution arise together.

⁴This is because I have not yet realized that God has placed the solution right beside the problem, so they cannot be separated in time.

⁵The Holy Spirit will teach me this, if I allow Him to.

⁶And then I will understand that it is impossible for me to have a problem that has not already been solved.

6. These expressions of the idea will be helpful for specific applications:

²I do not need to wait for this to be resolved.

³The solution to this problem has already been given me, if I am willing to accept it.

⁴Time cannot separate this problem from its solution.

---

^I In Lesson 79 we learned that the problem is separation. But in truth, that is not exactly the problem, for if separation were real, the problem would be irresolvable. Separation is not real.

The real problem is the desire to be separate from everything—the desire lodged in the mind to encapsulate itself, the desire to construct an identity apart, the desire to be me and nothing else. That is the problem: the desire to place the will in service of an impossible idea—the belief that I am alone.

That inward contraction of the mind upon itself creates a black hole in consciousness, as imaginary as the mind itself—a hole of darkness in which the immense gravitational pull of the ego’s shadowy center prevents the light of love from extending beyond its own limits and turns it toward that pit of nothingness. The ego, enamored of itself, consumes the love of the mind.

The belief in the idea of separation is nothing but an act of selfishness—the basic condition of a depressed mind, anguished by an essential fear that hurls it into the nothingness of the ego: the idea of the separate self. It is the condition of a sick mind incapable of love. The mind abhors the idea it has itself conceived and hates itself for it. Sick, insane, and terrified, it projects its fear and fragmentation into a frightening world, a dream of hardship and punishment.

That is the original sin—the voluntary abandonment of paradise by a confused mind that misinterpreted the idea of freedom and used it to enslave itself under the yoke of a spurious identity. There is only one problem, and moreover, it is an artificial one—a problem that exists only for the mind that believes it does. The mind absorbed in the idea of self cannot free itself, cannot save itself, for the simple reason that it is not itself; it never has been.

There is no such thing as “an individual mind.” What exists is the belief that there can be one—and that malignant conception gives rise to an illusory world that is real only to the mind itself. Such is the nature of black holes.

The rescue of the sick mind must be as imaginary as the idea that sickened it. The black hole collapses when the idea of the personal self weakens enough for the light to dispel it with its radiance. Salvation is not real. Separation never occurred. Salvation is experienced only by the individual mind—which does not exist.

Humility and honesty are the way. Forgiveness and charity are the tools that allow the mind to break the chains that bind it to a perverse idea. The Love of God is the panorama the mind beholds when it lifts its gaze, absorbed no longer in the impossible.

^II May I understand today that the real problem is that my will is misdirected, for I have focused it on some form of resentment.

Why would I have that resentment if it were not because I want to have it?
Do you realize it is impossible to be angry unless you want to be?

Resentment, anger, fear, and guilt are self-inflicted sufferings, though unrecognized as such.

Guilt is always someone else’s fault; I always find a justification for my distress. But that is not reality—that is my reality.

^III To understand this line, and the one before it, look at the effects, for that will allow you to identify the causes.

Notice the similarity between the emotions that arise when harboring resentments and when feeling burdened by a perceived problem.

Can you see that it is the same discomfort? A resentment certainly constitutes a serious problem in the happy flow of your life, and any problem will make you feel resentful toward life.

Problems and resentments are the same.

And in the same way, notice also that a miracle is the solution to a painful situation—and that whenever you solve a problem, you see things differently, which is precisely what a miracle does.

Therefore, whenever you think you have a problem, realize that you are resentful about your interpretation of what you perceive—and that to solve it, you need to see it differently, that is, you need to invoke a miracle.

^IV My problems will never be solved. That is impossible. How could a problem that does not exist be solved!? Problems are not resolved; they dissolve.

Nothing you regard as important will ever cease to be a problem for you—but the truth is that nothing is important. Importance is the way the ego relates to its false creations—the “love” it bestows upon its offspring. The mind, having granted importance to the conflicting idea of a personal self, projects that same importance as conflict onto everything it perceives.

Without a sense of importance, there is no problem. That is forgiveness: to stop considering something important—nothing more than that. My problems have already been resolved because nothing is important to me anymore.

To give importance to something is to separate it from all that exists, to single it out as special and value it more highly. Why would I do that? Why would I choose to remain with a tiny fragment of all that exists? What could I possibly do with that trifle? Would it satisfy my longing to have it all? Perhaps for a time the formula works—but soon a new desire, a new illusion, will arise.

The problem and the solution are coetaneous, for both are fruits of my imagination—just like the time and space in which I place them. Granting importance to something should not in itself constitute a problem, unless it is linked to the perverse idea of powerlessness.

First I regard something as separate and single it out; then I regard it as threatening; and finally I consider myself powerless to resolve the situation: thus have I invented a fine problem.

For me to believe that whole story, it is essential that I project it outward and completely disown all my considerations. It wasn’t me! Don’t blame me for what appears in my mind!

Apparently, important things are like strange mushrooms sprouting of their own accord from dung in the dark vaults of my self-absorbed mind.

Let there be light! And the problems will vanish inevitably.

Today’s review covers these ideas: W-77 and W-78

1. W-77. “I am entitled to miracles.” ^I

2. I am entitled to miracles because I am governed only by the Laws of God.^II

²His Laws release me from all grievances and replace them with miracles.

³And I want to accept miracles instead of grievances, which are nothing but illusions hiding the miracles that lie beyond them.

⁴Now I want to accept only what the Laws of God entitle me to have, so I may use it in service of the function He has given me.

3. These suggestions may be helpful for applying this idea specifically:

²Behind this is a miracle to which I am entitled.

³I will not hold any grievance against you, (name), but offer you the miracle to which you are entitled.

⁴This offers me a miracle, if I will see it rightly.

4. W-78. “Let miracles replace all grievances.”

5. With this idea I join my will with the Holy Spirit’s, and see them as one.

²With this idea I accept my release from hell.

³With this idea I express my willingness for all my illusions to be replaced by truth, according to God’s plan for my salvation. ^III

⁴I will make no exceptions and no substitutions.

⁵What I want is all of Heaven, and only Heaven, exactly as God wills it to be.

6. These specific forms may be useful for applying this idea:

²I do not want this grievance to keep me from my salvation.

³Let our grievances be replaced by miracles, (name).

⁴Behind this is the miracle that replaces all my grievances.

---

^I If you do not understand the word “miracle” well, you may better grasp its synonym—another term that means the same: “solution.” A miracle is the solution to a perceptual problem based on truth. And when that truth reaches you completely, even appearances change.

For what is perceived to change through the power of your will to see the light—because now you have willed to see things differently—you must have passed through those clouds made of imaginary fears that the Course mentions; then it is that you perceive miraculously. And if your brother joins your vision, what is perceived changes for both of you.

^II Miracles are not strange; they are the most natural thing there is. Just as the laws of the world lead to fear, the Laws of God lead to miracles. Both fear and miracles occur in the realm of perception. They are merely different ways of perceiving.

To perceive is to interpret—it is the language through which the “things” that the perceiver regards as separate from himself communicate. Syntax is the set of laws that organize the various elements of a language to make the message comprehensible to the receiver.

In the world there is spoken a universal language: the language of the ego. And though there are many different dialects, the syntax of all of them is essentially the same.

In Heaven no language is spoken—none is needed there, for message, content, communication, sender, and receiver are all the same—but if there were one, the syntax of that language could be called “the Laws of God.”

These laws in Heaven are utterly unnecessary, but here on earth they serve to interpret the hallucinatory experience in terms that do not clash with true celestial identity.

It is not that Heaven takes any account of the things of the world, but the Laws of God are very useful to keep human beings from getting entangled in the jargon of the ego in their interpretations.

Indeed, the first rule of this divine syntax reads: “Turn a deaf ear to any interpretation that does not come from God.”

^III In reality, truth replaces nothing, substitutes for nothing, goes nowhere, and does nothing. Truth simply is—of course! There has never been anything but truth, there never will be, nor could there ever be. The mere temptation to think otherwise is a shameful absurdity and a great foolishness.

To come to think that it is possible for truth to be hidden or absent, to have degrees, or for some to possess it while others do not, requires a sick mind, a heap of lies, and a great desire to suffer.

The mind can estrange itself through illusions, tell itself terrifying stories, deceive itself, blame others, and deny its own identity—but it cannot in any way alter reality.

Indeed, it can distort truth—but only for itself.

When the mind grows weary of suffering, it need only stop granting itself illusions and collecting resentments. It needs to do nothing more. It need only cease defiling reality with sordid interpretations.

None of that has ever been true. It has not had nightmares because it accidentally fell asleep—that is impossible. The mind plunged into the dream of death by its own will, and as it did so, so too will it awaken—by its own will.

The mind must express its innermost desire unmistakably, and its will shall be fulfilled, for its will is its very reality.

There is no need to fall to your knees and cry to Heaven for salvation; a little honesty is enough.

Here, as in all the Lessons, Jesus always urges us toward the same thing: that we place our will in a specific direction—a very precise one, the same in which he places his. And thus, when our will is exactly that, our problems and resentments disappear—miraculously.

It is the will to desire what he desires, but from the very depths of our hearts—truly and sincerely. To do the Lessons and repeat their ideas routinely and mechanically is worthless. Only what is genuine counts; only your heartfelt will counts.

These practices are effective because of their quality, not their quantity. And the proof that they have been done well lies always in the present, for if the benefit is real, it can only be found in the only real aspect of time: the present.

It makes no sense to think, “I am going to do the Lessons, and after a year I will have become a better person.” It is not so. Salvation can occur only here and now. Anything else is merely buying time.

Instant salvation is a wholly legitimate aspiration, because it accords with the Laws of God.

Today’s review covers these ideas: W-75 and W-76

1. W-75. “The light has come.”

2. By choosing salvation instead of attack, I am simply choosing to recognize what is already there. ^I

²Salvation is a decision that has already been made.

³Attack and grievances are not an option.

⁴Thus, I am always choosing between truth and illusion, between what is there and what is not.

⁵The light has come.

⁶I can only choose the light, because there is no other alternative.

⁷Light has replaced darkness, and darkness has disappeared.

3. These are some helpful ways to apply this idea specifically:

²This cannot show me darkness, for the light has come.

³The light in you is all I want to see, (name).

⁴I only want to see what is really there in this.

4. W-76. “I am under no laws but God’s.”

5. This is the perfect statement of my freedom.

²I am governed by no laws but God’s.

³I am constantly tempted to invent other laws and give them power over me. ^II

⁴I suffer only because I believe in them.

⁵But in truth they have no effect on me at all.

⁶I am perfectly immune to the effects of any law except God’s.

⁷And His are the laws of freedom.

6. The following statements may be helpful for applying this idea specifically:

²My perception of this shows me I believe in laws that do not exist.

³I see only the Laws of God at work in this.

⁴Let it be the Laws of God that operate in this, and not my own.

---

^I The light has come! It is the exclamation of a sound and happy mind; it is what is declared by one who has forgiven the world in order to grant salvation to himself.

He apparently had before him two options: to condemn or to forgive. But he has chosen well—he has chosen not to listen to that furious voice that shouted from his gut how “reality” was supposed to be, and how flawed it was.

Until now, without realizing it, he had accepted the precepts of that harsh voice, because it was the first thing that came to his mind. He had never questioned the appropriateness of that interpretation; in fact, in his hallucination, he had not even noticed that it was only that—a story being told to him, or rather, a story he was telling himself, because he believed it was he who thought that way. But was it?

One day, perhaps tired of so much suffering, he began to question his own judgment—he began to doubt himself. Which, on the other hand, is quite surprising, because whoever doubts must be different from that which is doubted.

What confusion! Am I one or two?

The light has come! I am not two! I am not that voice that dictates how reality must be. I am not that voice that tells me I am right. Nor am I the one that tells me I am wrong. I am no voice at all, nor am I anything any voice tells me I am.

I am. Period. The light has come!

I no longer believe that voice. I no longer believe in anything. Now the light has come, and I no longer need beliefs, interpretations, or stories to be told.

Now I see! Now I see the light, and I am left speechless—I am left without stories, and without them I cannot judge or harbor resentments.

Now my heart overflows with joy, and my mind is at peace. I am one. I am He Who Is.

^II Once upon a time there was a man who searched. Once upon a time there was a collector of rules, of stories, and of descriptions. Once upon a time there was a legalist. Once upon a time there was a fearful man who sought laws to govern him.

Nothing in particular was happening in his mind; only the strange idea had entered that he needed explanations, and so he had gone out into the world to find them.

Things—he told himself—are not just things; they are things with explanations, but these are not evident—they are hidden and must be found. Thus, he wandered restlessly through the world in search of the descriptions of things.

Things—he also told himself—come with rules and instructions that tell you what they are, what they are for, and how to use them, like the inserts that come with medicine.

The poor man was somewhat lost. He felt uncertain and insecure without something to tell him how he should live. He was afraid of freedom, and responsibility was a concept that made him ill. He was terrified of making mistakes. He was afraid of life. He was afraid to create. He was afraid of love. He was afraid of himself.

His first instinct was to find a hole to hide in, and he only dared go out at night, in dim light, frantically scanning the ground in search of some scrap of paper with instructions about something.

When he found one, he would rise up excitedly and begin to shout to the four winds what was written there, so that everyone might hear of his happy discovery and celebrate with him that from now on they would know exactly what to do about some trivial matter.

And that was not the worst. At times he would join up with another lunatic he found somewhere, burdened with bags of grimy papers scribbled with rules and instructions, and together they would build a strange friendship based on shared values such as intolerance, rigidity, and fanaticism.

Shared madness multiplies and becomes cruel and aggressive. And it is then that the raging madmen hurl themselves upon the ignorant, who have not yet discovered the perverse pleasure of fearing freedom.

The Laws of God are the anti-laws of the world. They are laws that grant omnipotence and limitlessness; Laws that categorically forbid anything less than everything, and that, indispensably, apply equally to all that exists.

They are the euphoric Laws of God—and moreover, they are inviolable.

Today’s review covers these ideas: W-73 and W-74

1. W-73. “I will that there be light.”

2. Today I will use the power of my will. ^I

²It is not my will to grope about in darkness, fearful of shadows and frightened by unreal and unseen things.

³Today my guide will be the light.

⁴I will follow it wherever it leads, and I will look only upon what it shows me.

⁵Today I will experience the peace of true perception.

3. These expressions of the idea will be helpful for specific applications:

²This cannot hide the light I will to see.

³You are with me in the light, (name).

⁴In the light, I will see this differently.

4. W-74. “There is no will but God’s.” ^II

5. Today I am safe because there is no will but God’s.

²I can only be afraid when I believe there is another will.

³I attempt to attack only when I am afraid.

⁴And only when I attempt to attack can I believe that my eternal safety is threatened.

⁵Today I will recognize that none of this has happened.

⁶I am safe because there is no will but God’s.

6. These are some useful ways to apply this idea specifically:

²I want to see this in accordance with the Will of God.

³The Will of God is that you, (name), are His Son, and that is also my will.

⁴This is part of God’s Will for me, no matter how I may see it.

---

^I Will is one of the three aspects of Being we learned about in theText (T-3.IX.1:2): “The true functions of the Soul are knowing, loving, and creating.” Will is the aspect through which Being creates. Creation is the function of will. In these Lessons, the three aspects are mentioned in relation to one another, for they are consubstantial with Being. The light referred to here is the symbol of knowledge.

When the human being integrates the mind, he uses his functions harmoniously within the perceptual realm and directs his will to see the love that light reveals to him. It is essential to highlight the crucial role of will in this process, for we will perceive that which it is our will to perceive.

It is also important to understand that what we are going to see is not something we must decide ourselves. Our function is to place our will on there being light—on nothing else. However, our first impulse will be to direct the will toward achieving our expectations, which is nothing but the voice of the ego manifesting once again.

Remember that you do not know what is in your best interest. Ask only for light; ask only for understanding.

Now reflect: who is it that is here asking for light? Obviously, the one who does not have it. This Lesson is not about light itself but about will. It is a Lesson for training the will—the most basic aspect of Being. First comes the will to Be, which extends Itself in Its loving and fulfills Itself in the knowledge of Its own creation.

In the esoteric and spiritual tradition of Hinduism and yoga, will is represented by the Manipura chakra, located at the solar plexus, above the navel and just below the diaphragm, marking the boundary with the higher chakras. Above it lies Anahata, which symbolizes love, and higher still, Ajna, which represents the light of knowledge. This arrangement suggests a natural progression: from will, which is the foundation, through love, to the light of knowledge.

This fundamental character of will is the reason why this Course insists so much upon it as an essential aspect of Being. From will, the following aspects manifest in an ascending progression. For this reason, it is imperative to rescue will from the clutches of the ego, for it is presently confused, hijacked, and lost in paths that lead nowhere.

^II This is not a commandment nor an order, but the affirmation of a fact: the Will of God is the aspect of Being that creates reality. And Reality is that which is—that which exists. Its essential quality is immutability. To be and to be immutable are, ultimately, synonymous. Change implies ceasing to be something in order to become something else. Therefore, what changes is that which simultaneously is and is not—an ontological impossibility, an absurdity.

In this world—the realm of the illusory—being is confused with seemingto be. Everything that merely seems to exist is called being, though in reality it is not, because when you look closely, it has already transformed into something else. Illusions are so named precisely because they are illusions of being: they appear to exist, but they are nothing, unreal, and therefore do not exist, though they may seem to.

Time belongs to the domain of illusion, for it is the awareness of change—the perception that the impossible, the becoming of the immutable, appears possible. The human mind, operating within time, thus projects illusory conceptions, and all its cause-and-effect relationships are likewise illusory.

The awareness of change generates a deep fear in the human mind, for it introduces the idea of loss of being—the notion of death. But that is impossible, because what truly exists cannot cease to exist. The Will of God creates only what is real: what does not change, what is, what remains.

When the human mind aligns with the Will of God, fear disappears. But for that to happen, it must overcome its authorship problem: the belief that it created itself, that it is separate from God, and that it acts autonomously. That idea is the root of fear, for it gives rise to the feeling of being alone, separate, and devoid of Love.

Ultimately, it is a false conception of freedom: the belief that the human will can “create” the imperfect, the limited, or the lacking—that is, something intrinsically different from its Author, the Self, the only thing that truly exists.

The human mind cannot conceive what is real in the strict sense, because it is itself a demented illusion. Yet it can align with Reality and come to perceive accurately. Neither can it heal itself, for by nature it is an existential contradiction. Its redemption consists in awakening to the awareness of its true identity—but even that transcends the notion of awareness, for it occurs when the direct knowledge of being is reached.

Human beings are not saved from anything, for illusions cannot be saved. The illusion of being human simply dissolves. That, which terrifies the ego, is at the same time the source of immense joy for you.

Today’s review covers these ideas: W-71 and W-72

1. W-71. “Only God’s plan for salvation will work.”

2. It makes no sense for me to keep searching desperately for salvation everywhere. ^I

²I have looked for it in many people and things, but when I tried to grasp it, it was not there.

³I was mistaken about where it is.

⁴I was mistaken about what it is.

⁵I will undertake no more useless journeys.

⁶Only God’s plan for salvation will work.

⁷And I will rejoice that His plan can never fail.

3. These are some suggestions for specific applications of this idea:

²God’s plan for salvation will save me from the way I see this.

³This is no exception in God’s plan for my salvation.^II

⁴I want to see this only in the light of God’s plan for salvation.

4. W-72. “Holding grievances is an attack on God’s plan for salvation.”

5. Holding grievances is an attempt to prove that God’s plan for salvation will not work.

²Yet only His plan will succeed.

³Therefore, by holding grievances, I exclude from my awareness my one and only hope of salvation.

⁴I do not want to continue attacking my own best interests in such a senseless way. ^III

⁵I want to accept God’s plan for salvation and be happy.

6. Specific applications of this idea might be:

²As I look upon this, I am choosing between misperception and salvation.

³If I see grounds for grievances in this, I will not see the grounds for my salvation.⁴This is a call for salvation, not for attack.

---

^I In this Course, the term “salvation” is aptly used to denote that which completely fulfills all your longings, perfectly answers all your doubts, and, as a result, floods your heart with joy and sets your mind in peace forever; that is, it restores your mind to the original state in which God created it.

To be saved is to remember who you are.

Does what God created perfect need to be restored, healed, or saved in any way? Obviously not. That is impossible.

Does the mind of God’s Son need to be saved from the impossible—from what never occurred? Of course not! That cannot be, and if it cannot be, it never has been.

That is why this Course begins by saying: “Nothing real can be threatened. Nothing unreal exists. Herein lies the peace of God.”

The very idea of salvation is an incomprehensible concept, because it is the answer to an impossible idea: the idea of separation. An unreal concept can only be corrected by another operating at the same level—also unreal.

This Course operates in a realm as unreal as the idea that conceived it. And its strategy—the plan of God for salvation—is as incomprehensible as the idea of separation it seeks to heal; hence its proposal is purely negative: forgiveness, that is, the mind’s refusal to heed the unreal and its dismissal of illusion.

Yet, as this Course also warns, no teaching can be purely negative; it must point toward some positive content—hence the notion of levels: one unreal and nonexistent, within which it operates, and another real, absolutely full and positive—the idea of Being.

To confuse and intermingle the two levels is the basic error of the mind absorbed in the first; that is the sole temptation—that is the wrong-mindedness.

What you seek—recovering your true identity by ceasing to believe in the impossible—is not found in the perceptual realm, which arose precisely to support that perverse idea of being separate.

God’s plan for salvation works for the simple reason that it denies error. Nothing more is required.

^II Everything I perceive is a projection of the fragmented mind meant to support the mistaken idea it has of itself. Nothing you perceive is real. What is real cannot be perceived; it can only be known—and since knowing is the same as being, knowledge cannot occur within a false identity.

You never know from your human perspective; only Being knows—and that Being is what you truly are. But do not be deceived into believing that, as a person, you can know; at the personal level you can only hold beliefs.

What you now behold as a human you cannot know, but you can dismiss it as a means to salvation, which will be the first idea to arise in your mind when you perceive it. Dismiss it, for the voice that seeks to convince you that your salvation lies there is the ego’s.

Look carefully, ask for a different interpretation, quiet your mind, and listen. You will receive a better proposal, and you will recognize it because it is peaceful, benevolent, and beneficial.

What you will hear is not the truth in the strict sense either, but it is the best you can access within the realm of perception, and the Course calls this “true perception.”

If to be saved is to remember who you are, then God’s plan for salvation consists in using all the things life sets before you to foster that remembrance—and this occurs when you behold them with true perception.

In God’s plan for salvation, everything that happens to you is interpreted positively, because everything can be seen as serving that plan. Thus, when events accord with your longings and expectations, they are cause for celebration; and when they contradict them—the difficulties of life—they become opportunities to learn and to change.

Life is the perfect school, and everything that occurs is for your good. When something disturbs you, do not say: “Life is wrong; I have to change it.” Say rather: “Life is right; I have to change the way I see it.” This does not mean you should refrain from doing what is appropriate, but do not attempt to do so before you have changed your interpretation and regained peace.

Remember that the world you believe you perceive is an illusion and means nothing in itself; thus it is irrelevant. But your peace is indeed meaningful and necessary. You have come here precisely for that.

^III Harboring resentments is simply arrogance. It occurs when you ascribe to yourself abilities you do not have. In this case, you believe you are qualified to judge what is before you and condemn it. It is not so, but you believe it.

Since you do not like what you see, according to your own reasoning—the ego’s—you condemn it and attack it.

First, consider that what is before you is not real; and then consider that the way you are regarding it is unhelpful—as your heart makes known to you—and that is why you feel bad.

Moreover, harboring resentments is a negative emotional state—an attack against yourself—that will not help you at all to attain what you truly want: peace of mind. Remember this fundamental ontological principle: means cannot contradict ends. If you want peace, do not prepare for war.

You are probably convinced that the only way to attain that peace is to achieve certain goals that lie outside you. Do not deceive yourself. You will not find peace in anything external; peace is a real idea and is found in your mind, which is also real. In fact, peace is your mind’s natural condition when it is not deceived by the false promises of external idols.

Do not persist in that path; correct it. Quiet your mind and pray. Ask for help.

Today’s review covers these ideas: W-69 and W-70

1. W-69. “My grievances hide the light of the world in me”.^I

2. My grievances show me something that is not there and hide from me what I want to see.

²If I recognize this, why would I want my grievances?

³My grievances keep me in darkness and hide the light.

⁴Grievances and light cannot coexist, but light and vision must be joined for me to see.

⁵In order to see, I must let go of all grievances.

⁶I want to see, and this is how I will succeed. ^II

3. Specific applications of this idea might be:

²Let me not allow this to keep me from seeing.

³The light of the world will shine away all this.

⁴I have no need for this; what I want is to see.

4. W-70. “My salvation comes from me.”

5. Today I will recognize where my salvation is.

²It is in me, because its Source is there.

³My salvation has not left its Source, and so it cannot have left my mind.

⁴I will no longer seek it outside myself.

⁵It is not something outside that I must bring within.

⁶Instead, it will extend from within me to everything I see, and all I look upon will reflect the light that shines in me and in what I behold. ^III

6. These expressions of the idea are suitable for more specific applications:

²Let me not be tempted to seek my salvation outside myself.

³I will not let this interfere with my awareness that I am the Source of my salvation.

⁴This has no power to take salvation away from me.

---

^I Today you will not concern yourself with whether your resentments are justified or not, because if you do, the voice of the ego within you will provide an endless array of false arguments to justify them, which will overwhelm you. Be wise and humble. Simplify. Focus on the effects those resentments are having on you, and become aware that they harm you, hurt you, and make you ill.

Never argue with your ego, for you are bound to lose. The ego is clever and devious; you are innocent, and your natural realm is not cleverness but truth. So do not listen to it—look with childlike honesty within yourself, consult your heart, and you will have no doubt about what you must do with your resentments.

This is a path of choices that must be made. To some you must say yes, to others no, and the contrast between them is so great that the choice cannot be difficult unless you allow the ego to ensnare you with its cunning tricks.

^II I am absolutely certain that I want to see a radiant world that floods my heart with joy and my mind with peace, yet that is not what I see. I now behold something else. I see a sad, dark, loveless, and dangerous world.

But am I really seeing? Could it be that I am not seeing what is truly there? What, then, am I seeing?

What does it mean to harbor resentments? What happens in my mind when I am resentful? When and why does that occur?

To harbor resentments, it is essential that I have condemned something or someone. It is essential that I have declared something to be wrong. It is also essential that I firmly believe my evaluation of that thing to be absolutely true and appropriate. To harbor resentments, I must have absolute faith in my own judgments.

If I have absolute faith in my judgments, it is evident that I am absolutely insane. Moreover, mine is no ordinary insanity—it is the deranged state of a furious madman attacking himself, for he tells himself only stories that make him suffer.

When I look at the world, all I see are my resentments. Yet in reality, I am seeing nothing at all; I am merely listening to the opinions of my ego—indeed, the opinions of a madman. It is no wonder I do not see a radiant world out there.

For that terrible condition of my hallucinating mind to change, it is unquestionable that I must stop paying attention to terrifying stories about the world, about people, and about myself.

I simply have to stop believing that any nonsense that comes to my mind is true. I must open my mind to the possibility that the judgments I hear about everything I behold are mistaken—that in truth, I know nothing about anything.

I must quiet my mind and ask that I be granted a better way of seeing. The one I am using now is doing me terrible harm, and for that reason, it would be better to have none at all. I will remain still and see what happens.

^III The truth is that I am not completely convinced that my salvation lies within me. If I were, I would already have gone within, accepted that I am saved, and would not be doing this Course.

What I am absolutely certain of is that my salvation is not outside me, for I have been searching for it out there for a very long time and have not found the slightest trace of anything that could be called true salvation. Moreover, this is not something that happens only to me; I do not know anyone at all who has found it outside themselves.

However, I have read some quite reliable testimonies from people who claim to have found it, and they all agree on the same thing: they found immense joy by going within, and there they experienced something they could not put into words—something more real than anything they had ever known.

On the other hand—and thinking about it more carefully—to some extent it has also happened to me. There have been times when, without knowing how or why, I have felt very happy. I did nothing to make it happen; it simply occurred. I believe this is something everyone, to some degree, has also experienced.

Moreover, it is quite logical that salvation should be found within, because, evidently, it is there that its fruits are experienced. What is truly surprising is that, after such a simple reasoning—accessible to anyone—people still insist on seeking joy and peace outside themselves. It is indeed striking.

I think it is worthwhile, at least for a while, to reverse the direction of my efforts. From now on, I will pay little attention and give little importance to what happens outside me—only what is strictly necessary—and I will travel quietly and silently within myself, with a still mind, wide-open eyes, and without expectation.

Today’s review covers these ideas: W-67 and W-68

1. W-67. “Love created me like Itself.”

2. I am like my Creator. ^I

²I cannot suffer, I cannot experience loss, and I cannot die. ^II

³I am not a body. ^III

⁴Today I want to recognize my reality.

⁵I will not worship idols, nor raise the self-made images I have of myself to replace my Self. ^IV

⁶I am like my Creator.

⁷Love created me like Itself.

3. These specific forms may be helpful in applying the idea:

²Let me not see in this an illusion of myself.

³Let me remember my Creator as I look upon this.

⁴My Creator did not create this as I see it.

4. W-68. “Love holds no grievances.”

5. Grievances are entirely foreign to Love. ^V

²Grievances attack Love and veil Its light.

³If I hold grievances, I am attacking Love and therefore attacking my Self.

⁴In doing so, my Self becomes something unknown to me.

⁵I am determined not to attack my Self today, so that I may remember who I am. ^VI

6. These specific forms of applying this idea may be helpful:

²This does not justify denying my Self.

³I will not use this to attack Love.

⁴I will not let this tempt me to attack myself.

---

^I Genesis 1:26 “Then God said, ‘Let Us make man in Our image, according to Our likeness…’”

Rather, God said, “I make My Son in My image and likeness,” and thus God created His Son. And then the ego said, “Let us make man in our image and likeness…” and man appeared in the sleeping mind of the Son of God.

^II Suffering, loss, and death are but ideas that my real Self has never experienced in Reality. My awareness of being has always been the same and has never changed, though it is true that upon that pure awareness of being myself I have superimposed ideas of suffering, loss, and death; yet even in those moments, my awareness of being has remained unaltered.

^III Throughout my personal life my body has changed dramatically, but my awareness of being has not. What does not change in me must be real, and what changes must be illusion. The only plausible explanation is that my fragmented mind conceives these ideas of suffering, loss, death, and body; yet they are nothing but that—changing ideas that I imagine and take to be real, but which are merely illusions.

^IV All the ideas my personal mind conceives change: first they appear in my mind; then, with time, they evolve and change; finally, I no longer regard them as “existing” and call them “memories.” But while they are in my mind I consider them real, true, and of great value—so why do I constantly deceive myself in this way?

Why do I call that living? Could it not be that I am merely absorbed in a story I tell myself?

^V Resentments are entirely foreign to what I am: the Love of God. Why else, do you think, do resentments make you uneasy and cause you to feel bad? Simply because they are unnatural—ideas incompatible with what you are.

Do not tolerate discomfort. Be sensitive to every disturbance and uncompromising with it. Do not allow it into your mind; if it has already entered, expel it quickly, and above all, do not welcome or nourish it, for you will be harboring a stranger who has settled in your home for the sole purpose of embittering your life.

You do not deserve that. You were created in Happiness and for happiness. Anything less than genuine happiness is unworthy of your glorious condition, and you do not deserve it.

Make no compromise with this. The worst thing that can happen to a human being is to grow familiar with suffering and to accept it without protest.

Learn to be outraged by all those mental positions that do not belong to a Son of God. Learn to live as your Father lives; learn to live as God.

^VI The image I have of myself—which I accept as true with a mixture of astonishing credulity and arrogance—is so distorted that it is almost impossible for me to recognize myself as Love and Light. Yet I understand perfectly well that resentments are forms of attack and that they make me feel profoundly miserable. It is evident that when I hold resentments, I am attacking myself, for I am the only one who suffers.

If harboring resentments is my decision, and if they harm me so much, why do I keep them? For what purpose do I maintain them? Perhaps it is because my mind is not functioning correctly. It is urgent to put an end to this madness. I do not want to keep suffering.

Today we will review these ideas: W-65 and W-66

1. W-65. “My only function is the one God gave me.”

2. I have no function but the one God gave me. ^I

²Recognizing this frees me from all conflict, because it means I cannot have conflicting goals.

³With one single purpose, I am always certain of what to do, what to say, and what to think.

⁴All doubt disappears when I acknowledge that my only function is the one God gave me. ^II

3. More specific applications of this idea might be:

²My perception of this does not change my function.^III

³This does not assign me a different function than the one God gave me.^IV

⁴Let me not use this to justify a function God did not give me.^V

4. W-66. “My happiness and my function are one.”

5. All things that come from God are one. ^VI

²They come from Oneness, and must be received as one. ^VII

³Fulfilling my function is my happiness, because both come from the same Source. ^VIII

⁴And to find happiness I must learn to recognize what makes me happy.

6. Some helpful variations for applying this idea more specifically are:

²This cannot separate my happiness from my function.

³The oneness of my happiness and my function is in no way affected by this.

⁴Nothing, not even this, can justify the illusion that I can be happy by failing to fulfill my function.^IX

---

^I The function of anything is assigned by its creator. I cannot have a function different from the one assigned to me by Him Who created me. It is obvious that I did not create myself—though I sometimes have the temptation to believe it, so great is my confusion—therefore, I cannot assign myself my own function.

I do not now remember Who created me, how He created me, or why He created me, but those questions must have an answer, because I exist. The only thing I know for certain is that when I have tried to assign myself my own function, I have failed, for I have not achieved my purpose; I have not succeeded in being happy. Now I want to try something different.

Simplifying is always good, and here I am told that I have only one function. At least this is simple and clear. Moreover, I am also told that my function is to be happy and to make my brothers happy—that is, to heal them—because I am also told that to heal is to make happy (T-5.I.1:1). Then, if my function is so simple and so aligned with my deepest desires, why do I not set about it immediately?

^II This too is obvious. If I focus all my efforts on doing one single thing, my mind will not be scattered, and I will experience no conflict, for thus I will not be attacking myself, and in this way I am also sure that at the very least I will have peace. I am going to try to fulfill impeccably this function that is said to have been assigned to me by God, because it seems quite likely that I will also find happiness.

^III I am still interpreting every event through my old thought system, and it is normal that I experience the temptation to assign myself a function once again.

^IV If I look carefully, I can apply my new function even to this; therefore, I must interpret it differently from how I was accustomed to.

^V I will not allow myself to be tempted by that old habit; it would ruin my new purpose.

^VI God is very simple. Nothing is simpler than God. God is the epitome of simplicity.

^VII God is One, and everything that comes from Him is like Him. Everything that comes from God is one.

^VIII How could God have arranged anything for me other than my happiness? Since I began to believe that I was separate from God, I have done nothing but seek happiness.

Is it so difficult to conclude that my happiness lies in God?

^IX Everything I have done throughout my personal life has had no other purpose than to try to attain a little more happiness.

I will also try to be happy with what I now have before me. Let me not be tempted by the idea of seeking happiness by any means other than the one that has been proposed to me: forgiveness. If I do, I will fail once again.

Today we will review these ideas: W-63 and W-64

1. W-63. “The light of the world brings Peace to every mind through my forgiveness.”^I

2. My forgiveness is the means by which the light of the world expresses itself through me.

²My forgiveness is the means by which I become aware of the light of the world within me. ^II

³My forgiveness is the means by which the world is healed along with me.

⁴Therefore, let me forgive the world so that it may be healed along with me.

3. Some specific suggestions for applying this idea are:

²Let Peace extend from my mind to yours, (name).

³I share the light of the world with you, (name).

⁴Through my forgiveness I can see this as it is.^III

4. W-64. “Let me not forget my function.”

5. I will not forget my function, because I want to remember my Self. ^IV

²I cannot fulfill my function if I forget it.

³And if I do not fulfill my function, I will not experience the joy that God has intended for me. ^V

6. Some specific variations suitable for this idea are:

²Let me not use this to hide my function from myself.

³I want to use this as an opportunity to fulfill my function.

⁴This may seem to threaten my ego, but it in no way alters my function.^VI

---

^I Just as judgment inevitably generates conflict, fear, and anger, the direct effect of forgiveness is peace.

This Lesson is a logical and natural continuation of the previous one: the light within me is the cause of forgiveness, and peace is its immediate consequence, both for me and for those to whom I extend that forgiveness.

In today’s practice, do not focus too much attention on yourself, on your own problems, or on your personal need for peace. Instead, direct your thoughts toward your brothers. Reflect on the transforming effect that your sincere acceptance and forgiveness can have upon them. Do you believe that your forgiveness will have no effect on their minds? If you doubt this, it is because you have not yet fully understood the extraordinary and irresistible power of forgiveness.

To truly forgive your brothers’ supposed offenses and to accept them deeply from the heart generates a powerful and irresistible force that no one can reject or avoid. When you offer acceptance instead of judgment, you inevitably transform those you once regarded as enemies into valuable allies. By forgiving and accepting, you release the energy you would have used to defend or attack, and that same energy now becomes cooperation and mutual support.

The conversion of enemies into allies is not only a lofty spiritual practice but also the wisest and most rewarding investment you can make in any area of life. In forgiving, you choose to live from peace and cooperation, and you discover that the support and collaboration of your brothers lead you more easily toward the fulfillment of your highest goals.

^II When I forgive, my mind is illumined and my heart rejoices.

^III By forgiving, the world remains the same and so do I, but I now perceive clearly that there is no real problem. Forgiveness does not change external reality but my perception of it. When I stop projecting my judgments onto what I see, I can behold the world as it truly is, free from the distortion produced by my mind.

In other words, forgiveness removes erroneous interpretations, revealing a clear, simple, and authentic vision. Thus, although externally nothing may have changed, internally everything is transformed, and the sense of conflict, anxiety, or unease disappears. Seeing clearly, I experience true and constant peace, for I recognize that what I once considered a problem was merely a mistaken judgment in my mind.

^IV If I forget my function, I do not know who I am or what I am doing here. If I forget my function, nothing makes sense.

Remember: In this Course it is explicitly stated that the function of God’s Son is to be happy. This is found in the Workbook, Lesson 66, where it says:
“My happiness and my function are one. […] The ego constantly battles the Holy Spirit on the fundamental question of what your function is. And also what your happiness is. […] God gives you only happiness. Therefore, the function He gave you must be happiness, even though it may appear to be something else.”

Also, in Lesson 101 it is emphasized: “God’s Will for me is perfect happiness.”

In other sections of the Course, it is reinforced that the purpose of God’s Son is to fulfill the function given him, and that in that fulfillment lies his inevitable happiness.

Thus, according to the Course, your function is to be happy, and this happiness is attained through forgiveness and alignment with God’s Will. The only thing that can separate you from your happiness is your lack of forgiveness.

^V It is as impossible to experience joy while condemning as it is inevitable to experience it when forgiving.

^VI Forgiveness is the most powerful means of transcending the ego, for the ego has no access to it. The ego never forgives—it only knows how to judge, blame, and divide. Forgiveness, therefore, is an act that undoes it, a gesture arising from a higher dimension of mind, where love and understanding replace judgment and fear.

Introduction

1. We are now ready for another review.

²We will begin where the last review left off and take two ideas each day.

³The first part of the day will be devoted to one of these ideas, and the second to the other. ^I

⁴Each of these periods will include one longer practice period, supported by shorter and more frequent sessions dedicated to each idea.^II

2. The longer practice periods will follow this general format:

²Spend about fifteen minutes with each one, beginning with the idea and the accompanying comments.

³Spend three or four minutes reading them slowly, several times if you wish, and then close your eyes and listen.

⁴If your mind wanders, return to the idea and reflect on it again, but try to devote most of the time to listening silently and attentively. ^III

3. There is a message waiting for you.

²Trust that you will receive it.

³Remember that it is your right and that you want it.

⁴Do not let your will be weakened by thoughts that seek to distract you.

⁵Realize that whatever form those thoughts may take, they mean nothing and have no power. ^IV

⁶Replace them with your determination to succeed. ^V

4. Do not forget that your will is stronger than fantasies and dreams. ^VI

²Trust it to carry you through and beyond all of them. ^VII

³Consider these practice periods as devoted to the way, the truth, and the life. ^VIII

⁴Refuse to be pulled into distraction, illusion, and thoughts of death. ^IX

⁵You are committed to salvation.

⁶Be determined to fulfill your function each day. ^X

5. Reaffirm your determination in the shorter practice periods, using the original form of the idea for general application, and adapting it when needed.

²The accompanying comments include some specific variations.

³But these are merely suggestions.

⁴The actual words you use do not matter.

---

^I In the morning we practice one idea, and in the afternoon the other.

^II Both morning and evening, devote fifteen minutes to reflecting on the corresponding idea, and then take brief moments throughout the rest of the day as often as possible. Above all, keep those ideas in mind whenever the circumstances of the day offer you opportunities to practice them.

Without any doubt, this will happen, and applying an idea to a specific problem is the best way to assimilate it, thus turning that application into a mental habit. That automatic response will benefit you in ways beyond description throughout your life and will become a new, benevolent habit. Nothing will ever be the same again.

This way of living is simply the practical application of your new thought system—the goal of this Course.

^III This is a receptive, expectant mental attitude. It is a way of praying: first you ask; then you wait for the answer. The most important part is the second, obviously.

In fact, with these practices you are training your mind to listen to the Voice of the Holy Spirit, and that should be the natural stance of your mind for the rest of your life on earth.

A serene, disciplined mind—at peace, attentive to the inner Voice, and in harmony with its own heart—is a right, sound, miracle-minded mind. That is the mind of a miracle worker.

Realize that this Course is mental training that will lead you to live from a new definition of yourself. But to achieve this, you must first relinquish the prior idea with which you have identified. That process entails renouncing and leaving behind what you believe to be your true will. However, because you are so immersed in that false identity, it will likely be very difficult for you to take that step.

At the end of the Text, there is a specific practice that represents the culmination of all you have learned up to that point: the first section of chapter 30, “Rules for Decision”, where you learn to let yourself be guided by the Voice of the Holy Spirit. This part of the Workbook marks the beginning of your training in that direction, which will be consolidated in the Second Part of the book, which begins with Lesson 220.

^IV Your old thought system will try constantly to interfere with your learning. Pay no attention to it. That is not you. It is only the automatic mechanism your mind has been using until now.

It has embittered your life, and you do not want it. Do not allow it to intrude now. The only real content of your thoughts is the infinitesimal amounts of love they may have harbored. That has, in any case, been their only microscopic meaning.

As for their power, in themselves they have never had any—only what you have conferred upon them by believing in them.

^V It is an answer to which you are fully entitled. Remember, it has been promised to you: “Ask, and it shall be given.” And you can be sure it is so.

But note that it must also be an answer you truly want. This is the most important part, for it is what allows the results of your will to manifest.

Jesus does not deceive you; you can trust Him—but you do not need to do so blindly. Do what He tells you and look with absolute honesty at the results.

^VI Notice the emphasis placed on will. Your will is the only thing that exists, and the fantasies and dreams you have had have been the result of misapplying your will.

^VII Many students of this blessed Course, when practicing listening to the Voice of the Holy Spirit in their mind, experience doubts about the truthfulness of the answers they receive. They often suspect that what they hear could be coming from the ego and not from the Holy Spirit—especially when those answers prove uncomfortable or challenging. It is important to understand that this doubt is precisely the ego’s voice, for the ego is always the one who questions and generates uncertainty.

To carry out this exercise correctly, it is essential, from the heart and with absolute honesty, to relinquish any personal expectation and every prior interpretation of the circumstances. Only in this fresh and fertile ground, free of conditioning, can the true answer manifest.

What you hear in itself is not the most important thing. What truly hallows the answer is the trust with which you receive it. Trust fully in the Holy Spirit; trust also in yourself, and thus hallow what you receive through the transforming power of your trust. Trust is holy, it possesses power, and it hallows whatever it is placed upon.

Ultimately, what is decisive is not so much what you do as the attitude from which you do it. Authentic trust fosters a state of mind this Course calls “miraculous.” In that state, the mind—freed from the ego and from doubts—rests constantly upon trust. For that reason, it has continual access to the Power of God, lives from innocence, expresses benevolence, and experiences an absolute sense of protection and invulnerability.

That is the state of mind you deserve.

^VIII John 14:6 “Jesus said to him, ‘I am the way, the truth, and the life. No one comes to the Father except through Me.’”

These practices guided by Jesus are your way to the Truth and the Life.

^IX Whenever you feel tempted, realize that it is always a struggle of you against yourself, and, if you think about it, you will understand that temptations are nothing but sheer foolishness and a lack of honesty, consistency, and commitment.

You still have a mind split between two opposing thought systems, and that is stressing you. Simply choose one and abandon the other.

^X Not every day; every minute, every second. Realize that you are not a child of the past; you are born anew and innocent in the present instant. The you who inhabits the present is always new and immaculate. In the present you are affected only by your present thoughts, though these may refer to the past or to the future; yet they are always of the present, offspring of your will.

Be impeccable; exercise your will; listen, and trust.

LESSON 81

Our ideas for today’s review are: W-61 and W-62

1. W-61. “I am the light of the world.” ^I

2. How holy I am, for the function of lighting the world has been entrusted to me!

²Let me remain calm in the presence of my Holiness. ^II

³Let all my conflicts vanish in Its quiet Light. ^III

⁴And in Its Peace, let me remember who I am. ^IV

3. Some specific forms of applying this idea when difficulties seem to arise could be:

²Let me not obscure the light of the world in me.

³Let the light of the world shine through this appearance. ^V

⁴This shadow will vanish before the light. ^VI

4. W-62. “Forgiveness is my function because I am the light of the world.”^VII

5. As I accept my function, I will see the light in me. ^VIII

²And in that light my function will appear clear and perfectly unambiguous before my sight.

³I do not yet need to understand what my function is in order to accept it, for I do not yet know what forgiveness is. ^IX

⁴But I trust that in the light I will see what it is. ^X

6. Specific phrases for using this idea could be:

²Let this help me learn what forgiveness means. ^XI

³Let me not separate my function from my Will. ^XII

⁴Let me not divert this toward a purpose that is not my function.^XIII

---

^I I—my true Self—am the light that dispels the shadows of a darkened world made of absences of light, of absences of love.

^II In my quiet holiness, the stories I tell myself about the “reality” of the world come to an end.

^III Without my own descriptions—without my inner dialogue—conflicts simply disappear.

^IV And I remember and am the Self that I am.

^V I ask that the light behind that form be shown to me.

^VI The form disappears, and what lies beyond the form is revealed to me: the Love of God underlying all appearances.

^VII I will not be deceived by the sinister descriptions the voice of the ego places in my mind; I will forgive them all.

^VIII I cannot see my own light because I am the emitter of light, but I will see the effects of my light, for the shadows I see around me will fade away.

^IX The proof that I still do not understand what forgiveness is lies in the fact that I still see a world; I have not yet forgiven it.

^X By forgiving I will understand what forgiveness is, for I will see the effects of my forgiveness as it illumines the world with the light of my forgiveness. Forgiving will allow me to see the world transformed by my light.

^XI This is an opportunity to exercise my forgiveness and to understand that to forgive means to be freed from painful interpretations.

I will turn this situation of conflict into an opportunity to learn to free myself from suffering. Each time I forgive, I take one more step along the path to the Peace of God, which I deserve.

I will not waste this opportunity. I will learn this Lesson for my own benefit.

I was born to be happy, and forgiveness is the way to achieve it.

^XII My function and my will are the same. I only want to forgive.

^XIII I will allow myself to see in this nothing but an opportunity to practice my function and forgive.

Let Me Recognize That My Problems Have Been Solved.

1. If you are willing to recognize your problems, you will recognize that you have none.

²Your one great problem has already been solved, and you have no other.

³Therefore, you must be at peace.

⁴Salvation, then, depends on recognizing that this is the one problem and understanding that it has already been resolved.

⁵One problem, one solution. ^I

⁶Salvation is accomplished.

⁷Release from conflict has been given you.

⁸Accept this fact, and you are ready to take your rightful place in God’s plan for salvation.

2. Your only problem has been solved!

²Repeat this within yourself today, again and again, with gratitude and conviction.

³You have recognized your one problem, opening the way for the Holy Spirit to give you God’s answer.

⁴You have set aside deception and seen the light of truth.

⁵You have accepted salvation for yourself by bringing the problem to the answer.

⁶And you can recognize the solution because you have identified the problem. ^II

3. Today you are entitled to peace.

²A problem that has been resolved cannot trouble you.

³Just be certain you do not forget that all problems are the same.

⁴Their many forms will not deceive you if you remember this.

⁵One problem, one solution.

⁶Accept the peace this simple statement brings.

4. In our longer practice periods today, we will claim the peace that rightfully belongs to us when problem and answer are brought together.

²The problem must vanish, for God’s Answer cannot fail.

³Having recognized the problem, you have recognized the solution.

⁴The solution is inherent in the problem.

⁵You have been answered, and you have accepted the answer.

⁶You are saved.

5. Now let the peace that comes from your acceptance be given you.

²Close your eyes and receive your reward.

³Acknowledge that your problems have been solved.

⁴Acknowledge that you are out of conflict, free and at peace.

⁵But above all, remember that you have only one problem, and that problem has one solution.

⁶In this lies the simplicity of salvation.

⁷This is the reason it is guaranteed to work.

6. State often today that all your problems have been solved.

²Repeat the idea with absolute conviction as often as possible.

³And especially remember to apply today’s idea to any specific problem that may arise.

⁴Say quickly:

⁵Let me recognize that this problem has been solved.

7. Today, let us choose not to accumulate grievances.

²Let us choose to free ourselves from problems that do not exist.

³The key to this is simple honesty.

⁴Do not deceive yourself about what the problem is, and you will recognize that it has been solved.

---

^I Jesus tells us:

THE PROBLEM:

“Into eternity, where all is one, there crept a tiny, mad idea at which the Son of God remembered not to laugh.” (T-27.X.6:1)

The problem is you. The problem is your self—the ego in you. Problems will continue to haunt you as long as you insist on wanting to be you.

The problem is that you believe you are a person living in a world with other persons—bodies, like you. The problem is that you believe you have a mind for your own private use, with thoughts that are always appropriate and true. The problem is that you believe you are separate from God, from your brothers, and from all the things that populate your world—and that all of this is something distinct from you.

The problem is that you feel alone, helpless, and powerless before the things that happen to you; that you are fragile, subject to all kinds of harm, and destined, in the end, to die.

The problem is that your mind is constantly absorbed in things you think happened in something you call the past, and you fear what you think may occur in a time yet to come that you call the future.

The problem is that in your mind there arise incessantly and uncontrollably stories you tell yourself—stories that, though you know to some extent are not true, you cannot help but consider important, because you, who also consider yourself important, are the protagonist of them all.

The problem is that, although you are beginning to realize that all this is nothing but madness, you do not know how to bring it to an end.

THE SOLUTION:

“The Holy Spirit was God’s Answer to the separation; the means by which the Atonement could heal the mind until the whole of it returned to creating.” (T-5.II.10:5)

The problem is not real. None of it is true. What is real is not in danger, and what you think is in danger is not real. In this lies the Peace of God.

And Jesus tells us:

“Do not be afraid, beloved brother. It is only a dream. I know you are dreaming; you do not yet. I now take your hand and accompany you in your nightmare. That is all I can do—but it is enough.

I cannot awaken you from your dream because you do not yet wish to wake, but I do know that with all your soul you long for a better dream, and that I can help you to attain.

Listen to me. Do as I say and trust. My voice accompanies you always, for your mind is also mine, and I have already awakened—but I still behold your dream, and that is why I can guide you. I always speak to you of what I did, for thus I awakened. You and I are the same, and therefore there is nothing in me that you cannot achieve.

The dream is already over, and with it, the world and time. We are together, as we have always been—together in the Heart of God. Have faith, open your eyes, and you will see.”

^II Perhaps it will help you to ask yourself these questions: Is there any problem outside myself? Who really has a problem?

Problems have no existence of their own outside the mind that perceives them; they possess no real ontological being. We might even say they are illusions in the highest degree, for they cannot even be perceived objectively.

Problems are, in essence, opinions, beliefs, or attacks directed against the idea one holds of oneself. If you abandon or diminish this idea, lessening the sense of personal importance—which is the ego’s nourishment—you will see how the problem naturally fades away.

You will experience problems to the same extent that you remain identified with your ego: the stronger the ego, the greater and more numerous the problems you will perceive. To regain peace of mind and cease suffering from painful interpretations of reality does not necessarily require a lofty spiritual vision; it requires only a little genuine humility.

Let Me Recognize the Problem So It Can Be Solved.

1. You cannot solve a problem if you do not know what it is.

²Even if it is already truly solved, you will still have it because you cannot recognize that it has been resolved.

³This is the situation of the world.

⁴The problem of separation, which is really the only problem there is, has already been solved.

⁵But the solution is not recognized because the problem itself has not been recognized. ^I

2. In this world, each person seems to have their own special problems.

²But they are all the same, and they must be recognized as one if the one solution that solves them all is to be accepted.

³Who can see that a problem has been solved if he thinks the problem is something else?

⁴Even if he is given the answer, he cannot see its relevance.

3. This is the situation in which you find yourself now.

²You have the answer, but you are still uncertain about what the problem is.

³You think you are dealing with a long list of different problems, and as one is resolved, another appears, and then another.

⁴It seems to have no end.

⁵You never feel completely free of problems and at peace.

4. The temptation to regard problems as many is the temptation to keep the problem of separation unsolved.

²The world seems to present you with a vast array of problems, each requiring a different answer.

³This perception places you in a position in which your way of solving problems must be inadequate, and failure is inevitable.

5. No one could solve all the problems the world appears to hold.

²They seem to be on so many levels, in such varied forms, and with such differing content, that they seem to confront you with an impossible situation.

³As you perceive them, discouragement and depression are inevitable.

⁴Some arise unexpectedly, just when you thought you had resolved the previous ones.

⁵Others remain unresolved beneath a cloud of denial and emerge from time to time to haunt you, only to hide again, still unsolved.

6. All this complexity is but a desperate attempt to not recognize the problem, and therefore not allow it to be solved.

²If you could recognize that your only problem is separation—regardless of the form it takes—you could accept the answer, because you would see its relevance.

³If you could see the underlying sameness of all the problems you face, you would understand that you have the means to solve them all.

⁴And then you would use those means, because you would have recognized the problem.

7. In today’s longer practice periods, we will ask what the problem is, and what the solution is.

²We will not assume we already know.

³We will try to let go of all the kinds of problems we think we have.

⁴We will try to realize that we have only one problem, which we have not yet recognized.

⁵We will ask what it is, and wait for the answer.

⁶It will be told to us.

⁷Then we will ask for its solution.

⁸And that, too, will be given. ^II

8. Today’s exercises will be successful to the extent that you do not insist on defining the problem yourself.

²You may not be able to let go of all your preconceptions, but that is not necessary.

³All that is required is that you question the reality of your version of what your problems are. ^III

⁴You are trying to realize that in recognizing the problem, the answer has been given—so that the problem and the answer can be seen together, and you may be at peace.

9. Today, the shorter practice periods will not follow a fixed schedule, but will be used as needed.

²You will see many problems today, and each one seems to require a response.

³Try to recognize that there is only one problem, and only one answer.

⁴In this recognition are all problems resolved.

⁵In this recognition is peace.

10. Do not let yourself be deceived today by the form in which problems appear. ^IV

²Whenever difficulty arises, say immediately:

³Let me recognize the problem so it can be solved.

⁴Then try to suspend all judgment about what the problem is.

⁵If possible, close your eyes for a moment and ask what it is.

⁶You will be heard, and you will be answered.

---

^I Here we are told that the problem is separation—but what does that really mean? In what way can knowing that separation is the problem help me here and now, in daily life?

It is quite likely that today’s Lesson will seem very difficult to you; that is normal. Perhaps the best approach is simply to read it carefully, do the practice as instructed, and see what happens. In tomorrow’s Lesson you will find an explanatory note on the nature of the problem mentioned here.

It is important that your experience today not be influenced by the descriptions of others. Work through the Lesson with kindness, an open mind, and all your good will.

Be certain that you are loved to a degree you are incapable of conceiving or imagining. You are looked upon with infinite tenderness and protected at every step you take, even though you do not yet know it.

Work well today and expect an answer; but if it does not come, do not worry.

^II Do not expect the answer to come to you in a particular way that you have imagined. Who knows how the answer will reach you! It will come in a form specific to you. It will be an absolutely personal experience.

^III This line is important. Realize that, in order to hear the answer, a receptive mind is necessary. If your mind is clinging to its own interpretation of reality, it will hardly be able to hear an answer—and if it does, it will very likely perceive it as an attack on its beliefs and respond with a counterattack.

All that is asked of you is to question your way of describing the problem, not to deny or reject it; doubting it is enough—nothing more is required.

Bring to mind any problem you tell yourself you have. You certainly have an explanation to justify your disturbance about that situation, but ask yourself: what is it that makes this a problem? Why does it disturb you?

Do not answer yourself. Keep your mind open and receptive to an answer that must come from beyond yourself.

^IV This, too, is very important: do not confuse form with content. The problem is not the form it takes, but that which makes it a problem. All the problems of the world are nothing more than different manifestations of the idea of separation. That is the root of the problem. When you recognize it, you will be able to resolve them all, for they are children of the same mother.

As an exercise, try to observe the different problems you believe the world has from this perspective. It will not take you long to see that the idea of separation underlies them all. Nothing more is required. Simply recognize what the real problem is. This Lesson asks nothing more of you than that.

Let Miracles Replace All Grievances.

1. You may still not fully understand that in every decision you make, you are choosing between a grievance and a miracle.

²Each grievance stands as a dark shield of hate before the miracle it would conceal.

³And by raising it before your eyes, you do not see the miracle that lies beyond.

⁴The miracle remains there, waiting for you in the light, but you behold your grievances instead.

2. Today we will go beyond grievances to behold the miracle in their place.

²Today we will reverse your way of seeing, and we will not let your sight stop short before you truly see.

³We will not linger before the shield of hate, but let it fall, and gently lift our eyes in silence to behold the Son of God.

3. The Son of God awaits you beyond your grievances, and when you let them go, He will appear in radiant light where each one stood before.

²For every grievance is a block to vision, and when it is gone you see the Son of God where He has always been.

³He is in the light, but you were in the dark.

⁴For every grievance deepened the darkness, and you could not see.

4. Today we will try to see the Son of God.

²We will not allow ourselves to be blind to Him.

³We will not look upon our grievances.

⁴For it is in this way that the vision of the world is reversed: by looking toward the truth beyond fear. ^I

5. To do this, we will choose one person who has been the target of your grievances and, laying those grievances aside, we will look upon them.

²Someone you fear, or even hate.

³Perhaps someone you think you love, yet who angers you.

⁴Someone you call a friend, but who is difficult to please or understand.

⁵Or someone who seems demanding, irritating, or who does not live up to the image you have assigned them.

⁶You already know who it is.

⁷Their name has already come to your mind.

6. This is the one we ask to be shown to us as the Son of God.

²As you look upon this person without the grievances you have held, you will discover that what was hidden when you did not see them this way is present in everyone, and can be seen.

³When you release the one who was your enemy to take the holy role the Holy Spirit has assigned, they become more than just a friend.

⁴Let them be your Savior today.

⁵Such is their function in God’s plan, your Father.

7. In today’s longer practice periods, you will see them in this role.

²First, try to see them in your mind as you now regard them.

³Review their faults, the difficulties you have had with them, the pain they have caused you, their neglects, and all the small and great offenses they have brought.

⁴Consider their body, its imperfections and its more appealing traits.

⁵Think also of their mistakes, even their “sins.”

8. Then, ask the One who knows this Son of God in truth and in reality that you may see them differently, and behold in them your Savior shining in the light of the true forgiveness that has been given to you.

²In the Holy Name of God and of His Son, as holy as Himself, we pray:

³Let me behold my Savior in this one

you have appointed as the one to ask

to lead me to the holy light in which he stands,

so I may join with him there. ^II

⁴Now close your eyes, and as you think of the one who injured you, let the light that shines in them beyond your grievances be shown to your mind.

9. What you have asked cannot be denied.

²Your Savior has long been waiting for this.

³He longs to be free, and for his freedom to be yours as well.

⁴The Holy Spirit extends from him to you, for He sees no separation in the Son of God.

⁵And what you see through Him will set you both free.

⁶Be very still now, and behold your radiant Savior.

⁷No dark grievance clouds the vision you have of him.

⁸You have allowed the Holy Spirit to express through him the role God gave him for your salvation.

10. God gives you thanks for these moments of quiet today, in which you lay aside the images you made and behold instead the miracle of Love the Holy Spirit shows you. ^III

²The world and Heaven join in giving thanks to you, for there is not a single Thought of God that does not rejoice in your salvation and the salvation of the world with you.

11. We will remember this throughout the day, and take our part in God’s plan for salvation—not our own.

²Temptation fades when we allow everyone we meet to be our Savior, and refuse to hide their light behind the shield of our grievances.

³Give the role of Savior to all those you meet, to everyone you think of or remember from the past, that you may share it with them. ^IV

⁴For yourself, for them, and for all who cannot see, we pray: ^V

⁵Let miracles replace all grievances.

---

^I This is the central message of this Lesson: whenever you feel disturbed, do not settle for it; call upon a new way of perceiving the situation. Ask for a miracle that allows you to see it differently and inspires peace in you. What you will behold with those new eyes will not be the Truth, which is ineffable, but it will be what most accords with God’s plan for your salvation. You need nothing more than that.

So remember: you have every right in the world to be intolerant of discomfort. You are the Son of God and you do not deserve it, so never justify or accept it; call upon a miracle. God has given you the mission of being happy wherever you believe yourself to be. If you think you live in the world, then it is here that you can and must claim your happiness. Do not wait to experience it in the future; ask for it now.

^II This is the first Lesson written in iambic pentameter. Twenty more Lessons will pass before the Workbook shifts to continuous iambic pentameter.

Since the Manual for Teachers adopts this meter in passages of special importance, such as the final verses of a section, the fact that blank verse was chosen for this Lesson seems to lend it special significance—perhaps because of the powerful meaning contained in seeing an enemy as the Son of God and as our savior.

^III The use in this Lesson of the word “miracle” as something we behold—specifically, the true nature of our brother—is not the usual use of the term in the Course.

In the ordinary language of this dictation, the miracle is an agent: it corrects, undoes, dissolves, reorganizes, adjusts, changes, induces, and reverses. Thus, it leads us—or someone through us—from false perception to true perception.

This is different from the usage in this Lesson, where the miracle is what true perception beholds. This may reflect the less common use the Course makes of the term “miracle” to refer to the Son of God: “It is true that YOU are a miracle” (T-1.P32.3:1), or to children: “Children are miracles in their own right.” (T-1.P25.1:1)

^IV Today’s Lesson goes a step beyond simple forgiveness of any perceived offense. It is no longer merely about letting go of grievance because it is not real, but now, in addition, we ask to behold a miracle in its place. The miracle we ask for is none other than to see the Son of God in our enemy, to see him as our Savior. But not only that—the Lesson concludes by asking us to try to see every person we know, or have ever known, as our savior.

Keep in mind that what you regard as your personal life is an illusory experience—a dream—and as such, all the elements that appear in it are symbols. Symbols are images that represent something other than themselves, and they are always objects of interpretation. The message you derive from them will shape the character of that dream for you. Remember that it is not the dream itself that makes you happy or unhappy, but how you interpret it, and that depends entirely on you. That is the key to your happiness and your liberation. The keys to the gates of Heaven are in your hands; they have always been there.

Now think of the extraordinary transforming power this practice has in your life and in your personal relationships. The human mind is strictly utilitarian; for your mind, the meaning of everything derives from the function you assign to it. The practice of today’s Lesson is an absolute reversal of the functions you have assigned to everyone with whom you relate. Thus, from now on, their role is no longer the one you gave them in the past, whatever that may have been; their only function now is to be your Savior.

All those with whom you deal are there, at that very moment, to save you from the condemnation you have imposed upon yourself. And in the light of this new respect, treat them as they deserve. They are the Son of God, who has come to save you from death and to take you with him to your Father. What a function!

^V “Those who cannot see” are those whose eyes are blinded by resentment.

I Am Entitled to Miracles.

1. You are entitled to miracles because of what you are.

²You will receive miracles because of what God is.

³And you will offer miracles because you are one with Him.

⁴Once again, how simple salvation is! ^I

⁵It is merely a statement of your true identity.

⁶And this is what we celebrate today.

2. Your entitlement to miracles is not based on the illusions you hold about yourself.

²It does not depend on any magical powers you have ascribed to yourself, nor on any rituals you have devised. ^II

³It is inherent in the truth of what you are.

⁴It is implicit in what God, your Father, is.

⁵Your entitlement to miracles was established in your creation, and it is guaranteed by the Laws of God.

3. Today we will claim the miracles to which you are entitled, for they belong to you.

²You have been promised full release from the world you made.

³And you have also been assured that the Kingdom of God is within you, and that you can never lose it. ^III

⁴Today we ask only for what truly belongs to us.

⁵But we will also make sure we do not settle for less.

4. Begin the longer practice periods by telling yourself with absolute confidence that you are entitled to miracles.

²Close your eyes and remember that you are only asking for what is rightfully yours.

³Remind yourself, too, that miracles are never taken from one to give to another, and that by claiming your rights you are upholding the rights of everyone.

⁴Miracles do not obey the laws of this world.

⁵They simply arise from the Laws of God.

5. After this brief introductory phase, wait in silence for the assurance that your request has been granted.

²You have asked for the salvation of the world and for your own.

³You have requested the means by which this can be accomplished.

⁴It is impossible that this be denied you.

⁵You are merely asking that God’s Will be done.

6. In doing this, you are actually asking for nothing.

²You are simply stating an undeniable fact.

³The Holy Spirit can only assure you that your request is granted.

⁴The fact that you accepted this entitlement confirms it.

⁵There is no room today for doubt or uncertainty.

⁶At last, we are asking for something real.

⁷And the answer is the simple statement of a very simple fact.

⁸So you will receive the confirmation you seek.

7. Our shorter practice periods will be frequent, and will also serve to remind us of this simple fact.

²Repeat often today:

³I am entitled to miracles.

⁴Ask for them whenever a situation arises in which they are needed. ^IV

⁵You will recognize these situations perfectly. ^V

⁶And since you do not rely on yourself to find the miracles, you are fully entitled to receive them whenever you ask.

⁷Also remember that you must not be content with anything less than the perfect answer.

⁸If temptation strikes, do not hesitate to tell yourself at once:

⁹I will not trade miracles for grievances.

¹⁰I want only what is mine.

¹¹For God has established that I am entitled to miracles.

---

^I W-76.2:3 “Today’s idea tells you once again how simple salvation is.”

^II Here, you ascribe the magical powers to yourself—to your ego—instead of to matter (see the explanatory note on magic from the previous Lesson). To believe that you (the ego) possess the “magical power” to work miracles (for example, to heal a body) is essentially the same as thinking that a certain medicine can heal it. Both your ego and the medicine are illusions, just as the body that the mind considers sick is an illusion. There is no other relationship among them than the one the mind itself establishes by believing in it.

You do not have, nor can you have, “magical powers.” The only real power of the mind is the power to create, which God endowed it with at its creation. The mind can pervert that power of creation and, instead of extending its own loving identity, it can believe whatever it wishes and make the effects of its belief—the illusions—“real” to itself.

The “magical rituals” are the fanciful stories the mind tells itself, describing the supposed cause-and-effect relationships in which it believes. These stories may be of a metaphysical nature, and we call them “witchcraft,” or of a physical nature, and we call them “science.”

In both cases, they could be regarded as a form of literature or poetry that reveals the creative character of the mind; they are descriptions of the cause-and-effect relationships the mind arbitrarily establishes and believes in because of their reliability. This reliability is grounded in their repetitive character and is the result of the mind’s own persistence in its narrative.

Obviously, this reliability in no way establishes their validity (review Chapter 2 of the Text to recall the concepts of reliability and validity).

These rituals—these descriptions—require a certain consistency and stability in order to be believable, though they are usually of an “evolutionary” nature. In scientific terms, that evolution is called “scientific progress.”

^III Luke 17:21 “Neither shall they say, ‘Lo here!’ or ‘Lo there!’ For, behold, the kingdom of God is within you.”

^IV Pay very close attention to today’s Lesson! It is very different from all the previous ones. Today marks the beginning of a new phase of our learning.

Remember Miracle Principle 7: “Everyone is entitled to miracles. But before this is possible, a purification is necessary.” Well then, that purification is precisely what we have been doing throughout the preceding Lessons.

Today Jesus releases us into the world for the first time and encourages us to ask for miracles. But notice carefully—it is about asking for a miracle in a situation of conflict; you are not told to go and perform one on your own, for if you did so, it would be the ego attributing to itself “magical powers.”

Today is a very special day. Until now we have been preparing; today we begin to act as miracle workers.

The situation is very simple: we are always choosing between two options. On the “passive” level, we choose between listening to the ego’s voice or the Voice of the Holy Spirit; on the “active” level, we choose between “fixing” what seems to be “wrong” or performing miracles.

In reality, it is a single choice concerning our very identity, concerning the idea we hold about ourselves. We choose between truth and error, between light and darkness, between joy and suffering, between being a body or being the Son of God.

The choice is very simple, very easy, and very clear—can there be any doubt about it?

Today’s Lesson is a true marvel that calls you to trust and to faith in God’s Power to resolve every situation. Do not be afraid; trust. The world you see is a dream of the mind.

What the mind beholds “outside” itself is, in reality, its own attitude—a projection of itself that appears “out there,” yet in truth is “within,” for there is nothing that is not the mind. Therefore, after asking for a miracle, what you will behold is your own flawless attitude.

It is reasonable to tell yourself that all this, for now, is only a hypothesis. It is legitimate to think so and absolutely understandable. What is not reasonable, logical, or understandable is to fail to put all your heart and all your will into trying.

Try it today with all your heart. Refuse to condemn, and ask that a miracle perfectly resolve every problematic situation that arises for you—and then remain very alert and wait.

Be very honest and try to be a little lucid in evaluating the results. They may not be what you expected, but a pure heart always calls forth Heaven’s light, and Heaven always responds.

^V These are all the situations in which you perceive conflict. Obviously, the conflict is in your mind, and you experience discomfort. Your heart warns you: “Something is wrong in your mind.” Your mind needs healing—and then you ask for a miracle, that is, you ask to see it differently.

Realize that the miracle is not to heal the world, because the world does not exist! Miracles are to heal your mind; then your mind will change, and you will think differently. And since you are not the only one who experiences the effects of your way of thinking (W-18), everything will change with you.

I am under no laws but God’s.

1. We have already seen how many meaningless things you have thought would bring you salvation. ^I

²Each one has imprisoned you with laws as senseless as itself.

³You are not bound by them.

⁴But to realize this, you must first recognize that salvation is not found there.

⁵If you seek it in things that mean nothing, you bind yourself to laws that have no meaning.

⁶In doing so, you try to prove that salvation is where it is not.

2. Today we rejoice that you cannot prove this.

²For if you could, you would seek salvation forever where it is not, and you would never find it.

³Today’s idea tells you once again how simple salvation is. ^II

⁴Seek it where it is waiting for you, and there you will find it.

⁵Do not seek it anywhere else, for it is nowhere else.

3. Think of the freedom that comes when you recognize that you are not bound by all the strange and twisted laws you have set up to save yourself.

²You truly believe you would starve if you did not have piles of colored paper and round bits of metal.

³You truly believe that a tiny pill you swallow or a fluid pushed into your veins through a slender needle will ward off death.

⁴You truly believe you are alone unless another body is with you.

4. It is madness that thinks these things.

²You call them laws and place them under many names in a long catalog of rituals that have no use and serve no purpose.

³You believe you must obey the “laws” of medicine, of economics, and of health.

⁴Protect the body and you will be saved.

⁵These are not laws, but madness. ^III

5. The body is endangered by the mind that hurts itself.

²The body suffers only so the mind will not see it is its own victim.

³The body’s suffering is a mask the mind holds up to hide what really suffers.

⁴It does not want to understand that it is its own enemy, that it attacks itself, and that it wants to die.

⁵It is from this that your “laws” would save the body.

⁶This is why you think you are a body.

6. There are no laws but God’s.

²This must be repeated again and again until you recognize that it applies to everything you have made in opposition to His Will.

³Your magic has no meaning.

⁴What you think you are saved from does not exist.

⁵Only what your magic tries to hide can save you. ^IV

7. God’s Laws can never be replaced.

²Today we will rejoice that this is so.

³This is no longer a truth we want to hide.

⁴Instead, we recognize it is a truth that keeps us free forever. ^V

⁵Magic imprisons, but God’s Laws set free.

⁶Light has come, because there are no laws but His. ^VI

8. We will begin the longer practice periods today by briefly reviewing the different kinds of “laws” we have believed we must obey.

²Among them, for example, are the laws of nutrition, immunization, medication, and the countless ways of protecting the body.

³Think even further; you also believe in the laws of friendship, of “good” relationships, and of reciprocity. ^VII

⁴You may even believe there are laws that define what belongs to God and what belongs to you.

⁵Many “religions” have been based on this. ^VIII

⁶They do not save, but damn in Heaven’s Name.

⁷Yet they are no stranger than other “laws” you believe you must obey to ensure your safety.

9. The only laws that exist are God’s.

²Let go today of all these foolish magical beliefs, and keep your mind in silent readiness to hear the Voice that tells you the truth.

³You will hear One who tells you that under God’s Laws loss is impossible.

⁴There are no payments given or received.

⁵There is no exchange, no substitutes, and nothing is replaced by something else.

⁶God’s Laws always give and never take.

10. Listen to the One who tells you this, and realize how senseless are the laws you thought upheld the world you see.

²Then listen even more closely.

³He will tell you more.

⁴He will speak to you of the Love your Father has for you.

⁵Of the endless joy He offers you.

⁶Of His longing for His only Son, created as His channel of Creation, whom His Son’s belief in hell has denied Him.

11. Today let us open the channels of God and allow His Will to extend through us to Him.

²Thus is Creation endlessly increased.

³His Voice will tell us of all this, as well as of the joys of Heaven, which His Laws forever keep unlimited.

⁴Now we will repeat today’s idea until we have listened and understood that God’s Laws are the only laws that exist.

⁵And then, as a conclusion to the practice, we will say to ourselves:

⁶I am under no laws but God’s.

12. We will repeat this idea as often as possible today; at least four or five times an hour, and also in response to any temptation to feel subject to other laws throughout the day.

²In this way we declare our freedom from all danger and all tyranny.

³It is our acknowledgment that God is our Father, and that His Son is saved.

---

^I W-50.1:3 “You place your faith in the most trivial and absurd symbols: in pills, money, ‘protective’ clothing, ‘influence,’ ‘prestige,’ being well liked, knowing the ‘right’ people, and in an endless list of forms that are nothing, to which you ascribe magical powers.”

T-27.X.2:1-3 “…the body tries in many ways to PROVE that it is autonomous and real. It puts on things it has bought with little metal discs or strips of paper that the world proclaims as valuable and good. It works to get them by doing senseless things, and wastes them on senseless things it neither NEEDS nor even WANTS.”

^II T-12.II.7:1 “How simple, then, is God’s plan for salvation!”

T-15.X.11:6 “Being of God, salvation is simple, and therefore it is VERY easy to understand.”

T-31.I.1:1 “How simple is salvation!”

Salvation, indeed, is something very simple, but that does not mean it will necessarily seem easy to you, for you can make it as difficult for yourself as you wish. Keep in mind that the determining factor in this, as in everything, is your will.

The problem is that you believe you know your individual will and claim not to know God’s, when in truth, because of your legendary lack of honesty, the situation is exactly the opposite. You know perfectly well what God’s Will is, for your heart constantly tells you through your moods. Yet the intense fear that God’s Love awakens in that small ego with which you have identified leads you to deceive yourself about what you truly want. You say you desire Heaven and the Love of God, but be honest with yourself: in reality, you do not wish to stop being you. And that is what makes such a simple Course seem so difficult to you, because the squaring of the circle you attempt to achieve is impossible.

The real difficulty of this Course lies in the intense fear that the Truth arouses in you. Acknowledge, at least, that although you deeply long to attain knowledge, you are also terrified of losing your cherished world.

Do not take this lightly, nor pretend to want what you truly do not want. The reality is that your will is always fulfilled, and therefore, you always have what you truly desire. Work humbly and face your essential fears. They are, in truth, nothing—but the fear you feel toward your own fear prevents you from recognizing this.

The paradox is that with your little will you will achieve only fantasies of salvation; renounce it, and you are already saved. Ultimately, forgive also your efforts at holiness. You do not need them; you are already holy.

In the last analysis, salvation is not even something simple—it is a myth belonging to a world of illusions, for in truth it has never existed, just as that world which so greatly needs it does not exist. To be saved is simply to realize that you have always been in the Heart of God and that everything else has been but a bad dream.

^III From the perspective of the Course, “magic” is the belief that one illusion possesses the intrinsic capacity to affect another illusion. This belief is inherent to the thought of the world, which interprets relationships among illusions as though they were true cause-and-effect relationships. But they are not.

Illusions cannot be the cause of anything, because they themselves are effects. They are projections of the mind, and only the mind is cause. Therefore, illusions bear no real relationship to one another: each exists solely as a reflection of the thoughts that engender it. The only ontological “reality” of matter consists precisely in being an illusory projection of the mind that conceives it; and only for that mind does it have any sort of reality.

To think that a “thing” in the world—a dream image—can affect or alter another is to think magically. It is like believing that a figure projected in a film frame can influence, by itself, another figure in the same or a later frame. In truth, there is no causal relationship between them: both depend entirely on the projector that produces them.

That is what Jesus means when He says that a medicine—an illusion—cannot heal a body—another illusion. There is no real cause-and-effect relationship between them; they are merely symbols generated by the mind. It is the mind that decides what “relationship” they will have with each other, according to the belief it holds at that moment.

“Magical thinking,” therefore, is the exact opposite of the “miracle-mindedness.” It is the thought system of the world, the way in which you—and everyone here—interpret what you perceive. This way of thinking encompasses everything and completely conditions your understanding of the processes and relationships you believe you observe. It is the very basis of the world’s causal interpretation and the foundation of what is called “scientific thinking,” which ultimately seeks to predict the future through the application of so-called “physical laws.” Yet these “laws” do not exist in Reality: they are only agreements within the fragmented mind of the Son of God, affected by the belief in separation.

Consider this example: you are asleep and dream of a man in the jungle. Suddenly a tiger appears, pounces upon him, and devours him. When you awaken, you have no doubt that both the man and the tiger were projections of your imagination—symbols you placed there. But notice this: the way they related—the tiger devouring the man—was also your creation. You imagined the outcome, and you could have dreamed anything else: that the man escaped by climbing a tree, or that he simply rose into the air. In dreams, all things are possible, and you accept this without difficulty.

Well then, what you call your “real” life works in exactly the same way. You project everything you perceive and also the way those elements relate to each other.

You might object that this is hard to accept, since you feel incapable of altering the physical laws that seem to govern everything and everyone equally. But that “you” to which you refer is merely an expression of the fragmented mind of the Son of God, which shares those mental agreements—those “laws”—that appear to affect everything equally. That is the “reliability” of which the text speaks, as opposed to “validity”: the laws of the world are reliable only within the dream, but they are not valid in Reality.

Most Course students readily accept that taking a pill to cure an illness is magical thinking. However, they find it much harder to admit that believing they need to breathe to live is also magical thinking, or that if they let go of an object it does not necessarily have to fall to the ground. It could remain suspended in the air, for Newton’s laws are nothing but agreements within the shared mind. If you could descend into the depths of your true Self and free yourself from those collective beliefs, you would understand that you could walk on water or move mountains, just as Jesus said.

It is essential to understand this, for only thus will you comprehend the nature of miracles and why they can transcend the so-called “physical laws.” The Course expresses it with absolute clarity:

“Miracles place man beyond the laws of physics and raise him into the sphere of celestial order.” (T-1.P-54.1)

“Miracles are a kind of exchange. Like all expressions of love—which are always miraculous in the true sense—the exchange reverses the physical laws.” (T-1.P-9)

^IV What magic seeks to conceal is “…that it (the mind) is its own enemy, that it attacks itself and wants to die.” (5:4)

^V John 8:32 “And you shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free.”

^VI This Course often refers to life in this world, to personal life, as a journey back to the Heart of God. It speaks constantly of walking a path, of your steps being guided by the loving Voice of the Holy Spirit—a path along which you walk hand in hand with Jesus. This is the part of the Course you enjoy and read with enthusiasm.

At other times—as in this Lesson—Jesus describes with great precision your worldly beliefs, the values of your thought system, and those very human desires that arise from the needs you perceive. Jesus knows you very well. He was human, like you. But then, to those beliefs so intimate, so common, and so absolutely widespread, Jesus calls them absurd and meaningless; He even tells you they are born of madness.

That other part of the Course certainly disturbs you; it touches you deeply and leaves you somewhat uneasy, for you fully identify with that character described in such a degraded manner. Do you not worry, after all, when your body or that of your loved ones falls ill? Do you not feel anxious when you do not know how to pay the bills at the end of the month? Then you ask yourself: where am I on that path? Am I near the end or still at the beginning?

Understand this well: you will never know. And moreover, it does not matter. It does not matter at all where you are; the only thing that matters is where you are going. Realize that everything you tell yourself about what you are or where you are is false; all that consists of the thoughts the early Lessons taught you mean nothing, and therefore are not important and require only your forgiveness—they are illusions.

The only thing that matters is your attitude. Do not worry about what you desire, nor blame yourself for still seeing yourself as having needs to satisfy. Instead, concern yourself with what you want to want. Concern yourself with where you place your will in the present. Detach completely from your past and your future, and with your feet firmly planted in the now say: “I have no laws but God’s,” and be free right now. There is no other time, nor any other you than this one.

^VII Jesus asks you to realize that your life is governed not only by the laws you use to manage fear but also by others you use to manage love—and He calls them all perverse. Then, in the next paragraph, He will explain why.

The laws of the world are double-edged swords; they serve both to defend and to attack. In truth, they were conceived only to imprison you. God’s Laws, however, are perfectly univocal: they only give, always.

Realize that the laws that govern you in matters of “love” are as cruel as the others. Woe to him who does not return your love! You will destroy him. Forget the laws that govern your personal relationships; they contain the seed of hatred. See it clearly.

^VIII The word “religions” appears in quotation marks—as it does in the Notes—because Jesus does not regard formal, institutionalized religions as true spiritual paths. According to His teaching, these structures tend to “humanize” God, projecting upon Him the traits of the ego: anger, punishment, favoritism, or guilt. Thus they transform the natural longing for union with the Creator into a system of human mediations and hierarchies that ascribe to themselves a spiritual power they do not possess. They are, in reality, attempts to bring truth to illusions instead of bringing illusions to truth.

Jesus alludes to this distortion in chapter 3 of the Text when He comments on the traditional view of the crucifixion: “…God permitted, and even encouraged, one of His Sons to suffer BECAUSE he was good” (T-3.IV.2:1), and He adds: “This particularly anti-religious concept occurs in many religions, and this is not by chance or coincidence.” (T-3.IV.2:4) Such beliefs reflect the irrational projections of the ego, which pervert the image of Divine Love and transform the message of salvation into a discourse of guilt and condemnation. That is why Jesus warns that those “religions” do not save, but condemn in the name of Heaven.

The light has come.

1. The light has come.

²You have been healed, and you can heal.

³The light has come.

⁴You have been saved, and you can save.

⁵You are at peace, and you bring peace with you wherever you go.

⁶Darkness, conflict, and death have disappeared.

⁷The light has come.

2. Today we celebrate the happy ending to your long dream of disaster.

²No more dark dreams will now be yours.

³The light has come.

⁴Today begins the era of light for you and for everyone.

⁵It is a new era, in which a new world is born.

⁶The old one has left no trace upon it.

⁷Today we see a different world, because the light has come.

3. Our exercises for today will be joyous ones, in which we give thanks for the fading of the old and the beginning of the new.

²There are no shadows from the past to cloud our sight or hide the world forgiveness offers us.

³Today we will accept the new world as we want to see it.

⁴What we desire will be given us.

⁵It is our will to see the light.

⁶The light has come.

4. We will devote our longer practice periods today to looking at the world that our forgiveness shows us.

²That is what we want to see, and only that.

³Our single purpose makes our goal inevitable.

⁴Today the real world rises before us in gladness, to be seen at last.

⁵Vision is given us now that the light has come.

⁶Today we do not see the shadow of the ego upon the world.

⁷We see the light, and in it Heaven’s reflection shining on the world. ^I

5. Begin the longer practice periods by telling yourself the glad tidings of your release: ^II

²The light has come.

³I have forgiven the world.

6. Do not dwell on the past today.

²Keep a completely open mind, washed of all past ideas and cleared of every concept you have made.

³You have forgiven the world today.

⁴You can now look upon it as if you had never seen it before.

⁵You do not yet know what it looks like.

⁶You merely wait to have it shown to you.

⁷As you wait, say this several times, slowly and with great patience:

⁸The light has come.

⁹I have forgiven the world.

7. Realize that your forgiveness entitles you to vision.

²Understand that the Holy Spirit never fails to give the gift of sight to those who forgive.

³Trust that He will not fail you now.

⁴You have forgiven the world.

⁵The Holy Spirit will be with you as you watch and wait. ^III

⁶He will show you what true vision sees.

⁷This is His Will, and you have joined with Him.

8. Wait patiently for Him.

²He will be there.

³The light has come.

⁴You have forgiven the world.

⁵Tell Him you know you cannot fail because you trust in Him.

⁶And tell yourself you wait in certainty to look upon the world He promised you.

⁷From this time on, you will see differently.

⁸The light has come today,

⁹And you will see the world that has been promised since the beginning of time and in which time itself will end.

9. The shorter practice periods will be joyful reminders of your release.

²Remind yourself about every fifteen minutes that today is a time for special celebration.

³Give thanks for God’s Mercy and His Love.

⁴Be glad you have the power to release your vision completely through forgiveness. ^IV

⁵Be confident that today marks a new beginning.

⁶Without the darkness of the past upon your eyes, you cannot fail to see today.

⁷And what you see will be so welcome that you will gladly extend today forever.

10. Then say:

²The light has come.

³I have forgiven the world.

⁴If you are tempted, say to anyone who seems to pull you back into darkness:

⁵The light has come.

⁶I have forgiven you.

11. Let us devote this day to the serenity in which God would have us be.

²Keep it in your awareness of yourself, and see it everywhere.

³Today we celebrate the beginning of your vision of the real world, which has come to take the place of the one you made and thought was real.

---

^I It is quite possible that the statement in today’s Lesson may at first seem to you an abstraction—a lovely affirmation describing a somewhat fanciful experience filled with good intentions. It may give the impression that Jesus is an idealist who expresses Himself poetically to encourage you toward the achievement of something that, deep down, you consider impossible.

Nothing could be further from the truth. His statement is absolutely precise, completely true, and unfailingly fulfilled. The problem is that you have not read it carefully. You have not noticed what Jesus is actually saying. Read again the first line of this paragraph. Notice that it says we will see “…the world that our forgiveness shows us.” The key to everything is “our forgiveness.”

It is impossible to see the light of Heaven shining upon the world unless you forgive it—but it is also impossible not to see it if you do.

Then read carefully the next line: “That is what we want to see, and only that.” If that is indeed your will, remember that your will is always perfectly fulfilled. You are the Son of God, and such is your power.

If you choose to believe that you are a fragile and vulnerable human being, condemned to die, that is what you will believe you see, for that is the power of your beliefs. But if you assume your true identity, you will work miracles within the dream of the world, and while your eyes are not yet fully open, you will behold a world upon which the light of Heaven shines.

It is still a dream, but through your forgiveness the light has entered your nightmare and transformed it completely; now it is a happy dream. That is what Jesus calls “the real world.” It is certainly not real, but it had to be given a name. In it you still see changing forms and contrasts, yet now the light is reflected in everything, and all begins to taste of Heaven, where all is one.

Understand well that this Course is very simple. It offers you only one idea: place all your will in forgiving absolutely everything, and place it only there. And you can be sure that the third line of this same paragraph is completely true: “Our single purpose makes our goal inevitable.” And then the light comes.

This Lesson is the logical conclusion of the preceding ones: W-pI.72: “I want to forgive, and I do forgive”; W-pI.73: “I want there to be light”; W-pI.74: “God wants there to be light”; W-pI.75: “The light has come.” Today’s Lesson is cause for celebration—the natural result of having forgiven illusions and aligned the mind with truth.

^II Luke 1:19 “And the angel answered and said to him, ‘I am Gabriel, who stands in the presence of God, and have been sent to speak to you and to bring you this good news.’”

^III You may think that forgiving from the heart is very difficult, but that is the opinion of your egoic mind, which is completely irrational and utterly false. Your ego is deceiving you. You are deceiving yourself.

The situation is exactly this: imagine a person who, with his right hand, is squeezing his own throat while crying out with tears in his eyes, “Help! I’m choking!” Well, that is precisely your situation. Of course you are choking! You are choking yourself!

You say that forgiving is very difficult. You are aware that your judgments are embittering your life. You know perfectly well that your own judgments depend solely on you.

What is happening there? Look closely, for there lies the key to your liberation.

^IV Notice once again that the key to your salvation lies in your hands—in your own forgiveness.

God’s Will is the only Will there is.

1. Today’s idea can be regarded as the central thought toward which all our exercises are directed.

²God’s Will is the only Will.

³When you have recognized this, you will have recognized that your will is His.

⁴The belief that conflict is possible will have disappeared.

⁵Peace will replace the strange idea that you are torn by conflicting goals. ^I

⁶As an expression of God’s Will, you have no goal but His. ^II

2. Today’s idea contains immense peace.

²And today’s exercises are directed toward finding it.

³The idea itself is wholly true.

⁴Therefore, it cannot give rise to illusions.

⁵Without illusions, conflict is impossible.

⁶Let us try today to recognize this, and so experience the peace this recognition brings.

3. Begin the longer practice periods by slowly repeating these thoughts several times, with firm determination to understand their meaning and hold them in your mind:

²God’s Will is the only Will there is.

³I cannot be in conflict.

⁴Then spend a few minutes adding some related thoughts, such as:

⁵I am at peace.

⁶Nothing can disturb me.

⁷My will is God’s Will.

⁸My will and God’s Will are one.

⁹God’s Will for His Son is peace.

¹⁰During this introductory phase, be sure to resolve any conflicting thoughts that may cross your mind. ^III

¹¹If any arise, say immediately:

¹²God’s Will is the only Will there is.

¹³These conflicting thoughts are meaningless.

4. If some specific conflict seems particularly difficult to resolve, bring it to mind briefly and very concretely.

²Name the people involved and the situation, and say silently to yourself:

³God’s Will is the only Will there is.

⁴And I share it with Him.

⁵My conflict about ___ cannot be real.

5. Once your mind has been cleared in this way, close your eyes and try to experience the peace your reality entitles you to. ^IV

²Sink into it, and feel it surrounding you.

³You may be tempted to confuse these attempts with withdrawal, but the difference is easily recognized.

⁴If you are succeeding, you will feel a deep sense of joy and heightened alertness, rather than a feeling of drowsiness and dullness. ^V

⁵Joy is what identifies peace.

⁶When you experience it, you will know you have found it.

6. If you find yourself slipping into withdrawal, repeat today’s idea immediately and try again.

²Do this as often as necessary.

³It is essential that you not give in to distraction, even if the peace you seek eludes you.

7. In the shorter practice periods, which you should undertake at regular and pre-determined intervals today, say to yourself:

²God’s Will is the only Will there is.

³And I seek His peace today.

⁴Then try to find the peace you are seeking.

⁵Spending one or two minutes every half hour doing this, preferably with eyes closed, will be an excellent use of time.

---

^I The conflict here lies between the goals you believe reflect the Will of God and those you believe satisfy your own desires—the ego’s desires in you. Both wills have the same objective: salvation. The Will of God is found in your awareness of your true Self—within you. The ego, however, insists that the bearers of your salvation are a series of idols that have nothing to do with you and that are outside you.

^II It is not that the Will of God is the same as yours and that you share it with Him; no, it is much more than that: you are the expression of the Will of God.
It is very likely that you will find today’s idea somewhat excessive, and certainly it is… for your ego. Remember one thing, and remember it well: everything you believe you think, you in fact think with your ego. And undoubtedly, this idea will strike you as unsettling—because it is. Why do you think, otherwise, that you had to learn in Lesson 10: “My thoughts do not mean anything”?

It is also quite possible that you accepted that idea to some extent at the time and repeated it to yourself with discipline, but there is no doubt that you have not yet fully embraced it. If you had, your mind would now be perfectly receptive to today’s idea, for the mind cannot remain blank. Your mind cannot reject the ego’s thoughts as unworthy and yet be reluctant to accept in their place the Thought of God. Your mind will, unfailingly, align itself with one thought system or the other, although it is also possible that for a time you may oscillate between them—which is quite uncomfortable and most common.

Do not worry about that, nor despair. Jesus knows very well the difficulty His proposal entails, as well as your reluctance to accept it. Why do you think He so often uses expressions such as “try…,” “seek…,” “endeavor…?” Because He knows that you have a very well-trained mind—in the ego’s thought system—and that changing it is no small task. The key to bringing about that change is to want it with all your heart.

But why would you want, with all your heart, to adopt a new way of thinking? That will occur only under two circumstances. The first—and most favorable—is that you see with absolute clarity that everything Jesus tells you is true, and that this stirs in your heart a great enthusiasm to embrace His teachings. This is the path of discernment, the easiest and fastest way, but it is a path that requires great lucidity and deep humility.

The other option is that you find yourself utterly desperate and profoundly disillusioned with the world’s promises. Your suffering will lead you to embrace, with the hope of the desperate, any alternative to the pain of the past—in which you are an expert—and this Course will find in you a good student, and you too will advance quickly.

The situation, however, becomes somewhat more complex when you do not find yourself clearly in either of those two conditions. This is because you lack the “helps” of either the call of certainty or the aversion to pain. You are a more or less “normal” person, with a more or less “normal” life, but with a certain inclination toward spiritual matters. In that case, prepare yourself to take certain measures in order to practice this Course effectively.

First of all, and before anything else, you will have to be very honest with yourself and decide whether or not you are willing to undertake the titanic task of changing your thought system, for you can be certain that what you are undertaking is a true feat.

If, despite that, you decide to go forward, you must focus your entire will on this purpose and, with firm determination, impose upon yourself a strict discipline that you will have to maintain for quite some time. One of the key aspects of this new discipline is to keep your eyes always wide open to see what is happening in your mind and how it relates to the world you perceive. Do not find this strange, for we are on a path that leads us to awakening, and awakened people have their eyes open, do they not?

It is also extraordinarily important that you open your eyes not only to watch your mind but also to observe the effects that the practice you are engaged in has upon your life. This is crucial, because, lacking the “helps” already mentioned, you must provide your own. These helps, which will prove precious to you, are your achievements. Your achievements will bring you certainty, strengthen your confidence, and quickly make your efforts cease to feel like effort, for is it an effort to do what brings you joy?

As time goes on, the path becomes easier. Your new way of interpreting reality becomes a habit and arises automatically in your mind. The temptation to follow your old guide grows weaker, for you have become more sensitive and intolerant to suffering. You do not want it for yourself or for anyone, and what now feels uncomfortable are your old habits of judgment.

You have tasted the sweetness of walking safely through an uncertain world, hand in hand with a powerful guide who resolves all conflicts for you; you need only place your trust—everything else follows naturally. And although life still gives you the occasional slap—there are so many lessons to learn!—you generally walk with a smile on your face.

Now no one needs to convince you that there is no will but God’s Will; now you know it.

^III Conflicted thinking appears when what you perceive contradicts your own expectations. The conflict arises when you interpret a situation or another person’s behavior as adverse. This disturbs you because it contradicts your interpretation of reality.

^IV Realize that your small egoic mind knows only how to manage beliefs. Your decision to want to be separate from God in order to “live” your own “life” has caused you to forget your true function: to create. Therefore, as long as you continue to embody that false identity, your only option is to believe.

Understand that your beliefs are not neutral. Although none of them are the absolute truth, some are aligned with the essence of your Being, for they reflect the Love, the Truth, and the Power from which you were created; others, on the contrary, reflect the opposite and induce in you fear, confusion, and weakness. Thus, as long as you believe yourself to be human, your only alternative is to choose between these two groups of apparent truths.

It is not a complicated choice. You need only be attentive to how they make you feel, for you will find with absolute certainty that they generate in you opposing emotional states, which will help you discern what is best for you.

^V Jesus warns you not to fall into a drowsy, lethargic, and enervated “peace.” This would turn meditation into “self-absorption,” a withdrawal from the conflicts of life into a sleepy false peace.

In contrast, the peace we seek—the peace characteristic of fruitful meditation—is distinguished by “deep joy and heightened alertness.”

It is my will that there be light.^I

1. Today we will look at the Will you share with God.

²This Will is not the same as the idle wishes of the ego, from which darkness and nothingness arise.

³The Will you share with God holds all the power of Creation.

⁴The idle wishes of the ego cannot be shared; therefore, they hold no power.

⁵They are not without effect, in the sense that they can produce a world of illusions in which you may believe blindly.

⁶But they are utterly useless to Creation,

⁷For they create nothing real.

2. Idle wishes and grievances work together to form the world you see. ^II

²The ego’s desires gave rise to it.

³And the ego’s need for grievances—essential to sustain it—fills this world with figures who seem to attack you, thus “justifying” your judgments.

⁴These figures become the “middlemen” the ego uses to traffic in grievances, which stand between your awareness and the reality of your brother. ^III

⁵In seeing them this way, you do not know your brothers, nor your Self.

3. In this strange bargain, you lose awareness of your Will, for guilt is traded back and forth, and grievances grow with every exchange. ^IV

²Could such a world have been created by the Will the Son of God shares with his Father?

³Could God have created disaster for His Son?

⁴Their Will together is Creation.

⁵Would God have created a world that seeks to destroy Himself?

4. Today we will once again attempt to reach the world that aligns with your true Will.

²In that world there is light, for it does not oppose the Will of God.

³It is not Heaven, but the light of Heaven shines upon it.

⁴It is a world where darkness has been dispelled and the ego’s idle wishes have withdrawn.

⁵And the light that shines there reflects your Will.

⁶That is why we must look for it in you.

5. The image you hold of the world can only reflect what is within you.

²The source of light or darkness is not outside you.

³Your grievances cloud your mind, and so you see a world of shadows.

⁴Forgiveness, however, clears the darkness, affirms your Will, and lets you see a world of light.

⁵We have said many times that it is easy to move past the barrier of grievances, for it cannot truly stand between you and your salvation. ^V

⁶The reason is very simple.

⁷Do you really want to be in hell?

⁸Do you really want to weep, to suffer, and to die?

6. Forget the ego’s arguments that try to convince you this is really Heaven.

²You know perfectly well it is not.

³You cannot want this for yourself.

⁴There is a point beyond which illusions cannot go.

⁵Suffering is not happiness, and what you really want is joy.

⁶That is truly your Will.

⁷And your Will is also salvation.

⁸You want to succeed in what we undertake today.

⁹So we begin with your blessing and your joyful agreement.

7. Today we will surely succeed if you remember that what you truly want is salvation.

²You will align your Will with God’s plan, for it is your own.

³There is nothing in your Will that truly opposes His, nor do you want there to be.

⁴Salvation is for you.

⁵Above all else, you want the freedom to remember who you really are.

⁶Today it is the ego that stands helpless before your Will.

⁷Your Will is free, and nothing can prevail against it. ^VI

8. Therefore, we undertake today’s exercises with gladness and confidence, certain that we will find what it is your Will to find, and remember what it is your Will to remember.

²No idle wish can stop us or mislead us with the illusion of its strength.

³Let your Will be done today. ^VII

⁴And bring to an end the foolish belief that you would choose hell over Heaven.

9. We begin the longer practice periods by recognizing that God’s plan for salvation, and His alone, is wholly in agreement with your Will.

²It is not the purpose of a foreign power forced upon you against your Will.

³You and your Father are in perfect accord in this goal.

⁴You will succeed today.

⁵Today is the appointed time for the liberation of the Son of God from hell and from all idle wishes.

⁶His Will has returned to his awareness.

⁷Today he is ready to behold the light in him and be saved. ^VIII

10. Once you have reminded yourself of this, and have resolved to keep your Will clearly in mind, say to yourself with gentle firmness and quiet certainty:

²It is my will that there be light.

³I want to behold the light that reflects God’s Will and mine.

⁴Then let your Will be reaffirmed, united with the Power of God and your Self.

⁵Let the rest of the practice be guided by Them, and join with Them who lead the way.

11. In the shorter practice periods, declare again what it is you truly want by saying: ^IX

²It is my will that there be light.

³Darkness is not my will.

⁴Repeat this several times each hour.

⁵But most importantly, apply today’s idea the moment you are tempted to hold any kind of grievance.

⁶This will help you let go of all grievances, instead of clinging to them and hiding them in the dark.

---

^I Genesis 1:3 “Then God said, ‘Let there be light’; and there was light.”

^II This is similar to Freud’s observation in his celebrated work The Interpretation of Dreams, when he correctly identified fears and desires as the generators of the symbols we contemplate in our nightly dreams. Here, Jesus tells us the same thing, except that He applies it to the perception of the waking world. When we believe we awaken in the morning, we are in fact still dreaming, and the elements of the world we see with the body’s eyes are likewise symbols of our desires and resentments.

^III A middleman is someone who buys goods from a producer and sells them to consumers. In this case, the ego (the producer) makes use of attacking bodies (the intermediaries)—whose behavior demands a “just” judgment—to deliver to you (the consumer) resentments (the merchandise).

In other words, those who attack you are the means the ego employs to get you to acquire what it sells: the suffering and pain of your resentments.

^IV You blame them, and they blame you, in a process that increases the resentments between you.

^V  W-pI.69.5:2–5 “Resolve to go past these clouds. Reach out and touch them in your mind. Brush them aside with your hand, and as you pass through, feel them touching your cheeks, your forehead, and your eyelids. Go on; the clouds cannot stop you.”

W-pI.70.8:1–2 “Since all illusions of salvation have failed you, surely you do not want to remain in vain pursuit of idols in the clouds, when you could so easily reach the light of true salvation. Try to go past the clouds in whatever way appeals to you.”

^VI Matthew 16:18 “And I also say to you that you are Peter, and upon this rock I will build My church, and the gates of hell shall not prevail against it.”

^VII Matthew 6:10 “Thy kingdom come. Thy will be done, on earth as it is in heaven.” In this case, instead of asking God that His Will be done, Jesus asks that ours be done: the Will to save ourselves.

^VIII Notice carefully here that the one who is saved is not the “you” you believe yourself to be, the one to whom you give a name and surname; it is the Son of God who is saved—that is, your true Self.

You do today’s Lesson, and the one who is saved is the Son of God in you. Do not be mistaken about that.

^IX Although throughout today’s Lesson there is much talk of light and also of resentments, the true protagonist of today’s practice is the will. The entire Lesson is designed first to make you aware of what it is you truly want, and then to have you place your will in achieving it. First you gain clarity, and then you go for it.

Jesus begins by showing you how miserably you waste your time embittering your life with absurd resentments toward brothers who, though they are Children of the same Father and seek in this life exactly what you do—to be happy—you have turned into your enemies, thereby thwarting every expectation of attaining the happiness you long for. For this reason, and above all, it is essential that you renounce your resentments so as to cease sabotaging your legitimate goal of reaching happiness.

It is very important that you realize that if you reproach your brothers for anything, it is because you have a poor opinion of yourself. You think they can effectively harm you because you see yourself as fragile and vulnerable, and you believe you can lose something from the only and paltry inheritance you recognize as yours: your body.

It is obvious that your body can suffer and be diminished, and it is also true that your opinions and values can be outraged; but has that ever truly had anything to do with what you really are? Has that ever affected you in any way? Throughout your personal life, your body, your ideas, and all external circumstances have constantly changed, and if that is indeed so, you can conclude that none of that can be related to your true identity.

However, there is something that has never changed one bit throughout all that time, for it has always remained exactly the same: your awareness of being yourself. That awareness of being, of existing, has remained forever unaltered, and it is the fine thread that unites your personal mind with your immortal soul. That consciousness of pure being, which is the source of all love and happiness, is invulnerable and eternal; it is the only vestige of reality in your egoic mind, the seat of your will and the dwelling place of the light. That is what is real. How could you harbor resentments if the only attacks you can suffer can affect only illusions?

Remember: “Nothing real can be threatened. Nothing unreal exists…”

The second part of today’s Lesson is the most important, for it is a true declaration of intent and the reaffirmation of your real will, which you have identified in the first part. Now you repeat to yourself constantly throughout the day what it is you truly want. This is a long process whose purpose is to crystallize your mind in a single direction in order to establish a new habit.

If your mind were virgin, that process would be quite simple and brief, but it is not. Your mind is conditioned by an insidious automatic mechanism: the world’s thought system that has governed your mind until now. If you become aware of how much time and effort you have devoted to “educating” yourself and imposing upon yourself that painful way of thinking, you will understand the difficulties you will encounter in changing it.

But that is not all. You must also become aware of something that makes the situation even more complicated: you gratify your anger and resentments with pleasure. The ego is a mental illness that perverts the mind, and one of its most perfidious devices is the inversion of your cognitive system to interpret your feelings and sensations. Thus, what harms you, you interpret as pleasurable, and feeling bad attracts you. Realize that you will have to resist that temptation.

You become angry, blame, and attack because you are drawn to it. Each time you do so, the ego gives you its poisonous reward. This may shock you, but it requires little honesty to acknowledge that it is so. Why else would you do it? But do not worry: “You shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free.” Well then, now you know the truth.

Be realistic. Become aware and accept that you stand at the beginning of a long process of undoing old patterns. This is a prerequisite for establishing within your mind the new thought system that will make you happy. Be patient and persevere. If you follow the path with faith, always walking in the same direction, the result is certain. Do not be discouraged. You will find many rewards along the way, and increasingly you will be accompanied first by confidence and then by the certainty that your life now has a true purpose and that you are finally fulfilling your function. Rejoice. In truth, all is good news. That, precisely, is the gospel.

Holding grievances is an attack on God’s plan for salvation.

1. Although we have recognized that the ego’s plan for salvation is the opposite of God’s, we have not yet emphasized that it is also a direct attack on His plan, and a deliberate attempt to destroy it.

²In this attack, God is given the attributes of the ego, while the ego is viewed as having the qualities of God. ^I

2. The ego’s fundamental wish is to replace God.

²In fact, the ego is the embodiment of that wish in physical form.

³For it is this wish that makes the mind appear to be enclosed within a body, kept isolated and alone, and unable to reach other minds except through the body that was made to imprison it. ^II

⁴To impose limits on communication cannot be the best means of extending it.

⁵Yet the ego would have you believe that it is.

3. While it is clear that this is an attempt to maintain the limitations the body must impose, it may not yet be as obvious why holding grievances is an attack on God’s plan for salvation.

²But consider the kinds of things that lead you to hold grievances.

³Are they not always associated with something a body does?

⁴Someone says something you do not like, or does something that displeases you.

⁵In either case, it is always the body’s behavior that you see as proving the person’s guilt.

4. It is not what the person is that concerns you.

²Instead, you are preoccupied with what the person does with the body.

³In doing so, you not only fail to help that person escape the body’s limitations,

⁴you actively reinforce those limitations by identifying the person with the body. ^III

⁵This is an attack on God, for if His Son is only a body, then so must God be.

⁶And it is inconceivable that a Creator could be entirely unlike what He creates.

5. If God were a body, what would His plan for salvation be?

²What could it be but death?

³And in presenting Himself as the Author of Life and not of death, He would have to be a liar and a deceiver, full of empty promises—one who offers illusions in place of truth.

⁴The apparent reality of the body makes this view of God seem quite convincing.

⁵Indeed, if the body were real, it would be difficult to avoid drawing this conclusion.

⁶And every grievance you hold insists that the body is real.

⁷Your grievances cause you to overlook entirely what your brother is.

⁸They reinforce your belief that he is a body and condemn him for being one.

⁹They declare that his salvation must be death, and in doing so project this attack onto God, blaming Him for it.

6. To this carefully constructed nightmare—where angry beasts hunt their prey and mercy cannot enter—the ego comes as your savior.

²God made you a body.

³Very well, let us accept that and rejoice.

⁴Since you are a body, do not deprive yourself of anything the body can offer.

⁵Take what little you can get.

⁶God gave you nothing.

⁷The body is your only savior.

⁸It is the death of God and your salvation.

⁹This is the universal belief of the world you see.

7. Some hate the body and seek to harm and debase it.

²Others idolize it and try to glorify and exalt it.

³But as long as the body remains the center of your self-concept, you are attacking God’s plan for salvation and holding grievances against Him and His Creations, in order not to hear the Voice of Truth or welcome It as your Friend.

⁴The savior you have chosen has taken His place.

⁵That savior is your friend, and God your enemy.

8. Today we will try to end these senseless attacks on salvation. ^IV

²Instead, we will try to welcome it.

³Your upside-down perception has devastated your peace of mind.

⁴You have seen yourself within a body, and the truth outside you—blocked from your awareness by the body’s limitations.

⁵Now we will try to see this differently.

9. The light of truth is in us, where God placed it.

²The body is outside us and does not concern us.

³To be without a body is to be in our natural state.

⁴To recognize the light of truth in us is to recognize ourselves as we are.

⁵To see our Self as something apart from the body is to end the attack on God’s plan for salvation, and to accept it instead.

⁶And wherever His plan is accepted, it has already been accomplished.

10. Our goal in today’s longer practice periods is to become aware that God’s plan for salvation has already been fulfilled in us.

²To achieve this goal, we must replace attack with acceptance.

³As long as we continue to attack, we cannot understand what God’s plan for us is.

⁴Thus, we are attacking what we do not understand.

⁵Now we will try to lay judgment aside and ask what God’s plan is for us:

⁶What is salvation, Father?

⁷I do not know.

⁸Tell me, that I may understand.

⁹Then wait in silence for His answer.

11. We have attacked God’s plan for salvation without waiting to hear what it is.

²We have shouted our grievances so loudly that we have not listened to His Voice.

³We have used our grievances to blind our eyes and close our ears.

⁴Now we want to see, to hear, and to learn.

⁵What is salvation, Father?

⁶Ask, and you will be answered.

⁷Seek, and you will find. ^V

12. We no longer ask the ego what salvation is, or where to find it.

²We ask the Truth.

³Be confident, then, that the answer will be true—because of the One to Whom you have asked.

⁴Whenever your confidence falters, and your hope of success begins to dim and die, repeat the question and your request, remembering Whom you are asking: the infinite Creator of the infinite, Who created you like Himself:

⁵What is salvation, Father?

⁶I do not know.

⁷Tell me, that I may understand.

⁸He will answer you.

⁹You need only be willing to listen.

13. Today, one or perhaps two brief practice periods per hour will suffice, since they will be somewhat longer than usual.

²Each exercise period should begin like this:

³Holding grievances is an attack on God’s plan for salvation.

⁴Instead of attacking it, I will accept it.

⁵What is salvation, Father?

⁶Then wait quietly for about a minute, preferably with your eyes closed, and listen for His answer.

---

^I To the ego, embodied in a body, are assigned the aspects of being—the attributes of God: to create, to love, and to know. God manifests them in a perfectly abstract and unlimited way; He creates His Son as an extension of His Love and knows Him, for His Son is Himself.

Bodies “create” other bodies through what is called “making love,” and they “know” one another through the senses of their bodies. The ego is not creative but merely a clumsy counterfeit of Being—an inept imitation.

^II There is a fundamental, generic question that, at some point, crosses every human mind, consciously or not. While most people ignore it and forget it, for some it becomes a source of constant concern. The question is: What is all this about?

This question can be approached from many angles and can take more specific forms. It can be phrased in philosophical terms—What is reality?—in scientific terms—What is matter?—or in psychological terms—Who am I? In any case, such questioning reveals an unease, a restlessness that seeks to be appeased in some way, or else must be forgotten altogether.

Basically, there are two paradigms that address this question, and they are perfectly antithetical—each is a mirror image of the other; the statements of one are the inversion of those of the other. Thus, one says: “I am real, and the idea of God is a sublimation of my desires.” The other—the paradigm of this Course—states that God is the only reality, and the ego—symbolized in the body—is the embodiment of the idea of being God.

Both paradigms are perfectly consistent within themselves, yet they lead to different conclusions and experiences of being. It is also important to recognize that the mind cannot operate under both paradigms simultaneously, nor can it alternate between them, for doing so stresses and depresses it.

For the mind to function efficiently and achieve any kind of result, it must choose one of these two descriptions of what is real and adhere to it consistently.

This Lesson describes the world’s paradigm as seen from the perspective of the Course. Perhaps the most relevant point here is to become aware of the consequences of believing in the ego’s proposal for salvation. It must be understood that Jesus’ description of what the ego asserts is absolutely accurate, and it is something every human being knows perfectly well, for in one way or another, each has subscribed to it throughout personal life.

Jesus now offers a very different proposal, one that will obviously lead to a very different experience. He understands that His proposal cannot be lightly accepted as true; He merely asks that we give it a chance and verify its truth for ourselves.

^III To stop harboring resentments is an unavoidable requirement for transcending identification with the body. The practice of this teaching—forgiving our resentments—is essential to embrace the premise of Workbook Lesson 97: I am spirit.

^IV Jesus’ reasoning for demonstrating that harboring resentments is an attack on God’s plan for salvation exposes the unconscious mechanism that governs your mind, which is essentially as follows:

PREMISES:

• Your resentments are caused by the behavior of others toward you.

• Behavior belongs to bodies.

• Harboring resentments reinforces in your mind the idea that bodies are your only reality and that of others.

• If you are a body, your Creator must be one too. This idea is unconscious but fully operative in your mind.

• To be saved from something means to cease being that something; therefore, the body’s salvation is death.

• God lies; He says He creates life, yet the life He creates always ends in death.

• Your brother’s salvation and your own is death, for that is what that lying God has established.

• In this world of death, everyone kills to go on living, and everyone ends up dying.

• Your body is all you have—your only comfort and the place where you experience pleasure by satisfying your perceived needs.

CONCLUSION:

Identifying with your body and seeking your salvation in it sabotages God’s plan for salvation as this Course teaches it. Every time you harbor a resentment, you reinforce in your mind this bleak view of yourself and of everything.

^V This version of the Gospel quotation is repeated throughout the Course on many occasions. Jesus constantly urges you to pray sincerely and wholeheartedly, assuring you that all your desires will be fulfilled. This is not because, in some lofty realm or hypothetical Heaven, there exists a being who watches you, listens to your petitions, and then capriciously decides whether to grant them or not.

God has created His Son perfect, and so it shall remain forever. He is real and unchangeable.

The mechanism by which your prayers seem to manifest within the illusory dream of bodily life is, in truth, quite different. That illusory dream is of your own making—a projection of your fears and desires. It is the mind of the Son of God, confused because it believes itself to be a body in time and space. That mind, infinitely powerful, converses with itself through the characters with which it identifies in that illusory realm, for it has become fragmented by believing in the impossible idea of separation, which in itself is fragmenting.

Thus, it conceives a dream of sin and guilt, which, through forgiveness and prayer, it transforms into redemption and salvation.

The mind of the Son of God—which is the Mind of God—grants itself all that it asks for from the heart: the good and the bad, illusions as well as salvation. Such is its power to create, for such is its power to believe.

Matthew 7:7: “Ask, and it will be given to you; seek, and you will find; knock, and it will be opened to you.”

Only God’s plan for salvation will work.

1. You may not realize that the ego has devised a plan for salvation that is the opposite of God’s.

²This is the plan in which you believe.

³And because it is the opposite of God’s, you also believe that accepting God’s plan in place of the ego’s is to condemn yourself. ^I

⁴This may sound absurd, of course.

⁵But after looking at the ego’s plan, you may realize that, however absurd it seems, you do believe in it.

2. The ego’s plan for salvation centers around holding grievances.

²According to this plan, if someone else were to speak or act differently, if some external circumstance or event were to change, you would be saved.

³So the source of salvation is constantly perceived as outside of yourself.

⁴Every grievance you hold is a declaration, an assertion in which you believe, saying: “If this were different, I would be saved.”

⁵The mental shift that is necessary for salvation is thus demanded of everyone and everything—except yourself. ^II

3. The role your own mind plays in this plan, therefore, is simply to determine what must change—everything but itself—in order for you to be saved.

²According to this insane plan, anything that you perceive as the source of salvation is acceptable, as long as it does not work. ^III

³This guarantees that you will keep searching in vain, for the illusion is sustained that although this one has failed, there is still hope in other places and things.

⁴Perhaps another person will be better, or another situation more successful.

4. Such is the ego’s plan for your salvation.

²Surely you have recognized that this plan aligns perfectly with the ego’s central doctrine: “Seek but do not find.” ^IV

³For what better way to ensure you never find salvation than to direct all your efforts toward seeking it where it is not?

5. God’s plan for salvation, by contrast, does work—simply because, when you follow His guidance, you seek salvation where it truly is.

²But if you wish to succeed, as God has promised you will, you must be willing to seek it only there.

³Otherwise, your purpose will be divided, and you will try to follow two plans for salvation that are completely opposed in every way.

⁴The result can only be confusion, misery, and a deep sense of failure and despair.

6. How can you escape from all of this?

²Very easily.

³Today’s idea is the answer: Only God’s plan for salvation will work.

⁴There can be no real conflict about this, because there is no possible alternative to God’s plan that can save you.

⁵His is the only plan whose outcome is certain.

⁶His is the only plan that will succeed.

7. Let us practice today by recognizing this certainty.

²And let us rejoice that there is an answer to what seems to be an insoluble conflict.

³With God, all things are possible. ^V

⁴You will attain salvation through His plan, which cannot fail.

8. Begin the two longer practice periods by reflecting on today’s idea and recognizing that it contains two parts, both equally important.

²The first is that God’s plan for your salvation will succeed.

³The second is that all other plans will not.

⁴Do not let yourself become depressed or angry over the second part, for it is inherent in the first. ^VI

⁵And in the first lies your complete release from the insane attempts and mad schemes you made to free yourself.

⁶All of them brought you only misery and pain, but God’s plan will lead you to release and joy.

9. With this in mind, devote the remainder of the longer practice period to asking God to reveal His plan to you.

²Ask Him very specifically:

³What would You have me do?

⁴Where would You have me go?

⁵What would You have me say, and to whom?

⁶Let Him take charge of the rest of the practice session, and let Him tell you what your part is in His plan for your salvation.

⁷He will answer, to the extent that you are willing to hear His Voice.

⁸Do not refuse to listen.

⁹The mere fact that you are doing these exercises proves that you have some willingness to hear.

¹⁰This is enough to claim your right to God’s answer.

10. In the shorter practice periods, repeat frequently that only God’s plan for salvation will work.

²Be alert to any temptation to hold grievances, and respond to such impulses with this variation of today’s idea:

³Holding grievances is the opposite of God’s plan for salvation.

⁴And only His plan will succeed.

⁵Try to remember today’s idea six or seven times an hour.

⁶There is no better way to spend half a minute—or less—than to remember the Source of your salvation, and to see it where it truly is.

---

^I Here, Jesus uses the terms “salvation” and “condemnation” from the ego’s perspective. For the ego, to “be saved” means to get its own way and obtain what it desires, while to “be condemned” means the frustration of its expectations. For example, accepting God’s plan for salvation in the face of a perceived offense leads to forgiveness, but this frustrates the ego’s expectations, for it seeks vengeance. Thus, the ego interprets forgiveness as condemnation.

Simply put, the ego urges you to seek salvation outside yourself—where it is not—for outside you there is nothing but illusions. True salvation, in this world (for in Reality it is not needed), consists in the opposite: to look within and recognize that you remain as your Father created you. It is understandable, then, that the ego interprets this inward journey as condemnation. And, in a sense, it is not wrong, for it marks its own condemnation—though not yours.

You may often think that accepting God’s plan for your salvation means giving up the search for it in the things the world offers—and in that, you are right. You cannot serve two masters at once. But this leads you to believe that following God’s plan condemns you to the permanent frustration of your deepest desires, which until now you have tried to appease, more or less successfully, with trivialities. In this, however, you are completely mistaken.

The truth is that you have never consistently accepted and followed God’s plan; you have always kept one eye on the ego’s gifts. This lack of consistency and determination has divided your mind and created an entirely avoidable tension. It is absolutely impossible for you to feel any sense of lack or need of any kind if you embrace God’s plan with all your heart. And here lies the key: to do it with all your heart and with all your mind.

Unity of purpose means focusing the mind in only one direction. This causes the mind to devote all its energy to achieving a single goal; in doing so, it forgets everything else, which then disappears for it—it no longer considers it, takes no account of it, and it simply fades from awareness because it has ceased to matter. The mind has become devoted to a single love, and thus, how could it possibly miss anything?

^II The ego is a mental illness. It is the condition of a mind so immersed in arrogance that it cannot even conceive of the possibility that its assumptions might be wrong. For this reason, it is an extraordinarily stable condition. It is not that the ego thinks it is right; rather, it is the condition of the mind that believes itself to be right—that the last foolish notion it has conceived is perfectly appropriate. When the egoic mind faces adversity, it always thinks that life is wrong; it never considers that its expectations might be misplaced.

The ego is the epicenter of a thought system that manages perception in relation to itself. It is the center of the universe it perceives. The attributes it assigns to its perceptions are the coordinates of a frame of reference that originates within itself. Thus, it interprets everything it perceives according to how that thing relates to it, in either positive or negative terms. When the ego looks at anything, it always evaluates whether what it perceives will bring it something or take something away. It is perfectly utilitarian, manipulative, predatory, and cowardly.

The ego experiences a permanent inner void and lunges voraciously toward what it perceives as an external space in order to fill its appetites, preying mercilessly upon its surroundings. It is restrained only by the fear that its cravings will be seen as excessive and thereby make it harder to achieve the goals of its peculiar sense of salvation. The only direction in which its code of behavior leads is to negotiate an arrangement that will allow it to gain as much as possible in every relationship.

Thus, the ego is incapable of true altruism, for that concept is antithetical to its very essence. It is enough to recall that altruism comes from alter, “the other” in Latin, which is the opposite of ego, “I.” Egoism and altruism are perfect opposites. That is why the ego will always demand change in others, never in itself; that is the principle that sustains its stability and permanence. This makes the ego unwilling to learn anything, for to learn is to change, and the only change it understands and accepts is that which can magnify its own self-image.

^III This is an idea repeated frequently throughout this Course, and one that is difficult to grasp or accept, for it is incomprehensible—and indeed it is to any rational mind. Yet it must be understood that the ego uses rationality only for its own benefit and only when it serves its purposes, for its nature is intrinsically irrational.

The “reason” the ego abhors true salvation—which would perfectly fulfill every longing—is precisely its aversion to change. The ego, in truth, does not want to stop seeking. It will proclaim to the heavens, with loud cries and tears, that it is desperately seeking the love that will fill its heart and the peace that will bring rest to its mind—and that is perfectly true. However, remember that the Will of the Son of God is always fulfilled, even that of his sick mind, and it is always fulfilled in the present.

The key to understanding this madness lies precisely there: it is always fulfilled in the present. The ego’s will is to seek salvation, and that is exactly what it attains—the search for salvation. If the ego—this black hole, the symbol of absence, lack, and nothingness—were to find salvation, it would simply disappear, and that terrifies the ego; it terrifies the “I”; it terrifies you who so long to seek salvation. But do you truly wish to find it? For if you did, and desired it with all your heart, it would surely be yours. And when? Now—this very instant. When else could it be?

^IV Matthew 7:7: “Ask, and it shall be given you; seek, and ye shall find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you.”

T-12.VI.1:4: “Its dictates, therefore, can be summed up simply as: ‘Seek and do not find.’”

^V Matthew 19:26: “But Jesus beheld them, and said unto them, ‘With men this is impossible; but with God all things are possible.’”

^VI If this happens to you—if you feel a twinge of unease when you think that the things of the world might offer some kind of “salvation”—it is because there are still things that delight you, that is, there is still something that creates illusion for you. Do not worry, do not become anxious, and certainly do not feel guilty about it.

This Course is not meant to make you feel bad about anything—quite the opposite! Forgive your illusions, forgive yourself for harboring them in your heart, and forgive yourself for feeling guilty for having them. Forgive everything and move on. You are on the right path. You are doing the best you can, and above all, be absolutely certain that Jesus goes with you.

And even if you do not pay Him much attention, do not be concerned; His patience is perfect, and He will not allow you to stray too far. After all, you have already come too far for that.

Remember what Jesus tells us in the Psychotherapy supplement: “Setbacks are temporary. From a broader perspective, progress is always being made toward truth.” (P-3.II.1:8–9)

Salvation comes from me.

1. Every temptation is nothing more than some form of the basic temptation not to believe today’s idea.

²Salvation seems to come from anywhere except yourself.

³The same is true of the source of guilt.

⁴In truth, you see both guilt and salvation only in your own mind, and nowhere else.

⁵When you realize that all the guilt you perceive is merely a product of your own mind, you will also understand that guilt and salvation must be found in the same place.

⁶And when you understand this, you will be saved. ^I

2. The apparent “cost” of accepting today’s idea is this: it means that nothing outside of you can save you, and nothing outside of you can bring you peace.

²But it also means that nothing outside of you can hurt you, disturb your peace, or upset you in any way.

³Today’s idea puts you in charge of the universe, and places you where you belong as the Son of God. ^II

3. This is not a role that can be accepted partially, and by now you will likely have begun to see that accepting it is salvation.

²But it may still not be clear to you why recognizing that guilt is in your own mind also entails the understanding that salvation is there as well.

³God would not have placed the remedy for sickness where it could be of no use.

⁴That may be how your mind has worked, but it is not how His works.

⁵He wants you healed, and so He has kept the Source of healing where the need for healing lies.

⁶You have tried to do just the opposite, doing everything you could—no matter how twisted or absurd—to separate healing from the sickness to which it was meant to apply, in order to keep the sickness.

⁷Your goal was to prevent healing; God’s goal was to ensure it.

4. Today we will practice recognizing that the Will of God and our own are truly the same in this.

²God wants us to be healed, and we do not really want to remain sick, for sickness makes us unhappy.

³Therefore, by accepting today’s idea, we are aligning ourselves with God.

⁴He does not want us to be sick.

⁵We do not want that either.

⁶He wants us to be healed.

⁷So do we.

5. Today we are ready to do two longer practice periods, each lasting ten to fifteen minutes.

²But you may choose for yourself when to do them.

³We will follow this pattern for several lessons, and once again you are encouraged to decide in advance the best time for each session, and to follow your own schedule as closely as possible.

6. Begin these practice periods by repeating today’s idea, and then adding a statement expressing your recognition that salvation does not come from anything outside you.

²You might say something like this:

³Salvation comes from me.

⁴It cannot come from anywhere else.

⁵Then spend a few minutes, with your eyes closed, reviewing some of the external things in which you have sought salvation in the past—people, possessions, various situations and events, and self-images you tried to make real. ^III

⁶Acknowledge that salvation was never found in any of these.

⁷Then say to yourself:

⁸My salvation cannot come from any of these things.

⁹My salvation comes from me, and only from me.

7. Now we will once again try to reach the light in you, where your salvation truly is.

²You cannot find it in the clouds that surround the light, and you must realize that you have been searching for it in those clouds.

³Your salvation is not there.

⁴It lies beyond the clouds, in the light that shines behind them.

⁵Remember, you must pass through the clouds before you can reach the light.

⁶But also remember that you have never found anything lasting or desirable in the cloud formations you imagined. ^IV

8. Since all illusions of salvation have failed you, surely you do not want to keep searching for meaningless idols in the clouds, when you could so easily reach the light of true salvation.

²Try to pass through the clouds by whatever means appeals to you.

³If it helps, think of me as taking your hand and guiding you.

⁴And I assure you, this will not be a mere illusion. ^V

9. During the shorter and more frequent practice periods today, remind yourself that salvation comes from you, and that nothing but your own thoughts can hinder your progress.

²You are free from all external interference.

³You are in charge of your salvation.

⁴You are in charge of the salvation of the world.

⁵Then say:

⁶Salvation comes from me.

⁷Nothing outside of me can hold me back.

⁸Within me is the salvation of the world and of my own.

---

^I All the ideas in this Workbook are important, but no words can do justice to the importance of today’s Lesson.

Your entire world is in your mind, because nothing exists outside it. Everything that seems to exist in that world is there because you have placed it there, for no will operates in your mind but your own. Nothing external can affect you, because nothing is external to you. If you now believe this is not true—that you are a body doomed to die, living a brief life marked by limitation and helplessness—it is because you have also placed that idea in your mind. That is precisely your ego—that way of thinking. Your ego is not someone who believes this; your ego is the belief that this is so.

Your life, at its core, is nothing but a story you tell yourself. When someone asks you, “How are you?” and you answer, “I’m very happy!” or “I’m miserable,” you are merely expressing an opinion. Your condition of being happy or unhappy is something you yourself establish, and it will depend on the standard of evaluation you have chosen at that moment. Yet you will insist again and again that this condition is an “objective” fact—but could there be anything more subjective?

The first line of this Lesson is crucial. The basic temptation is to think that you are not responsible for your life and therefore to blame something external. When you feel tempted by something you find morally objectionable, realize that the moral standard that condemns it is one you have created, the desire to uphold it is also yours, and—though it may be hard to accept—the perception of that event is likewise of your own making. You simply take no responsibility for the contents of your consciousness and call “temptation” the relationship between something you label as “external” and impulses you claim come from a dark “subconscious.” Of course, that is one way of telling the story—but it is merely the way you have chosen.

To think of yourself as a helpless being subject to the whims of life is a choice. Jesus now invites you to consider another, entirely opposite one. This Course presents the dilemma very clearly. You now know you can choose between two very different ways of seeing yourself. The first, which you know all too well, is that proposed by the ego and the world. The other is what Jesus or the Holy Spirit offers you. Each will lead you along very different paths through the dream, toward vastly different goals. The ego’s proposal leads you in agony toward death; Jesus urges you to choose better and to recognize your power to shape your reality. That power is absolute because it is the Power of God within you—His Gift. Use it well and do not waste it on dreams of fear.

The entire strategy of the ego in your mind is based on convincing you that you are not responsible for your mental states, making you believe that the cause of your suffering lies in something external, when in truth you are the one who has placed it there. Its aim is to diminish you, to weaken you, and to plunge you into helplessness by projecting its own fragility onto you.

^II You are the Son of God, created perfect by your loving Father—free and capable of creating as He creates. In your freedom, you can extend Love infinitely, for that is your very condition. You can do this, and indeed you do, in eternity, for that is your will, identical to your Father’s. But you cannot create the impossible, because the impossible does not exist.

Nevertheless, if that is your desire, you can also “create” the impossible—but in that case such “creation” is not real; it is real only to you, and you then call it “belief.” You can believe in the illusions you yourself have made, and thus you conceive them as absences expressing your longing to regain your true condition. That is why the illusions you seem to perceive on the imaginary screen of your consciousness are inversions of the values you already enjoy in Heaven.

^III These “self-conceptions” are roles you have deemed desirable—being a good mother, an excellent professional, a loyal friend, more intelligent, wealthier, more compassionate, or any other appealing idea you may hold of yourself. It has always been your ego that desired all those things. You, as the Son of God, are infinitely beyond any possibility of “improvement.” Remember—you were created perfect. Your salvation lies precisely in remembering that.

^IV While the clouds of yesterday’s Lesson were composed of your resentments, today’s clouds consist of “…the things outside you in which you have sought salvation in the past” (6:5).

^V Believe Jesus in this. It is impossible that He could be deceiving you. He is here to guide you—that is His function. If you wish, you may travel the path thinking you walk alone, but you do not. Jesus accompanies you at every moment. He speaks to you, counsels you, and comforts you without ceasing. If you do not hear Him, it is because you are not paying attention, and deep down you still trust more in your own judgment. The journey would be far easier if you became aware that Jesus walks beside you.

He is not some imaginary friend nor the voice of a deranged mind. He is your elder brother who loves you, walks with you, and guides you toward your happiness—which is also His. Try it. Give Him a chance to be included in your awareness. He will not disappoint you. It is the best way you can use your mind.

Do not regard forming a personal relationship with Jesus as something strange or different from establishing any other relationship; it is exactly the same—a matter of will, trust, and purpose. And be sensible: use that relationship for its own purpose, not yours. In truth, they are the same—but you are not yet fully convinced of it, for you are still almost blind.

My grievances hide the light of the world in me.

1. No one can see what your grievances conceal. ^I

²Because your grievances are hiding the light of the world in you, your brother dwells in darkness, and so do you beside him.

³Yet when the veil of your grievances is lifted, you are freed along with him.

⁴Now share your salvation with him who stood beside you when you were in hell.

⁵He is your brother in the light of the world that saves you both. ^II

2. Today we will make another genuine attempt to reach the light within you. ^III

²Before we undertake this in our longer practice period, let us spend a few minutes reflecting on what it is we are trying to do.

³We are literally trying to reach the salvation of the world.

⁴We are attempting to see beyond the veil of darkness that hides it.

⁵We are trying to let the veil be lifted, and see the tears of the Son of God vanish in the sunlight.

3. Let us begin our longer practice period today fully aware that this is so, and with firm determination, let us try to reach what is more valuable to us than anything else.

²Salvation is our only need.

³There is no other purpose in this world, and no other function to fulfill.

⁴Learning salvation is our only goal.

⁵Let us bring the ancient search to an end today, by discovering the light in us and showing it, so that all who seek along with us may see it and rejoice.^IV

4. Now, very quietly and with eyes closed, try to release everything that usually occupies your awareness.

²Picture your mind as a vast sphere wrapped in a layer of thick, dark clouds.

³You can only see the clouds, because you seem to stand outside the sphere and at some distance from it.

⁴From where you are, there is no reason to believe a brilliant light lies hidden behind the clouds.

⁵The clouds appear to be the only reality.

⁶They seem to be all there is.

⁷This is why you do not try to go through them and beyond them, which is the only way you could truly realize their insubstantial nature.

⁸That is what we will try to do today. ^V

5. After reflecting on how important what you are trying to do is—for yourself and for the world—remain in perfect stillness, remembering only how much you want to reach the light in you today, right now.

²Resolve to go beyond those clouds.

³In your mind, reach out and touch them.

⁴Then brush them aside with your hand, and feel them lightly as they pass across your cheeks, your forehead, and your closed eyelids as you go through them.

⁵Keep moving; the clouds cannot stop you.

6. If you are doing the exercises correctly, you will begin to have a sense of being lifted up and carried forward.

²That tiny effort, and your small determination, call on the power of the universe to help you, and God Himself will lift you from darkness into light.

³You are acting in perfect accord with His Will.

⁴You cannot fail, because your will is His.

7. Trust your Father today, and be certain He has heard you and has answered you.

²You may not yet recognize His answer, but you can be sure it has been given, and that you will receive it.

³Try to hold this confidence in your mind as you attempt to pass through the clouds and reach the light.

⁴Try to remember that at last you are joining your will to the Will of God.

⁵Keep clearly in mind the thought that anything you undertake with God must succeed.

⁶Then allow the Power of God to work in you and through you, so that His Will and yours may be done. ^VI

8. In the shorter practice periods, which you will want to do as often as possible given the importance of today’s idea for you and your happiness, remember that your grievances are hiding the light of the world from your awareness. ^VII

²Remind yourself also that you are not searching alone, and that you know where to look.

³Then say:

⁴My grievances hide the light of the world in me.

⁵I cannot see what I have hidden.

⁶Yet for my salvation,

and the salvation of the world,

I want it to be revealed to me.

⁷And if you are tempted today to hold a grievance against anyone, be sure to tell yourself silently:

⁸If I hold this grievance, I will not be able to see the light of the world.

---

^I It is possible that this statement may not make much sense to you, because you may not yet understand how your resentments could conceal anything. You usually think they simply reflect the anger you feel for some grievance. But here Jesus is speaking of realities, not appearances. Remember: only love is real. Anger—or fear—is nothing but the absence of love, and what is absent has no real existence.

The ego will never understand this, for it deals only with absences—with what is not there. That is why this Course is so difficult for it: it speaks a language it cannot comprehend. You, however—Son of God—can understand it. Though the principles of this Course may seem inspiring to you, they can also appear incomprehensible or even unacceptable. Yet such judgments do not come from your true mind, but from the part of your holy mind still under the ego’s domain. And it is precisely that part this Course seeks to heal and reclaim.

A resentful mind cannot express love—the light of the world within you—because it is trapped in the idea of having been attacked or wronged in the past. But all of that is only an illusion, the result of a mistaken self-perception based on the smallness and vulnerability with which the ego deceives you. The foundations of those judgments are false, but if you believe in them, you will make them real for yourself.

Fortunately, you can always turn to your heart as your guide. If you feel bad, it is because what you are thinking is not true, and your resentments are unjustified. If you persist in deceiving yourself and continue to cause yourself moral suffering, it is because your ego has learned to interpret that pain as pleasure. Remember: the ego sees everything upside down. That is how confused and insane it is.

^II Remember what you learned in Lesson 19: “I am not alone in experiencing the effects of my thoughts.” Your resentments affect not only you; they also cast a shadow upon others, perpetuating the illusion of separation.

The opposite is equally true. To verify this, practice the following technique:

1) Block the judgment you are directing against your brother.

2) Invoke the idea of peace in your mind.

3) Look for that peace in your brother, the same peace you are claiming for yourself.

4) Look carefully and you will see it. It is there because you have placed it there.

5) Celebrate the peace you have found in your brother and thank him silently.

This technique, if done wholeheartedly, always works, because your will always fulfills itself. If you do it well, the entire process takes only a few seconds. If it takes you longer, ask yourself what it is you truly want to give yourself.

^III W-41.4:3: “Today we will make our first real attempt to go beyond this heavy cloud of darkness, and to pass through it into the light beyond.” After this first guided meditation exercise in Lesson 41, similar practices follow in Lessons 44, 45, 47, and 49.

^IV In fact, the exercise you are about to do is a kind of prayer: you are going to ask to see the light of the world within you—the love that you are. That is why Jesus now urges you to do it wholeheartedly, for that is the only way prayers succeed. Remember that whatever you ask in prayer is always granted, and that is so not because someone up above is watching you and deciding whether to give you something or not; in truth, everything is granted by you, to yourself.

If you do not grant yourself something, it is because you do not truly want it. Be very honest about this and see that it is so. If you ask for things you do not truly want, you are simply exhausting yourself—you are asking for despair, and that is what you will receive. Again, be honest: if realizing your true identity is not more valuable to you than anything else you think you perceive in the world, you are not ready for this. But do not worry or blame yourself for that; you are simply asking for more time, and that is what you will receive. Remember that life is perfect, and your will is always done.

^V Here Jesus suggests that you visualize your mind as a planet completely covered by dense clouds, floating above you. He also tells you that although you cannot see it, beyond the clouds you perceive from outer space there is on that planet—your mind—a bright light: the light of the world. That light is more truly your own identity than anything else you could think about yourself.

The only planet in the solar system that fits that description—a planet covered with dense clouds—is Venus. And, fittingly, Venus is known as “the morning star,” for it appears shining above the horizon at the dawn of a new day.

^VI Matthew 6:10: “Thy Kingdom come. Thy will be done, on earth as it is in Heaven.” Here Jesus tells us that “… His Will and yours be done,” for your will perfectly coincides with the Will of God. The perceived world, too, is the result of a will, as it could not be otherwise—for even within the realm of illusion there can be no effects without a cause. The difference is that the will manifested there is the will of the ego.

^VII These brief practices will be of great help to you, and they are profoundly healing—especially those you do in response to specific flashes of anger that arise throughout the day. All of this is part of the mental training that is purifying your mind and that will eventually enable you to work miracles.

Changing your mental habits and acquiring new ones usually involves a long process that requires multiple repetitions, until the new habits become automatic and the new way of perceiving is the first thing that comes to mind when something contradicts your expectations. Be patient and persevere.

Love holds no grievances.^I

1. You, who were created by Love in Its Own likeness, cannot hold grievances and know your Self.

²To hold a grievance is to forget who you are. ^II

³To hold a grievance is to see yourself as a body.

⁴It is the decision to let the ego rule your mind and to condemn the body to death.

⁵You may not yet realize what holding grievances does to your mind.

⁶It seems to separate you from your Source and makes you different from Him.

⁷It leads you to believe that God is like what you think you have become, for no one can conceive of his Creator as different from himself.

2. Disconnected from your own Self, which remains aware of its likeness to its Creator, your Self seems to sleep, while the part of your mind that weaves illusions in its dreaming appears to be awake.

²Can all of this arise simply from holding grievances?

³Indeed it can.

⁴For one who holds grievances denies that he was created by Love, and in his dream of hate, his Creator becomes fearful to him.

⁵Who can dream of hate and not be afraid of God?

3. It is as certain that those who hold grievances will redefine God in their own image as it is that God created them like Himself and defined them as part of Him. ^III

²It is just as sure that those who hold grievances will feel guilty as it is that those who forgive will find peace.

³And it is equally certain that those who hold grievances will forget who they are, just as those who forgive will remember.

4. Would you not be willing to let your grievances go if you believed all of this to be true?

²Perhaps you think you cannot give up all your grievances.

³Yet that is simply a matter of motivation. ^IV

⁴Today we will try to discover how you would feel without them.

⁵If you succeed, even just a little, you will never again find motivation lacking.

5. Begin the longer practice period today by searching your mind for those against whom you hold strong grievances.

²Some will be easy to identify.

³Then think of the seemingly minor grievances you hold against those you like and even those you think you love.

⁴Very soon, you will see that there is no one against whom you do not hold some form of grievance.

⁵This is what has made you see yourself as alone in all the universe.

6. Now resolve to see all these people as friends.

²Say to them all together—thinking of each one individually as you do:

³I would see you as my friend, that I may remember you are part of me, and come to know myself.

⁴Spend the rest of the practice period trying to picture yourself at peace with everyone and everything, safe in a world that protects you, loves you, and that you love in return.

⁵Try to feel safety surrounding you, enfolding you, and holding you up.

⁶Try to believe, even for a moment, that nothing can harm you in any way.

⁷At the end of the session, say to yourself:

⁸Love holds no grievances.

⁹When I let all my grievances go, I will know I am perfectly safe.

7. The shorter practice periods should include a quick application of today’s idea in the following form, and also whenever any kind of grievance arises against anyone, whether physically present or not:

²Love holds no grievances.

³Let me not betray my Self.

⁴Also, repeat the idea several times each hour in this form:

⁵Love holds no grievances.

⁶I want to know my Self. Therefore, I will let all grievances go, so that He may awaken in my awareness.

---

^I Today’s Lesson is the counterpart to the previous one, in which we explored our holiness and what we are naturally meant to feel. Today’s, by contrast, confronts us with the opposite: the apparent vulnerability of the character with whom we have mistakenly identified. While the previous Lesson invited us to celebrate by affirming our true Self, today’s teaches us to discern and reject the voice of the ego in our mind.

^II Today’s Lesson revolves around resentments, so it is important to understand clearly what this concept means.

From an etymological point of view, the term resentment means “that which makes me feel again”—that is, it is the remembrance of something that occurred in the past, reappearing in consciousness. A resentment is the persistent feeling of displeasure or anger toward someone or something believed to be the cause of an offense or harm; it is the emotion felt in the present in response to the memory of a perceived attack from the past.

The crucial question to ask is: who or what suffered that attack? For resentment is only possible if that which suffered the perceived attack can in fact be diminished. In truth, a resentment implicitly involves a recognition and definition of oneself as fragile and vulnerable—and that is precisely the idea the ego holds of you. Whenever you harbor resentment, you are affirming that you subscribe to the ego’s concept of yourself and that you are willing to defend it, even if that means losing your peace of mind, suffering, and falling into conflict with your brothers and with the world.

It is essential that you realize something: thinking that you are vulnerable and can suffer from others’ attacks is not a fact—it is an opinion. If holding that opinion carries such serious consequences, and you must pay such a high price for it, it is crucial that you first have absolute certainty that it is true, for otherwise you are paying with your happiness for something that is only an illusion.

Notice how unjust you are in your assessments. You subject the premises of this Course to fierce scrutiny, and your mind carefully analyzes every possibility that you are being deceived by a false proposition—which is perfectly understandable. Yet you accept, with astonishing naïveté and without the slightest caution, the first foolish notion the ego places in your mind. That, in itself, is disastrous recklessness. But given that it is evident the ego has deceived you completely in the past, offering you falsehoods and poisoning your life with its lies, the fact that you still listen to it is the greatest of follies. Don’t you see it?

At the beginning of this Workbook you were told that you do not have to believe the ideas presented here, nor even accept them gladly; you only have to practice what is proposed and see impartially whether they are true or not (W-In.6–7). Read this Lesson attentively and realize that harboring resentments serves no purpose but to sicken your mind, separate you from your brothers, and deprive you of the happiness you deserve. And if, seeing all this clearly, you still find it hard to let go of your resentments, understand that this is because, in truth, you hate yourself and wish to punish yourself, using your brothers and the world as instruments to do so. The Text explains well the reason for this delusion. Do not worry—it will pass. The best thing you can do now is to practice today’s Lesson wholeheartedly.

^III Genesis 1:26: “Then God said, ‘Let Us make man in Our image, after Our likeness.’”

Resentment not only separates you from your brothers but also from yourself. Each time you harbor a resentment, you are reinforcing the illusion that you are a separate, vulnerable, and limited being. This illusion not only causes suffering but also prevents you from remembering your true identity as the Son of God, created in the image and likeness of Love.

Today’s practice invites you to release these resentments and to see everyone as friends. In doing so, you are not only healing your relationships but also healing your mind. Each time you choose to forgive, you are remembering that there is no separation between you and your brothers, and that all of you are part of the same unity in God.

Remember that forgiveness is not an act of condescension toward others but a gift you give yourself. In forgiving, you free yourself from the chains of the past and open your heart to the peace and happiness that are your natural inheritance.

^IV You may find it difficult to understand, accept, and assume that all the suffering you experience is voluntary—that is, that you have freely given it to yourself because you believe you deserve it. Yet that is the painful “truth” of this world of illusions.

The good news is that, since you are the only one responsible for your mental states, in the same way and with the same ease with which you have given yourself that which harms and causes you suffering, you can also forgive it and free yourself from it in an instant. It all comes down to motivation, to an act of will.

Jesus poses to us a fundamental question: “My brother, what do you want?” and constantly reminds us: “My brother, join your will with Mine and desire what I desire.”

Love created me like Itself.

1. Today’s idea is a complete and accurate statement of what you are.

²That is why you are the light of the world.

³That is why God has appointed you the savior of the world.

⁴That is why the Son of God depends on you for his salvation.

⁵He is saved because of what you are.

⁶Today we will strive to reach this truth about you, and to recognize fully—even if only for an instant—that it is indeed true.

2. In the longer practice session, we will reflect on your reality, and on its completely unaltered and unalterable nature. ^I

²We will begin by repeating this truth about you, and then spend a few minutes adding some related thoughts, such as:

³Holiness created me holy.

⁴Kindness created me kind.

⁵Service created me helpful.

⁶Perfection created me perfect.

⁷Any attribute that aligns with God’s definition of Himself is appropriate to you.

⁸Today we are attempting to undo your definition of God and replace it with His Own.

⁹We are also emphasizing that you are included in His definition of Himself.

3. After reviewing several related thoughts, try to let all of them fall away for a moment, and attempt to go beyond every concept and image you have ever held of yourself, to reach the truth within you. ^II

²If Love created you like Its Own Being, then that Being must be within you.

³And that Being is somewhere in your mind, waiting to be found. ^III

4. You may need to repeat today’s idea from time to time to replace distracting thoughts.

²It may also be necessary to continue adding more attributes that reflect the truth about you.

³But perhaps you will succeed in going beyond all of this, and in a moment when your mind is empty of thought, you will become aware of a radiant light in which you recognize yourself as Love created you.

⁴Trust that you are doing much today to bring that awareness nearer, whether you feel you succeeded or not. ^IV

5. It will be especially helpful today to practice the idea as often as possible.

²You need to hear the truth about yourself as frequently as you can, because your mind is deeply absorbed in false images of yourself.

³It would be very beneficial to repeat to yourself four or five times an hour—perhaps even more often—that “Love created me like Itself”.

⁴Understand that this is where the truth about you truly lies.

6. In the shorter practice periods, try to realize that it is not your small and solitary voice that speaks these words.

²It is the Voice of God, reminding you of your Father and your Self.

³It is the Voice of Truth, replacing everything the ego tells you about yourself with the simple truth about the Son of God.

⁴Love created you like Itself.

---

^I Today’s Lesson employs the technique of evocation, which consists of invoking an idea and focusing the mind upon it.

In the Glossary, the mind is described as the “active principle or agent of spirit,” that is, the potential of spirit to manifest ideas. Put simply, we could say that the mind is an “instrument” that generates reality, operating by becoming that which it evokes through invocation. The mind “produces” reality through will, and it does so by itself and for itself, for nothing else exists.

This Lesson invites you to evoke an idea that reflects various attributes of God, since these coincide perfectly with those of your Self, because your Father created you in His image and likeness. This process allows your individual mind to become familiar with the qualities of your true Self, facilitating remembrance of Him and, ultimately, the direct experience of Him.

^II In the first part of the exercise, we have defined ourselves through qualities that reflect the reality of God and of our true Self. To do so, we may recall memories or imagine situations in which we see ourselves manifesting those exalted qualities, allowing ourselves to visualize our holiness as we help others, or in whatever form may arise in our minds.

Now, in the second part of the exercise, we set aside those concrete images that have enabled us to experience beneficial emotional states and turn our attention, not to the effects of holiness, but to its Source: your Self.

The purpose of this mental exercise is to recognize that those sublime qualities do not originate from your personal mind, but from your true essence. In other words, you are using the “acts” of kindness performed by your character as a bridge to connect with the origin of all goodness.

^III It is impossible to express in words the crucial importance of the experience described in these lines, which has been mentioned in passing before. This entire Course, all its teachings and practices, have but one purpose—to lead to this experience. Once you have reached it, you will no longer need to study this Course at all, nor to submit to any rule of behavior. Your time in this world will be almost over. You will have seen what you truly are; you will know God. This is the ultimate mystical experience; the ego will no longer even be a memory. You will now know with certainty—you will know—that you are not a human being, that you never were; you are the Love of God.

As stated in G-1.2:5–6: “A universal theology is impossible, but a universal experience is not only possible, it is necessary. The goal of this Course is to attain this experience.”

This experience is not something you can attain through mental effort or accumulation of knowledge. It is a gift granted when your mind is quiet and open enough to receive the truth. It is not a personal achievement, but a surrender to what has always been true.

^IV Do not worry if you do not succeed today. You have all the time in the world—literally. The only meaning of all the countless “lives,” of all consciousness, is to reach this. It is the end of dreams, of time, of space, and of all experience. It is the end of perception and the return to knowledge. It is the return Home.

Remember that this process is not linear, nor does it depend on time. Each moment of practice, each instant in which you choose to remember the truth, brings you closer to this experience. It does not matter how many times you become distracted or feel distant from truth; what matters is that you keep returning to it.

In today’s practice, it is essential to remember that you are not seeking something outside yourself. The truth already resides in your mind, and your function is simply to clear away the obstacles that prevent you from recognizing it. Each time you repeat today’s idea—Love created me like Itself—you are remembering your true nature and undoing the false images the ego has constructed about you.

Do not be discouraged if, at first, it seems difficult or if you do not feel an immediate connection with the truth. Steady practice and the willingness to release your preconceived concepts are key. Trust that, in time, your mind will become more receptive to the light of truth, and that transformative experience will come.

My happiness and my function are one.

1. Surely you have noticed the emphasis placed throughout our recent lessons on the relationship between fulfilling your function and attaining happiness.

²This is because you still do not truly see that relationship.

³Yet between these two ideas there is more than just a connection—they are the same.

⁴Their form is different, but their content is exactly the same.

2. The ego wages a constant battle with the Holy Spirit over the fundamental question of what your function is.

²And also over what your happiness is.

³It is not a two-sided battle.

⁴The ego attacks, but the Holy Spirit does not respond.

⁵He knows what your function is.

⁶He knows that your function is your happiness.

3. Today we will try to go beyond this entirely senseless conflict and reach the truth about your function.

²We will not engage in endless arguments about what it is.

³We will not desperately attempt to define happiness or determine the means to attain it. ^I

⁴We will not indulge the ego by listening to its attacks on truth.

⁵We will simply rejoice that we can discover what the truth is.

4. The goal of today’s longer practice period is to accept the fact that not only is there a very real connection between the function God gave you and your happiness—they are actually identical.

²God gives only happiness.

³Therefore, the function He gave you must be happiness, even if it appears to take a different form.

⁴Today’s exercises are an attempt to go beyond these apparent differences and recognize the shared content that is truly the same.

5. Begin the session by reflecting for ten to fifteen minutes on the following thoughts:

²God gives me only happiness.

³He has given me my function.

⁴Therefore, my function must be happiness.

⁵Try to see the logic of this sequence, even if you do not yet fully accept the conclusion. ^II

⁶The conclusion can only be false if the first two statements are incorrect.

⁷So let us consider the premises for a while.

6. The first premise is that God gives you only happiness.

²This could be false, of course, but in order for it to be false you would have to define God as something He is not.

³Love cannot give evil, and what is not happiness is evil.

⁴God cannot give what He does not have, nor have what He is not.

⁵If God does not give only happiness, He must be evil.

⁶And if you do not accept that God gives you only happiness, it is because you believe He must be evil.

7. The second premise is that God has given you your function.

²We have seen that your mind has only two parts.

³One is ruled by the ego and made up of illusions.

⁴The other is the home of the Holy Spirit and the dwelling place of truth.

⁵You can choose only between these two guides.

⁶And your choice yields only two possible results: the fear the ego always brings, and the Love the Holy Spirit always offers in its place.

8. Thus, either God established your function through His Voice, or it was set by the ego you made to replace God.

²Which of these alternatives is true?

³If your function was not given by God, then it must be a gift from the ego.

⁴But what can the ego really give you, when it is itself only an illusion and offers nothing but the illusion of gifts? ^III

9. Reflect on this during today’s longer practice.

²Also reflect on the many forms the illusion of your function has taken in your mind, and on the many ways you have tried to find salvation by following the ego’s guidance. ^IV

³Did you find it?

⁴Were you happy?

⁵Did it bring you peace?

⁶Today we must be very honest. ^V

⁷Recall the results with even-mindedness, and also consider whether it was ever reasonable to expect happiness from anything the ego has ever proposed.

⁸Yet the ego is your only alternative to the Voice of the Holy Spirit.

10. You will hear madness, or you will hear truth.

²Try to make this choice by considering the premises on which our conclusion rests.

³We may not agree on anything else, but we can agree on this conclusion.^VI

⁴For God Himself shares it with us.

11. Today’s idea is another giant step in learning to perceive what is the same as the same, and what is different as different.

²On one side stand all illusions.

³On the other, all truth.

⁴Let us try today to understand that only truth is true.

12. In the shorter practice periods, which will be especially helpful today if done twice an hour, it is suggested that you apply the idea in this form:

²My happiness and my function are one, because God has given both to me.

³It will take no more than a minute—probably even less—to say these words slowly and think about them a little as you do.

---

^I Happiness is a real concept and, as such, it cannot be defined—that is, it cannot be limited by words. Happiness, like peace, is the condition of Being. Nevertheless, it may be helpful to describe the human resonance of true happiness, which, stated very simply, is characterized by joy in the heart, peace in the mind, and the absolute certainty that this condition is permanent. In this world, everything you do from this state of mind will be right, because you will be fulfilling your function correctly.

Jesus invites us to feel joyous and to share our joy with others; to live in peace and reflect that peace in our relationships; to free ourselves from fear by recognizing that we are safe and protected from all harm, and to transmit that sense of safety to our brothers, healing them by dispelling their fear and guilt.

And all of this—to what extent? As far as it is possible for us. Remember: it is not in your hands to decide how far you will go, but it is in your hands to decide where you are heading.

^II It is evident how much importance this Course gives to rational thought and logic. As stated in T-14.I.1:4: “The Holy Spirit uses logic as easily and as well as the ego, except that His conclusions are not insane.” Jesus often uses syllogisms, a form of deductive reasoning derived from Greek logic, consisting of two propositions as premises and another as a conclusion, the latter being a necessarily deductive inference from the former two. Perhaps the most notable aspect of this kind of reasoning is that its conclusions are binding—that is, they require a certain behavior derived from them. To accept the premises, to assume the conclusion as true, and not to act accordingly constitutes a rupture with rational thought, a form of madness, and most likely, an incursion into magical thinking, which is irrational.

All the reasoning that follows aims to convince the mind that consistent forgiveness is the best way to act in every circumstance, and the only one that guarantees happiness. It is no longer merely a matter of following a divine commandment or a counsel from Jesus; here we are shown that we must fulfill the function the Holy Spirit has assigned to us because it is the only thing that will provide what we truly want: happiness.

^III Perhaps you are still not fully convinced that the ego’s gifts are nothing but “illusions of gifts,” something without real value. To begin, notice carefully why Jesus uses the term illusion. Realize that it comes from the Latin verb illúdere, which means “to mock” or “to make fun of.” The ego “plays” with you when it offers its “gifts,” because lúdere means “to play,” and illúdere means “to play against”—that is, to mock. The ego deceives you and is laughing at you.

To see the trick the ego uses to deceive you, you can follow a chain of “for what purpose”. When you think something in this world will make you happy, ask yourself what you want it for, and you will probably answer that you want it because it will bring you something else that is also desirable. Then ask again what you want that for, and you will begin to uncover a whole sequence of motives that were not very obvious at first. If you carry out this process flawlessly, the final for what purpose is always to be happy. Also realize that, in fact, the intermediate elements of that sequence are only the rungs of a ladder you think will take you to future happiness. Nothing could be further from the truth. You spend your life building a ladder to nowhere.

Happiness is a real concept, and as such, it exists only in real time, and the only real aspect of time is the present. If you are not happy in the present, you never will be. Fulfilling the function God has given you does make you happy in the present, and fulfilling it perfectly requires nothing external to the function itself; it is something whole, complete, and existing in the present. However, what the ego promises you always lies in the future—that is, never—because the future does not exist. There has never been anything but the present.

^IV Just as the salvation offered by the Holy Spirit is one, absolute, and definitive, the ego offers you an endless number of partial “salvations” to the many problems and deficiencies you perceive when your mind interprets reality under its guidance.

^V You must always be very honest. Deceiving yourself is the greatest of follies. But today it is especially important that you consider what is being said with great attention and be particularly honest in your response, because what you tell yourself will have important consequences… unless, even knowing the truth, you decide to continue wasting your life. If so, do not worry too much; it only means that you have not yet reached the level of pain that will drive you to change. It is only a matter of time—but remember, this Course is meant to save time, that is, to save you suffering. The decision for true salvation is inevitable.

^VI Because there is no other. Remember that there are only two voices: the ego’s and the Holy Spirit’s. If you think there is a third one, and that this other voice is your own judgment, realize that you are deceiving yourself—that is the ego. The ego, the Holy Spirit, and “you” do not coexist. No! In your mind there are only the ego and the Holy Spirit—and the ego is an illusion.

The ego offers you a false sense of control and autonomy, but in reality, it only keeps you trapped in an endless cycle of desires and fears. Every time you follow its dictates, you are renouncing your true power and happiness. By contrast, when you choose to listen to the Voice of the Holy Spirit, you are choosing the peace and clarity that arise from recognizing your true identity as the Son of God.

Happiness is not something to be sought in the future or in external circumstances. It is a natural state that arises when you align your mind with truth and fulfill the function God has given you. In forgiving, you are freeing yourself from the chains of the ego and opening your heart to the joy that has always been present within you.

So today, become aware of the illusions that have distracted you and choose to return to the truth. There is nothing to fear, for happiness and your function are one and the same, and both are a gift from God. By accepting this, you are taking a decisive step toward the peace and fulfillment that are your inheritance.

My only function is the one God gave me.^I

1. Today’s idea reaffirms your commitment to salvation.

²It also reminds you that you have no other function but this.

³Clearly, both thoughts are necessary in order to reach a wholehearted commitment.

⁴Yet salvation cannot be your only goal while you still assign value to others. ^II

⁵Fully accepting salvation as your one and only function necessarily involves two phases.

⁶The first is the recognition that your function is salvation.

⁷The second is the relinquishment of all other goals you have invented for yourself. ^III

2. Only thus can you take your rightful place among the Saviors of the world.

²Only thus can you truly say, “My only function is the one God gave me.”

³And only thus will you find peace of mind.

3. Today, and during the coming days, set aside ten to fifteen minutes for a longer practice period in which you will try to understand and accept what today’s idea really means.

²This idea offers you an escape from all the difficulties you perceive.

³It places in your hands the key to the door of peace, which you yourself have closed.

⁴And it is the answer to all the seeking you have undertaken since the beginning of time.

4. If possible, try to do the longer practice sessions at approximately the same time each day.

²Also try to decide in advance when that time will be, and to adhere to it as best you can.

³The purpose of doing this is to organize your day in a way that sets aside time for God, just as you do for all the trivial goals and pursuits you will follow.

⁴This is part of the long-range training your mind needs so that the Holy Spirit can use it consistently in accordance with the purpose He shares with you. ^IV

5. Begin this longer practice by reviewing today’s idea.

²Then close your eyes, repeat the idea silently once more, and carefully examine your mind for any thoughts that arise.

³At first, do not try to focus only on thoughts related to today’s idea.

⁴Rather, try to notice any thought that comes up and interferes with it.

⁵Observe each one as it appears, without engaging with it or becoming concerned, and then dismiss it by saying:

⁶This thought reflects a goal that is blocking me from accepting my only function.

6. As time goes on, the interfering thoughts will become harder to find.

²Nevertheless, spend another minute trying to uncover a few of the idle thoughts that may have previously slipped by unnoticed, but do not strain or become anxious.

³Then say to yourself:

⁴Let my true function be written upon this clean slate.

⁵You do not need to use these exact words, but try to reach a state of willingness in which your illusory goals can be replaced by the truth.

7. Finally, repeat today’s idea once more and devote the remainder of the practice to quietly reflecting on how important this is to you.

²Think of the relief you will feel when you accept it, for it will resolve your conflicts once and for all.

³And also realize how deeply you truly want salvation, despite the foolish ideas you may still hold to the contrary.

8. In the shorter practice periods, which should be done at least once every hour, use this form in applying today’s idea:

²My only function is the one God gave me.

³I want no other and I have no other.

⁴At times, close your eyes as you practice, and at others, keep them open and look around you.

⁵What you now see will change entirely when you wholeheartedly accept today’s idea.

---

^I The identity of something is its meaning, and the meaning of something is its function; therefore, the identity of anything is its function. Identity is the same as function.

Your function, then, is to be what you are—to exercise your identity. Your function is to realize and live fully the Love, the Truth, and the Power (the three aspects of Being) with which you came into existence when God created you.

^II If you attempt to be something other than what you truly are, you will be completely lost in that peripheral self that is your ego. You will “malfunction,” and your heart—that infallible guide of your mind—will let you know it.

Your function in this world is salvation, which, in reality, is nothing more than recovering your true function: to create in eternity as your Father creates. Thus, we can interpret salvation as a “transitory” function, one that is understandable only in illusory terms. You, Son of God, have no need to be saved from anything, for God created you eternally perfect. But you, ego, are certainly in great need of being saved from that which never happened, but which you believe in within your dream of separation. Realize that this Lesson speaks of the function of the character, of the egoic mind—the one who is doing this Course.

That little self knows and manages only illusions, so what else can you speak to it of but illusions? Salvation, or Atonement, is the benevolent illusion through which the individual mind awakens to its true identity.

Therefore, save yourself by being in this world who you truly are: the Love, the Truth, and the Power of God’s Peace, for that is your happiness.

^III The idea for today has a dynamic perfectly opposite to that of the preceding Lessons. It is a Lesson in taking away, not in adding.

Imagine your mind as an untended garden to which you have invited a gardener—Jesus—to make it orderly and beautiful. Now look at what that gardener has done. In Lessons 61, 62, and 63, He planted some seeds that, in time, will become a beautiful plant bearing wonderful fruit—the fruits of your forgiveness. In yesterday’s Lesson, number 64, the gardener devoted Himself to tending the plant and watering it.

Today’s Lesson, however, is very different. The gardener knows that it is now necessary to remove all the weeds growing wild in the neglected garden. The thing is, this gardener cannot perform that task; He can only plant seeds. He cannot remove anything from the garden, because it is you who planted those things—you who are the lord, master, and owner of the garden. He cannot take away anything that you have put there.

It is quite likely that you will deny having planted those aberrant things yourself. Perhaps you will say that others planted them, or that the wind brought them. But that is not true. Only you hold the key to your garden; no one can do anything there without your permission. If you believe otherwise, you do not know yourself well. No one—not Jesus, not even God Himself—can alter your garden in the slightest. In fact, to say that Jesus has planted seeds in your garden or watered them is not exactly true. He has merely brought you the seeds and left them at the garden gate for you to plant, tend, and water. No one can enter your garden or touch anything there; it is strictly private.

Well, that is not exactly so either, because the fence around the garden is something you yourself have put up, and that is precisely what has made that little plot of an infinite landscape that stretches beyond the horizon a private, personal space. And to be even more precise, it must be said that the fence limiting your “property” is imaginary. In truth, that fence is more like a proclamation you made to the four winds, claiming that small space for yourself alone, and, of course, that had to be respected until you decided to revoke it. Such is your power.

Given this situation, in today’s Lesson the gardener tells you, quite sensibly, that unless you uproot those barren plants that have never borne fruit, your new crop will not prosper—it is impossible. The fertile soil of your garden cannot effectively nourish everything you have planted there. All the plants will compete for nourishment. So you will have to choose what to keep and what to remove. And remember, the process of uprooting belongs to you alone, for you have already declared to everyone that not even God may enter your garden.

This process of uprooting the weeds of your mental garden is essential for the seeds of forgiveness and peace to flourish. The weeds represent those thoughts of judgment, resentment, and fear that you have cultivated over time. Though they may seem deeply rooted and difficult to remove, you have the power to choose to release them.

Each time you uproot a weed, you make space for the light of love and truth to shine more brightly in your mind. This act of clearing is not a punishment but a liberation. By letting go of what does not serve you, you allow your garden to become a reflection of the beauty and harmony that have always been within you.

So today, become aware of the weeds that have grown in your garden. Acknowledge that you planted them, but also remember that you have the power to remove them. With each thought of forgiveness, you are pulling up one of those barren weeds and making room for the fruits of peace and happiness to grow in abundance.

The gardener—Jesus—is there to guide and support you, but the choice to clear your garden is yours. Trust that in doing so, you are fulfilling your function as the light of the world and contributing to the salvation of all.

[iv] The truth is that if your little garden is in chaos, it is because you have been lazy and irresponsible. First, you came up with the foolish idea of having a garden just for yourself, and then you did nothing about it. Your power is immense, your will always fulfills itself, but your decisions always carry consequences. If you plant a lemon tree, do not expect to harvest oranges. If you think that is possible, it is because you believe in magic and think you can cheat the sacred law of cause and effect.

The human being is not evil, but childish; he does not need to learn new things, but to mature; he need not seek great revelations, but rather stop drugging himself with childish fantasies. A happy life requires a sound mind—that is, a mind that is ordered and directed toward a single purpose, in which there are not multiple aspirations and opposing desires competing with one another, stressing and weakening it. That is why this Lesson is devoted to making you aware of your mental dispersion and the many interests that fragment your mind and disturb your heart.

The call to discipline may well intimidate you, but be honest—do you think it is possible to achieve anything without it? If you think so, you still believe in magic, and your childish mind harbors fantasies that some fairy godmother will fix the problems you yourself have created. Do not waste time—mature, get to work, choose well, and begin discarding what does not serve you.

If you are still afraid of making such radical changes in your way of thinking, do the following: tell yourself that you will do exactly what these Lessons say, precisely as instructed here, but only for a set period. Put all your will and all your strength into fulfilling what is asked of you scrupulously, and open your eyes wide. Look with absolute honesty at the effects this is having on your life, and then make a decision: continue with this path, now with more confidence and filled with faith; or throw this book away and look for something else; or carry on as before—but never stop halfway.

Remember that the process of bringing order to your mind and your life is not a punishment but a liberation. By clearing the clutter and focusing on what is essential, you are creating space for peace and clarity to blossom. It is not about renouncing everything you love, but about discerning what truly nourishes you and brings you closer to your purpose.

Discipline need not be synonymous with rigidity or suffering. It can be an act of love toward yourself, a way of honoring your potential and your capacity to create a meaningful life. Each time you choose to focus on what truly matters, you are taking a step toward maturity and fulfillment.

So, even if it may seem difficult at first, trust the process. The fruits of discipline and inner order are incomparable: a calm mind, a peaceful heart, and a life aligned with your true Being. Do not fear making radical decisions if necessary; sometimes that is the only path to genuine happiness.

Let me not forget my function.

1. Today’s idea is simply another way of saying: “Lead me not into temptation.” ^I

²The purpose of the world you see is to obscure your function of forgiveness and to offer you justification for forgetting it.

³It is the temptation to abandon God and His Son by adopting a physical appearance.

⁴This is what the body’s eyes behold. ^II

2. Nothing the body’s eyes seem to see can be anything but a form of temptation, for this was the body’s inherent purpose.

²Yet we have learned that the Holy Spirit has another use for all the illusions you have made, and therefore He sees another purpose in them.

³To the Holy Spirit, the world is a place where you learn to forgive yourself for what you think are your sins. ^III

⁴Under this new perception, the physical appearance of temptation becomes the spiritual recognition of salvation. ^IV

3. Our recent lessons have told you that your function here is to be the light of the world—a function God has given you.

²It is only the ego’s arrogance that leads you to question this, and only its fears that make you believe you are unworthy of the task God Himself has entrusted to you.

³The salvation of the world depends on your forgiveness, for that is how the Son of God escapes all illusions—and therefore, all temptation.

⁴And that Son of God is you. ^V

4. Only by fulfilling the function God gave you will you be happy.

²And this is because your function is to be happy, using the means that make happiness inevitable.

³There is no other way.

⁴Therefore, every time you choose whether or not to fulfill your function, you are really choosing whether or not to be happy. ^VI

5. Let us remember this today.

²Let us do so in the morning, at night, and throughout the day as well.

³Prepare yourself in advance for all the decisions you will make today by remembering that each one is really very simple.

⁴Each will lead to either happiness or unhappiness.

⁵How can a decision so simple be difficult to make?

6. Do not let the form of the decision deceive you.

²The complexity of the form does not imply complexity of content.

³It is impossible that any decision on earth have a content different from this one simple choice. ^VII

⁴This is the only choice the Holy Spirit sees.

⁵Therefore, it is the only choice that exists.

7. Let us then practice these thoughts today:

²Let me not forget my function.

³Let me not try to substitute mine for the one God gave me.

⁴I want to forgive, and be happy.

⁵Spend at least ten to fifteen minutes once today reflecting on this, with your eyes closed.

⁶Thoughts related to these will come to your mind to support you, if you remember how crucial your function is—to you, and to the world.

8. In your frequent applications of today’s idea throughout the day, spend several minutes reviewing these thoughts, and then think about them and nothing else.

²This may be difficult at first, especially since you have not yet mastered the mental discipline it requires.

³You may need to repeat often: “Let me not forget my function” to help you focus.

9. The shorter practice sessions are to be done in two different ways.

²At times, do the exercises with your eyes closed, trying to focus on the thoughts you are using.

³At other times, keep your eyes open after reviewing the thoughts, and then look slowly around you without focusing on anything in particular, and say to yourself:

⁴This is the world I am to save.

---

^I Matthew 6:13: “And lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil. For Thine is the Kingdom, the Power, and the Glory forever and ever.”

To fall into temptation is nothing more than to betray yourself by adopting a role that does not belong to you and turning away from your true essence. It is to assume a false identity, a mask that conceals what you really are. The result is always predictable: suffering, confusion, and unrest, for you are trying to be something you are not.

Imagine that you are like a tool designed for a specific purpose. When it is used according to its design, everything flows naturally and efficiently. In the same way, you were created by Love in His likeness, with a single function: to love. In this world of illusions, that function unfolds by loving what is real and forgiving what is not. When you love and forgive, you fulfill your purpose; the result is harmony, peace, and a deep inner satisfaction.

But when you succumb to the temptation to act outside your purpose—when you attempt to attack, judge, or cling to illusions—you will inevitably experience discomfort and conflict. You are simply not designed for that. Always remember your purpose: to love and forgive. Everything else is temptation, a detour that can only lead to suffering.

Review your past experiences and you will have to acknowledge that this logic applies relentlessly. Every time you have strayed from your function of loving and forgiving, the result has been the same: pain, conflict, and a sense of emptiness. On the other hand, when you have chosen to love and forgive, you have found peace and fulfillment. Experience itself is the most compelling evidence of this immutable truth.

^II The purpose of what our eyes see, in the form of physical appearance, is to provide an excuse to justify our attacks. The images our eyes perceive shout at us: “Don’t you see this is real? You must protect yourself from it! Attack it or it will destroy you!”

^III However, the Holy Spirit tells you: “Forgive it, let it go, it is not real. What you are seeing are your own ‘sins,’ those you believe you have committed, and since you despise them, you project them outside yourself, and that is where you see them. Those sins are imaginary, the threats you believe you see are imaginary as well, and the very body that seems to suffer them is nothing but an illusion of yourself in your holy mind.”

Of course, this seems “incredible” because your mind can only “believe” in illusions. Your mind was not created to believe but to create—and this is not a play on words but the truth. Yet you will never be able to “believe” it; that is what you are. It may be helpful to grow accustomed to the idea that, with your limited mind, you will never be able to “believe” in the truth—and that is so for the simple reason that your mind is not limited. Believing that it is, is merely another belief.

Relax, pray, and trust in the Voice of the Holy Spirit. That is all you need to do. Follow His guidance, forgive, and you will see how the world around you changes by itself and begins to shine. You do not need to believe this either; simply do it and open your eyes.

^IV This means that, since you are dreaming—and will continue to do so until the world disappears—you will see the story of your own salvation unfold within your dream as well: images that are nothing more than symbols of your desires and fears.

What else could your salvation, the Atonement, and the miracles be but a happy story within a dark dream? You, Son of God, do not deal in stories; you remain perfect, whole, and complete, just as God created you in eternity.

^V Realize that the incessant inner dialogue with which you are always chattering to yourself is precisely the voice of your ego. Those thoughts you cannot stop are the ones that “mean nothing,” as you have learned in previous Lessons. In truth, that is the only thing you need to forgive, the only thing you need to let go of without giving it importance.

Also realize that your thoughts are one thing, and the awareness of those thoughts is another. Both are illusory, but they belong to different orders. You can identify with your thoughts and rush into action, but you can also identify with the part of your mind that is aware of those contents. When you do this, you in some way “step back,” move away from them, and disengage from their dictates. One could say that in this way you free yourself a little from compulsive thinking and its demands. Meditation is nothing more than that—but nothing less.

Therefore, when your ego tries to convince you that seeing yourself as “the light of the world” is madness, pay it no mind. Understand that the ego is simply fulfilling its function flawlessly, for that is why it appeared in your mind: to persuade you that you are indeed separate from God. Let it fulfill its function, and you calmly devote yourself to yours, which is the one God Himself assigned to you.

^VI To truly accept this, only a bit of honesty is required—nothing more. Briefly review the story of your life and try to remember those moments when you felt joy in your heart and peace in your mind. Your past will confirm that you reached that state in moments of forgiveness and Atonement with the world. But you need not go that far; forgive now, and the present will confirm it just as surely. And if you keep forgiving, your future will also, without doubt, be joyous and peaceful.

^VII At times, you may feel a bit overwhelmed having to choose between two options that appear before you, both of a strongly negative nature: “to condemn or to forgive.” It may help you to interpret forgiveness in a more positive way.

You can also view that duality in terms of “to suffer or to celebrate,” for ultimately, to forgive is to celebrate the truth; it is the joyful celebration that you are innocent, invulnerable, and loved by God—and if you are, then so is everything you behold.

Forgiveness is not an act of condescension or sacrifice, but a celebration of truth. Each time you choose to forgive, you are remembering that love is the only reality and that the illusions of separation and conflict hold no power over you. In forgiving, you not only free yourself, but also radiate light all around you, contributing to the healing of the one mind we all share.

Remember that your function is not to change the world, but to change your perception of the world, for what sense does it make to change illusions? In doing so, you are fulfilling your role as the savior of the world, bringing peace to all minds through your forgiveness. And in that act of love, you find the happiness and peace that are your natural inheritance.

So when you face a situation that challenges you, remember who you are and why you are here. You are the light of the world, and your forgiveness is the means through which that light shines. Choose to forgive, choose to be happy, and let the world see the glory of God through you.

The light of the world brings peace to every mind through my forgiveness.

1. How holy you are, who hold the power to bring peace to every mind!

²How blessed, that you can learn to recognize the means by which this comes about through you!

³What other purpose could bring you greater happiness? ^I

2. With such a function, you are indeed the light of the world.

²The Son of God places his trust in you for his redemption.

³And you can give it to him, for it is yours to give.

⁴Do not accept any trivial purpose or meaningless desire in its place, or you will forget your function and leave the Son of God in hell.

⁵This is not a vain request.

⁶You are being asked to accept salvation, so that it may be yours—and then you may give it. ^II

3. Aware of the importance of this function, we will gladly remember it often today. ^III

²We will begin the day by acknowledging our function, and end it thinking of it.

³And throughout the day, we will repeat as often as we can:

⁴The light of the world brings peace to every mind through my forgiveness.

⁵I am the means God has appointed for the salvation of the world.

4. If you close your eyes, it will likely be easier to let thoughts related to these ideas come to you during the one or two minutes you should devote to them.

²But do not wait for such an opportunity.

³Do not let any chance pass by to reinforce today’s idea.

⁴Remember that the Son of God depends on you for his salvation.

⁵And who is His Son, but your very Self?

---

^I The purpose of forgiveness is to release from guilt and fear. In this world, everyone feels guilty and afraid for countless reasons. How could you not bring peace to your brothers when you forgive them and encourage them to be freed from guilt and fear?

You have the power to bring peace to others! You can learn to do it! It will not be you who does it, but it will be done through you. You are the channel, and the Power of God will do the rest. That is the Will of God, and you can be sure that nothing will make you happier.

This Lesson is a powerful reminder of your true identity and function in the world. You are not a separate and limited being, but the light of the world, a channel through which the love and peace of God can flow to heal all minds. By forgiving, you are clearing away the obstacles that prevent this light from shining, allowing the miracle of salvation to manifest.

The idea that the Son of God entrusts His redemption to you may seem overwhelming, but it is important to remember that you are not alone in this task. The Power of God works through you, and your function is simply to be willing to serve as an instrument of His Love. By accepting this function, you are not only contributing to the salvation of the world, but also acknowledging your own salvation.

The practice of repeating today’s idea throughout the day helps you keep your mind focused on your true purpose. Each time you remember that you are the light of the world and that your forgiveness brings peace to all minds, you are reinforcing your connection with truth and strengthening your commitment to healing.

Thus, this Lesson not only invites you to forgive, but also to recognize the transforming power that resides within you. In doing so, you are taking a crucial step toward fulfilling your function as a teacher of God and toward experiencing the peace and happiness that are your natural inheritance.

^II How could you not be the light of the world if you dedicate yourself to it! The angels of God are astonished when they see you act in this way, and they reverently salute the human being who saves the Son of God. What a function lies within your reach! How could you think of doing anything else? Moreover, you are paid for it with your own salvation. And you are not paid in the future—you are paid on the spot! The very instant you forgive, your heart fills with joy. Could there be a better offer?

This passage is a powerful and encouraging reminder of the magnitude of your function and of the immediate reward you receive when you fulfill it. There is no task nobler or more rewarding than to be an instrument of forgiveness and, therefore, of salvation. Each time you choose to forgive, you not only release others from the chains of illusion, but you also free yourself.

The joy you experience in forgiving is tangible proof that you are aligning with the truth of your Being. That joy is not something you must wait for in a distant future; it is a gift you receive the very moment you decide to release judgment and open yourself to love. It is the confirmation that you are fulfilling your function and remem-bering who you truly are.

The angels of God, beings of light and love, celebrate your choice to forgive because they recognize that, in doing so, you are contributing to the healing of the one mind we all share. Your forgiveness not only benefits you but also has a profound impact on collective consciousness, helping to dispel the shadows of separation and restore unity.

So why would you choose anything else? Why settle for trivial purposes or insubstantial desires when you have the opportunity to take part in the salvation of the world? Each act of forgiveness is a step toward peace, both for you and for everyone. And the reward—that joy that fills your heart—is the proof that you are on the right path.

Remember: there is no greater happiness than that which you experience when you forgive, for in that act you are remembering your true nature and your connection with God. Choose forgiveness, choose to be the light of the world, and let your heart be filled with the joy that only love can bring!

^III Today, you will indeed rejoice as you remind yourself that your function is to bring peace to others through your forgiveness, but true joy will come when you are blessed with the opportunity to find yourself in a situation that requires your forgiveness. Then you will be able to shine and illuminate the world by doing what God asks of you and for which you are perfectly prepared; then you will truly fulfill your function by forgiving.

When that happens—when something disturbs you, when darkness gathers around you and your heart contracts, wavering between fear and anger—open your eyes and remember: you are the savior of the world, and you are perfectly capable of learning, resolving, and healing that Lesson that life has placed before you and that God wants you to learn.

In that moment, invoke the Power of God within you, and clothed in such magnificence, forgive. And you will see what happens immediately. Your mind will be filled with light, your heart will leap with joy, and the angels of God will join hands, beholding you with reverence. And Jesus will smile—so proud of you!

This passage is a call to action, an invitation to live fully your function as the savior of the world. There is no greater opportunity to shine than when you face a situation that seems dark or difficult. It is in those moments that you can choose to forgive, and in doing so, you not only transform your own experience but also radiate light all around you.

Forgiveness is not an act of weakness but of divine strength. In forgiving, you are choosing to see beyond appearances and to recognize the truth that we are all one in the love of God. This act of courage and faith does not go unnoticed in the heavenly realms. The angels celebrate your choice, and Jesus, your brother and guide, rejoices with pride as He watches you fulfill your sacred function.

So when you find yourself facing a challenging situation, remember who you are and why you are here. You are the light of the world, the savior who brings peace through forgiveness. And each time you choose to forgive, you are remembering your true identity and contributing to the healing of the one mind we all share.

Let your light shine, and let the world see the glory of God through you!

My function is to forgive because I am the light of the world.

1. Your forgiveness is what will bring this world of darkness into the Light.^I

²Your forgiveness is what allows you to recognize the Light in which you see.

³Forgiveness is the proof that you are the light of the world.

⁴Through your forgiveness, you remember the truth about yourself.

⁵Therefore, in your forgiveness lies your salvation. ^II

2. The illusions you hold about yourself and about the world are one and the same. ^III

²That is why all forgiveness is a gift you give yourself. ^IV

³Your goal is to discover who you are, for you have denied your Identity by attacking Creation and its Creator.

⁴Now you are learning how to remember the truth.

⁵To do so, you must replace all attack with forgiveness, so that thoughts of Life may take the place of those of death.

3. Remember that every time you attack, you are calling upon your own weakness, while every time you forgive, you are invoking the strength of Christ in you. ^V

²Do you begin to understand, then, what forgiveness can do for you?

³Forgiveness will clear your mind of all feelings of weakness, strain, and fatigue.

⁴It will wash away all fear, guilt, and pain.

⁵And it will restore to your awareness the invulnerability and the power God gave His Son.

4. Let us rejoice in beginning and ending this day by practicing today’s idea, and in calling upon it as often as possible throughout the day.

²This will make your day as joyful for you as God wants it to be.

³And it will also cause those near you to share that joy with you, as well as those who seem far from you in space and time. ^VI

5. As often as you can, and with your eyes closed if possible, say to yourself:

²My function is to forgive, because I am the light of the world.

³I want to fulfill my function so that I may be happy.

⁴Then spend a minute or two considering your function, and the happiness and freedom it will bring.

⁵Let thoughts related to today’s idea come to you, for your heart will recognize these words, and in your mind lies the awareness that they are true.

⁶And if you become distracted, repeat the idea and add:

⁷I want to remember this because I want to be happy.

---

^I You are here to save the world… in your mind, which is where it truly resides. That is the only world that “exists,” and the only one that needs salvation. And you will save it by forgiving it—by letting go of every judgment you have made about it.

It is a world built on absences of Love, but remember this: absences do not exist. In truth, you are only forgiving—releasing—your mistaken ideas, precisely because they are not true, because they do not serve you, and because they harm you. Your heart reminds you of this constantly. Listen to it. Whenever you “feel” bad, it is because what you are thinking is not true.

Why would you hold on to all those lies in your holy mind?

When you forgive, you feel well. The world becomes bright. Can you not see this? Do you not want to be happy? Would you rather persist in conceiving interpretations that bring you pain?

You have already seen in previous Lessons—and it has been made quite clear—that you relate only to your own interpretations, that what you call “reality” means nothing in and of itself. You are the one who has given everything the meaning it has for you. And the fact that those meanings may seem to match those of many others does not make them valid; it only means they are reliable, because you have agreed upon them together.

You have absolute control over your mind, but you are unaware of it because you deny it—and then use that very power to convince yourself that you are powerless. You can use your mind to interpret in any way you choose, and thereby live in the world you desire.

Therefore, desire wisely. Desire to see differently. Ask for a way of seeing the world that will make you happy, and your heart will tell you that now you are using your mind rightly.

Align yourself with the guidance of your heart, not with the dictates of the world. The world’s dictates were conceived to sustain the disheartening belief that you are separate from everything. That is not true—yet, unfortunately, you can believe it. Once again: that does not serve you.

Trust your feeling. Trust your heart.

By choosing to forgive and to release judgment, you are freeing your mind from the chains of illusion and allowing the light of truth to shine through you.

This act of forgiveness not only transforms your perception of the world, but also draws you nearer to the happiness and peace that are your natural inheritance.

Remember: the world you see is a reflection of your mind, and by changing it, you change everything you experience. Choose to see with the eyes of Love, and the world will become a place of light and harmony.

^II Perhaps you recall these words from the Introduction to theText: “This Course does not aim at teaching the meaning of love, for that is beyond what can be taught. It does aim, however, at removing the obstacles to the awareness of love’s presence, which is your natural inheritance.” Well, forgiveness is exactly that: removing the obstacles to the awareness of love’s presence.

Forgiveness is not an act of condescension or sacrifice; it is a process of mental release. In forgiving, you are not justifying or accepting what you consider to be errors or harm, but rather you are letting go of the judgments that cloud your vision and keep you from recognizing the truth. Those judgments are the obstacles that separate you from the awareness of love, which is your essence and your divine inheritance.

When you forgive, in truth, you are forgiving yourself for having condemned your brother, for that has been your “sin”: thinking ill of him; that is the only element in your mental universe that makes sense to call “sin.”

You are saying: “I prefer to see beyond this illusion. I choose to free my mind from the shadows of fear and resentment, so that the light of love may shine unimpeded.” This act of detachment not only transforms your perception of the world, but also brings you closer to the direct experience of love, which has always been present but which you had veiled with your mistaken interpretations.

Forgiveness, therefore, is not something you do for others, but for yourself. It is a gift you give yourself, a conscious decision to leave behind what hurts and limits you, so as to open to the fullness of your Self. In forgiving, you align with the truth that love is the only real thing, and that everything else is mere illusion you can choose to release.

Thus, forgiveness becomes the key that opens the door to the awareness of love, allowing you to remember who you really are: a being of light, love, and peace, eternally connected to the Source of all that is.

^III Because the world is nothing but the projection of the idea you hold of yourself.

This assertion is fundamental for understanding the nature of your experience. The world you perceive is nothing but a mirror that reflects the beliefs, judgments, and perceptions you harbor in your mind. If you see yourself as separate, limited, vulnerable, or lacking, the world you project will be filled with conflict, fear, and scarcity. On the contrary, if you recognize your true identity as the Son of God, whole and perfect, the world you experience will begin to reflect that light and that peace.

The world, in itself, has no meaning of its own. It is a blank canvas upon which you project your thoughts and beliefs. That is why Jesus teaches that “the world you see is what you have put there to see.” Each situation, each relationship, each circumstance is an opportunity to observe what is in your mind and to choose to see differently.

When you become aware that the world is a projection of your mind, you understand that you do not need to change the external world in order to be happy. What you need is to change the idea you have of yourself. By freeing yourself from false beliefs and embracing the truth of your Self, the world you project is automatically transformed.

This is the power of forgiveness: by releasing judgments and mistaken interpretations, you remove the obstacles that keep you from seeing the light of love in you and in all that surrounds you. The world then ceases to be a place of conflict and becomes a reflection of the peace and unity that have always been present in your mind.

Remember: the world is nothing but a dream, a temporary projection of the mind. Your true reality lies beyond it, in the eternity of love. In changing your perception, you are not changing the world itself, but awakening to the truth that the world was never real. And in that awakening, you find the peace that has always been your inheritance.

^IV You have built an idea of yourself based on limitations, and therefore you limit everything. To limit is to separate. What is functioning now in your mind is simply the fragmenting idea of separation, infinitely fractalized and projected outside you. It is nothing but that, and moreover, it is false; but, once again, you can believe in it and thus lend it a spurious existence.

Each time you forgive, it is a gift you give yourself, and your heart rejoices in it. Your mind is now confused, because it is free and can think whatever it pleases. It can think any nonsense, but it cannot make it true, and it never will be. Your heart is not free, because it is not cause but the effect of your mind’s thinking. You are free to think, but not to feel. You will always feel in accordance with how you think; in this there is no choice.

Forgiveness is a present you give to Heaven and to yourself, and your heart simply confirms it for you. In forgiving, you are choosing to release the illusions that bind you and to open to the truth that you are free, complete, and eternally united to the Source of all love. This act of release not only transforms your perception of the world, but also brings you closer to the direct experience of the peace and happiness that are your natural inheritance.

Remember: forgiveness is not an act of weakness, but of strength. It is the conscious decision to leave behind what limits you and to embrace the truth of your Self. In doing so, you not only free yourself, but you also contribute to the healing of the world, for in changing your mind, you change the world you project.

Thus, forgiveness becomes a bridge between illusion and truth, between fear and love. It is the greatest gift you can give yourself and the world, because in forgiving, you are remembering who you really are: a being of light, love, and peace, eternally connected to the Source of all that is.

^V This is the strength of meekness. As mentioned in the Manual for Teachers, in M-5.IV.2:1-2: “… God’s teachers are wholly gentle. They need the strength that gentleness brings, for it is in this that their function of salvation becomes easy for them.” Meekness is not weakness, but a powerful quality that arises from the understanding that there is no need to struggle, defend, or impose. In being meek, you recognize that your true strength does not come from yourself, but from God, and that it is in surrender that you find your most authentic power.

Remember also that, through your forgiveness, you invoke the Power of God. As noted in M-5.I.1:5-8: “… (the world) is governed by a Power that is in them but not of them. This Power is what keeps all things safe. Through this Power, God’s teachers look on a forgiven world. Once this Power has been experienced, it is impossible to trust again in one’s own petty strength.”

Forgiveness is the means by which you connect with this divine Power. In releasing judgments, resentments, and illusions, you open to the presence of God in your mind and allow His Love and His Strength to flow through you. This Power is not something you can generate by yourself; it is a gift you receive when you choose to align with truth and leave behind the ego’s falsehoods.

Meekness and forgiveness go hand in hand, for both require that you relinquish the idea that you are in charge or that you need to control anything. Instead of trusting in your own limited strength, you trust in the Power of God, which is infinite and ever-present. In doing so, you become a channel of His Love and His Peace, and the world you perceive is transformed into a reflection of that light.

Thus, meekness becomes an expression of your true strength, and forgiveness the key that allows you to access the divine Power. Together, they guide you toward the fulfillment of your function as a teacher of God, helping you to see a forgiven world and to remember the unity that has always been.

^VI It is important that you realize that forgiveness has the healing power of the miracle. Forgiveness, in fact, is the antechamber of the miracle. By undoing illusions, forgiveness leaves your mind clean and receptive, allowing the light of truth to work the miracle. That is why forgiveness not only induces the healing miracle in your mind, but also in the minds of those who seem to be separate from you in the illusory realm of space-time, because, ultimately, it is the same mind.

Forgiveness acts as a bridge between illusion and truth. By releasing judgments, resentments, and false perceptions, you clear the way for the Love and Light of God to flow freely through you. This act of release not only benefits you, but also has a profound impact on the collective mind, for in reality there is no separation. What you heal in yourself, you heal in everyone.

The miracle is the natural expression of a mind that has been purified by forgiveness. It is not a magical or supernatural event, but a change in perception that allows you to see beyond illusions and recognize the truth. When you forgive, you are choosing to see with the eyes of love instead of those of fear, and that is what makes the miracle possible.

Remember that forgiveness is not an act of condescension or sacrifice; it is a gift you give to yourself and the world. In forgiving, you are affirming that you prefer peace to conflict, love to fear, and truth to illusion. And in doing so, you are contributing to the healing of the single mind we all share.

Thus, forgiveness becomes a powerful tool to transform not only your life, but also the world you perceive. In choosing to forgive, you are choosing light over darkness, unity over separation, and love over fear. And in that choice, you find the peace and happiness that have always been your inheritance.

I am the light of the world.

1. Who is the light of the world but the Son of God? ^I

²This, then, is nothing but a declaration of the truth about yourself.

³It is the opposite of pride, arrogance, or self-deception.

⁴It does not describe the self-concept you have made.

⁵It does not refer to any of the traits you have assigned to your idols.

⁶It refers to you as you were created by God.

⁷It simply states the truth.

2. To the ego, today’s idea is the epitome of self-glorification.

²But the ego does not understand humility, for it confuses it with self-debasement.

³Humility means accepting your role in salvation and refusing to accept any other.

⁴It is not humility to insist that you cannot be the light of the world if that is the function God has given you.

⁵To claim that this cannot be your function is mere arrogance, and arrogance always belongs to the ego. ^II

3. True humility requires you to accept today’s idea, because it is the Voice of God that tells you it is true. ^III

²This is an initial step toward accepting your true function on earth.

³It is a giant stride toward taking your rightful place in salvation. ^IV

⁴It is a clear affirmation of your right to be saved, and a recognition of the power that has been given you to save others.

4. It is helpful for you to think about this idea as often as possible today.

²It is the perfect answer to all illusions, and therefore to all temptation.

³This idea brings every image you have made about yourself to the truth, and helps you leave in peace, unburdened and certain of your purpose. ^V

5. As many practice sessions as possible should be undertaken today, although each need not last more than a minute or two.

²You should begin by saying to yourself:

³I am the light of the world.

⁴That is my only function.

⁵That is why I am here.

⁶Then, think about these statements for a short while, preferably with eyes closed if the situation allows. ^VI

⁷Let related thoughts come to you, and repeat the idea to yourself if your mind begins to wander and drift away from the central thought. ^VII

6. Be sure to begin and end the day with this practice.

²In this way, you will awaken acknowledging the truth about yourself, reinforce it throughout the day, and go to sleep reaffirming your function and your only purpose here.

³These two sessions may be longer than the others, if you find them helpful and wish to extend them.

7. Today’s idea goes far beyond the petty views the ego holds of what you are and what your function is.

²As the bearer of salvation, this is, of course, necessary.

³This is the first in a series of giant steps we will take in the weeks to come.

⁴Today, try to begin laying a solid foundation for these advances.^VIII

⁵You are the light of the world.

⁶And God has built His plan for the salvation of His Son upon you.

---

^I Matthew 5:14 “You are the light of the world. A city set on a hill cannot be hidden.”
John 8:12 “Then Jesus again spoke to them, saying: ‘I am the light of the world. He who follows Me shall not walk in darkness, but shall have the light of life.’”
John 9:5 “As long as I am in the world, I am the light of the world.”

The expression “light of the world” appears 42 times in the Course: 9 in the Text and 33 in the Workbook.

In the following Lessons, the three aspects of the Self, known as the celebrated divine triad, will be addressed consecutively: Light (Lessons 61, 62, 63, and 75), Love (Lessons 67 and 68), and Will (Lessons 73 and 74). The purpose of these Lessons is to help you identify with these three aspects of your true Self.

^II Faced with such ideas, you may feel the tendency to look for a curious compromise. You understand and accept the notion of the ego, and also, to a certain extent, you grasp the concept of the Son of God, sympathizing with the idea that this is your true identity. Yet, surprisingly, you conceive of a third identity, to which you give no name but which you consider as “yourself.” This peculiar figure wavers uncertainly between the nefarious ego—when you see yourself thinking or doing something you deem bad—and a “more neutral” or perhaps “more benevolent” state of mind. This arises from the repugnance you feel at fully identifying with your ego, to which you attribute essentially evil qualities.

In reality, this is not so. First, it is important to understand that the ego is not an entity and has no existence whatsoever. The term ego is used in this Course to refer to a misuse of the mind, and that is a matter of degree. Jesus explains to you that a part of your holy mind is malfunctioning; he calls it “the lower or wrong part” of the mind, and he also tells you that this is the ego’s domain, the realm of illusions. Absolutely all your human experience occurs in that realm, in that mind. It is the stage of the world, of time and space. It is the illusion into which the Son of God’s mind plunges when it believes in the idea of separation. The idea itself is madness, and what that mind experiences is not true: it is a hallucination.

You, Son of God, are eternally in the Heart of God. You, as a human being, are always in the ego, in a state of erroneous mentality to a greater or lesser degree. When you condemn, you are absolutely mistaken; when you forgive, you are far less confused, but you are still in your ego. And the Son of God is wholly unaware of what either one means.

This Course is mental training for the ego mind, to help it function better, to stop experiencing nightmares, and finally to awaken to its divine condition. The mental illness you suffer is extraordinarily insidious, and the identity you have built for yourself is completely submerged in it, to the point that you have no valid perspective; fish do not know they live in water. You cannot save yourself. You do not know what is truly best for you. That is why Atonement does not depend on you.

You are the Love of God and you are not in this world, but while you believe you are, it is helpful for you to see yourself as the light of the world, thus dissipating somewhat the shadows of this dark imaginary place.

^III Today’s Lesson is of paramount importance, for it opens the way to true humility, the humility of your ego, the only one truly needed. The word humility comes from the Latin humus, which refers to fertile earth produced from the decomposition of living things. Notice the symbol well: the undoing of what seems alive, of apparent “living beings,” fosters a fertile ground for true Life to be born—your Self.

You undoubtedly have a host of opinions about yourself, and it is also evident that you believe those definitions are correct, for otherwise you would not hold them. That omniscient character you ascribe to yourself—believing that what you think is true—is the arrogance of the ego that Jesus exposes here. Your ego, which knows nothing, dictates to you a definition of your own identity that you accept without question, and from that insane idea of yourself you project an equally insane world.

This Lesson offers you a different vision of what you are. You need not believe it immediately, but it is essential that you give it a chance. From humility, open your mind and invite this new perspective to take root in you. Then, observe how you feel when you host such a guest.

True humility does not consist in belittling yourself, but in recognizing that the definitions you have accepted about yourself are illusory, and that in your essence you are something far greater and truer than your ego could ever conceive. By opening to this idea, you allow the light of truth to begin to dispel the shadows of illusion, preparing the ground for the awareness of your real Self to blossom.

^IV This Lesson is the first of the “giant steps” in the Workbook. The other Lessons identified as giant steps are 66, 94, 127, 130, 135, and 194.

^V Luke 2:29–30, 32 “Lord, now You let Your servant depart in peace, according to Your word; for my eyes have seen Your salvation […] a light to enlighten the Gentiles.”

This is Simeon speaking, who, after having seen the child Jesus—the light of the world—declares that he can now die in peace. Similarly, here, having recognized that your true condition is to be the light of the world, you can take the first giant step and begin to leave behind in peace your false identity.

Just as Simeon found fullness and peace in beholding the divine light, you too can experience a profound release in recognizing your true essence. This recognition is not a mere intellectual act, but a spiritual awakening that allows you to let go of the bonds of illusion and move toward the truth of your Self.

This first step does not involve a titanic effort, but a conscious surrender to the truth that already dwells within you. By leaving behind the false identity you have constructed, you draw near to the peace that arises from knowing who you really are: the light of the world, a pure reflection of divine love and perfection.

Just as Simeon could rest in peace after his encounter with the sacred, you too can find tranquility and certainty by embracing your true nature. This is the beginning of a transformative journey, in which each step takes you farther from the shadows of illusion and closer to the fullness of your Self.

^VI This practice of reflecting on the statements is undoubtedly similar to the practice of the First Review you have just completed. In both cases, it is a mental exercise in which you invite yourself to adopt the ideas presented, reminding yourself of their benefits and supporting your decision with clear and conscious reasoning.

During the First Review, you focused on internalizing the key ideas, recalling their meaning and how they can transform your perception. Similarly, by reflecting on the statements presented to you now, you are reinforcing your commitment to a new mental framework, one that frees you from the ego’s illusions and draws you closer to the truth of your Self.

This process is not merely repetitive, but profoundly transformative. By reminding yourself of the benefits of these ideas and supporting your decision to accept them rationally, you are cultivating a mind more open and receptive to truth. Each time you review these concepts, you clear the path a little more toward clarity and inner peace.

In essence, this practice is a mental training that prepares you to live from a higher perspective, where illusions lose their power and the light of truth shines more brightly. Just as the First Review laid the foundation for deep change, this practice continues building upon that foundation, guiding you toward a fuller understanding of your true identity.

^VII This is the practice of letting related thoughts come, which was formally introduced in Lesson 42. Consult that Lesson for detailed instructions.

^VIII Luke 6:48 “He is like a man building a house, who dug deep and laid the foundation on the rock. And when the flood arose, the stream beat vehemently against that house and could not shake it, for it was founded on the rock.”

These are the ideas for today’s review: W-46–W-50

1. W-46 “God is the Love in which I forgive.”

²God does not forgive because He has never condemned.

³Those who are guiltless cannot blame, and those who have accepted their innocence see nothing to forgive.

⁴Yet forgiveness is the means by which I will recognize my innocence. ^I

⁵It is the reflection of God’s Love on earth.

⁶Forgiveness brings me so close to Heaven that God’s Love can reach down to me and raise me to my home.

2. W-47 “God is the Strength in which I trust.”

²It is not through my own strength that I forgive.

³It is through the strength of God in me, which I remember as I forgive. ^II

⁴As I begin to see, I recognize His reflection on earth.

⁵I forgive all things, because I feel the strength of God arise in me.

⁶And I begin to remember the Love I chose to forget, but Which has not forgotten me.

3. W-48 “There is nothing to fear.”

²How safe the world will look to me when I can see it!

³It will not look anything like what I imagine I see now.

⁴Everyone and everything I see will lean toward me to bless me.

⁵I will recognize in everyone my dearest Friend.

⁶What could there be to fear in a world that I have forgiven, and that has forgiven me? ^III

4. W-49 “God’s Voice speaks to me all through the day.”

²There is not a moment in which God’s Voice ceases to call on my forgiveness to save me.

³There is not a moment in which His Voice fails to direct my thoughts, guide my actions and lead my feet. ^IV

⁴I am walking steadily on toward truth.

⁵There is nowhere else I can go, because God’s Voice is the only voice and the only guide that has been given to His Son.

5. W-50 “I am sustained by the Love of God.”

²As I listen to God’s Voice, I am sustained by His Love.

³As I open my eyes, His Love lights up the world for me to see.

⁴As I forgive, His Love reminds me that His Son is sinless.

⁵And as I look upon the world with the vision He has given me, I remember who I am. ^V

---

^I This is a very simple and perfectly accessible idea, for it is easy to experience; it works in every circumstance without exception. Whenever you truly forgive, your heart leaps with joy, freeing itself from a heavy burden and rising light and happy. This always happens, without possibility of exception. If you truly forgive, your heart will confirm with certainty that this profoundly benefits your soul.

Attention! The opposite is also true. Whenever you feel bad, when your heart is heavy and cries out in pain, it is because you are thinking something that is not true and you are harming yourself. Your heart is a sure guide to truth. Listen to it. Pay attention to your emotional states, for they are there precisely to show you how you are using your mind. Do not ignore their warnings. Always choose to be happy. And when you feel bad, when your heart alerts you, remember that what you were thinking must be false; seek a new way of seeing it and correct your mind.

Awareness of your emotions and healthy mental vigilance are indispensable requirements for navigating safely through a world of illusions. Use these resources well, for they will literally save your life.

^II These two lines are fundamental because they reveal the key to true forgiveness. You are the one who decides to forgive; that is your choice and your role in the process. Yet forgiveness is carried out through the Strength of God in you.

You cannot forgive on your own, which is logical, for you were the one who condemned. Now you are the one who has chosen forgiveness, who has made a new decision and chosen to free yourself from condemnation. But forgiveness becomes effective through the Strength of God in you, which is infallible.

Therefore, there is no justification for saying “I cannot forgive.” Be honest with yourself and admit, in any case, “I do not want to forgive,” for the only thing required of you in this process is your willingness, nothing more. Once you are willing, the Strength of God will take care of the rest, freeing you from resentment and restoring your peace.

When Jesus mentions here “your own strength,” he refers to that which you ascribe to yourself, the strength of your ego. In reality, your true and only strength is the Strength of God, for He gave you His Own Strength when He created you. You possess no other strength than that, for the one you now think you have belongs to the realm of illusions and exists only in your imagination.

Whenever you think of some quality you assign to yourself, one that can be measured or compared with that of others, realize that you are speaking of your ego, and that what you are thinking of is not real. All those qualities or virtues you perceive in yourself or in others are but your own imaginings; they have no reality. You may speak of exalted qualities you behold with satisfaction, even striving to cultivate them to be more humble, generous, trusting, brave, kind, courteous, or whatever it may be; it does not matter. All of this is imaginary and refers to characteristics of your ego.

And there is nothing wrong with it. There is nothing wrong with wanting to be a better person. But notice a small detail: you are not a person, nor will you ever be; you are the Son of God, and you are perfect exactly as you are right now. You do not need to improve; you only need to recognize your rightful glory.

To follow faithfully what this Course proposes may seem to make you a better person, more loving and less critical, but that is because this Course operates within the realm of illusion. Remember G-1.3:1: “This Course operates within the ego’s domain, for that is where it is needed.”

You, Son of God, do not need to improve; you were created perfect… and you remain so in Reality. In truth, the only thing you need is to stop taking seriously that absurd idea that you are separated from your Father. It is not true, and moreover, it harms you; it does you injury.

Notice all the ideas you review today: they are simply statements of the condition of your true identity. They speak of characteristics of different aspects of your own Self, but contemplated from the perspective of illusion. All this is part of your mind training, of the purification of that “lower part” of the mind in which you believe you live, and which will enable you to access miracles. Remember Principle 7 of miracles: “Everyone is entitled to miracles. But before this comes purification.” This purification occurs when these ideas become your habitual way of thinking.

^III The result of true forgiveness is the total acceptance of that which you have forgiven. When you truly forgive, you offer unreserved acceptance, and there is no greater power in this world than full acceptance, because there is no deeper yearning in the human heart.

No one can resist your acceptance, for that is precisely what all seek from others and from themselves. In genuine acceptance, fear has no place. That is why, in a forgiven world, there is nothing to fear, for acceptance dissolves all judgment and all fear, revealing the peace that has always been present.

^IV  Luke 1:79 “To shine on those living in darkness and in the shadow of death, to guide our feet into the path of peace.”

The Voice of God speaks to me all through the day; this is true, but do I listen? Or is it, rather, that my mind is absorbed in the incessant inner monologue, in the ego’s voice?

To hear the Voice of God, it is necessary to quiet the mind. Only in inner silence can His guidance be perceived.

Remember how Jesus reformulates the biblical quotation: “Many are called, but few are chosen.” In reality, it should say: “All are called, but few choose to listen” (T-3.VIII.19:2).

^V We conclude today’s Lesson with this beautiful thought, echo of the ancient biblical psalms:

In the stillness of my heart, I recognize Your Presence.

In the light of Your Love, I find my true Self.

No darkness can conceal Your Glory, nor illusion cloud my vision.

You are my strength, my refuge, and my peace.

In You, all fear dissolves, and only the certainty of Your eternal Love remains.

Today I choose to remember who I am in You, and rest in the safety of Your Perfect Creation.

Amen.

This prayer, inspired by the depth and rhythm of the psalms, invites us to connect with the divine essence that dwells within us, reminding us that beyond the illusions of the ego, our true identity is eternal and perfect in God.

Today we review the following: W-41 to W-45 ^I

1. W-41 “God goes with me wherever I go.”^II

²How can I be alone when God always goes with me?

³How can I be uncertain and insecure when perfect certainty resides in Him?

⁴How can I be disturbed by anything when He rests in me in absolute peace?

⁵How can I suffer when love and joy surround me through Him?

⁶Let me not cherish illusions about myself.

⁷I am perfect because God goes with me wherever I go.

2. W-42 “God is my strength. Vision is His gift.”^III

²Let me not look to my own eyes to see today.

³Let me be willing to exchange my pitiful illusion of seeing for the vision that is given by God.

⁴Christ’s vision is His gift, and He has given it to me.

⁵Let me call upon this gift today, so that this day may help me to understand eternity.

3. W-43 “God is my Source. I cannot see apart from Him.”^IV

²I can see what God wants me to see.

³I cannot see anything else.

⁴Beyond His Will lie only illusions.

⁵It is these I choose when I think I can see apart from Him.

⁶It is these I choose when I try to see through the body’s eyes.

⁷Yet the vision of Christ has been given me to replace them.

⁸It is through this vision that I choose to see.

4. W-44 “God is the Light in which I see.”^V

²I cannot see in darkness.

³God is the only Light.

⁴Therefore, if I am to see, it must be through Him.

⁵I have tried to define what seeing is, and I have been wrong.

⁶Now it is given me to understand that God is the Light in which I see.

⁷Let me welcome vision and the happy world it will show me.

5. W-45 “God is the Mind with which I think.”^VI

²I have no thoughts I do not share with God.

³I have no thoughts apart from Him, because I am not apart from His Mind.

⁴As part of His Mind, my thoughts are His and His Thoughts are mine.

---

^I The five ideas for today are absolutely true, but it is also true that they are absolutely incredible. You do not believe them. If you did, you would not be here. In fact, you are not here, but because instead of believing the truth these Lessons express, you have chosen to believe something else, you now believe you are in this world, which is not true at all.

To believe is to think that what you imagine is true. But truth cannot be imagined; truth can only be being, because you are the truth. Yet that, too, is incredible, because you cannot imagine it either. The only thing you can imagine are illusions, because that is precisely what illusions are: imaginings. Images are not real, because reality is perfectly abstract, and you are real; that is why you cannot imagine what you are, you can only be it.

To believe is to misuse the mind. Your mind was created to create, not to believe. Believing is good for nothing, so do not worry at all if you cannot believe the five ideas for today; it is perfectly natural. You will never be able to believe them; they are intrinsically unbelievable because they are the truth. Do not worry. You are the Son of God, even if you do not believe it, nor can believe it. Do not waste time trying to believe; simply trust and work.

Jesus does not ask you to believe in the ideas he proposes. Today it is especially worthwhile to read slowly again the introduction to this Workbook:

“Some of the ideas you will find hard to believe, and others may seem quite startling. This does not matter. You are merely asked to apply them to what you see. You are not asked to judge them, nor even to believe them. You are merely asked to use them. Their use is what will give them meaning to you and will show you that they are true. Remember only this: It is not necessary to believe the ideas. It is not necessary to accept them. And it is not necessary to welcome them. Some of them you may actively resist. None of this will matter or lessen their efficacy. But do not allow yourself to make exceptions in applying the ideas contained in the exercises. Whatever your reaction to the ideas may be, use them. Nothing more than that is required.”

^II This is a supremely powerful thought. The more you use it, the greater will be its effects. It will transform your life and fill you with trust and certainty. It is not enough merely to repeat it; you need to reflect it in every one of your actions. Strive to embody this powerful idea at all times.

For learning to be truly effective, it must be fully experienced in its two dimensions. The first is receptive: it consists in opening yourself completely to the idea you wish to root in your mind. The second, equally important or even more so, is when you internalize that idea by sharing it with others.

That is why you should not only repeat to yourself that God always goes with you; act as someone who truly feels His presence. Do this and watch the results.

^III This thought calls upon humility. With God you can do all things; without Him, you will live only a dream of fear, loneliness, and death. By linking your strength with God, you make yourself invulnerable to discouragement, danger, and temptation.

Apply this idea just as you did the previous one: do not merely repeat it; put the Strength of God into action and use it in everything you do. Always reject any thought of weakness and be realistic: God is with you and infuses His Strength into everything you undertake in faith.

^IV To think that you can see something meaningful without God is as illusory as believing you can know reality by watching television. You may convince yourself of it, but it remains an absurd idea. Whenever the world depresses or frightens you, you may be absolutely sure that you are seeing nothing real; you are simply dreaming. You have fallen into a deep hypnotic sleep, and what you believe you see is nothing but an illusion.

The eyes of the body were not made to see reality, but to dream. The problem is that your thought system is inverted and you interpret everything backwards. Reality is not outside you; Reality is the Kingdom of God that dwells within you and that, in essence, you are.

In this world, you can only glimpse “aspects” of Reality in the form of reflections of love in everything you behold. These flashes of love are the echoes of truth that transcend the world’s illusions and remind you of your divine origin. When you succeed in seeing with the eyes of the spirit, you recognize the light behind appearances and perceive the divine essence that connects everything and everyone.

Accepting this requires a deep change in your way of seeing and understanding. It is an inner transformation that leads you to look beyond forms and appearances to recognize the eternal and immutable. In doing so, you begin to awaken from the dream of the world and remember your true identity.

^V Notice that everything depends on what you want to see. If you use the world’s light to interpret what lies before you, you will continue to see the sad and guilty world that almost everyone sees here, which is the one you have granted yourself until now. But is that what you want to keep seeing? Is that what you want to keep feeling?

^VI Recognize that you still do not understand well what the mind is nor what it means to think. You call thinking the act of relating concepts through preestablished functions. That is not true thinking; that is only processing data.

The world distinguishes between “human intelligence” and “artificial intelligence” and is surprised that a machine can “think” as well as or better than a human. The world has not yet realized that there is nothing surprising about this, that human intelligence is also artificial, and that is why machines can emulate it. That is nothing but algorithmic thinking: applying certain functions to certain concepts. Nothing more.

Thinking is creating, it is engendering Life from Life. Thinking is extending existence; it is what you do when you create in heavenly reality, and thus you bring forth your Creations, Son of God.

Today we review the following: W-36 to W-40

1. W-36 “My holiness envelops everything I see.”^I

²The perception of the real world comes from my holiness.

³Having forgiven, I no longer see myself as guilty. ^II

⁴I can accept the innocence that is the truth about me.

⁵When I look upon the world with understanding eyes, I see only its holiness, for I am looking only at the thoughts I hold about myself.

2. W-37 “My holiness blesses the world.”^III

²The perception of my holiness does not bless me alone.

³Everyone and everything I see in its light shares in the joy it brings me.

⁴There is nothing that is excluded from this joy, because there is nothing that does not share my holiness.

⁵As I recognize my own holiness, the holiness of the world shines forth for all to see.

3. W-38 “There is nothing my holiness cannot do.”^IV

²The healing power of my holiness is limitless, because its power to save is limitless.

³But what is there to be saved from except illusions?

⁴And what are all illusions except false ideas about myself?

⁵My holiness undoes them all by affirming the truth about me.

⁶In the presence of my holiness, which I share with God Himself, all idols disappear.

4. W-39 “My holiness is my salvation.”^V

²Since my holiness saves me from all guilt, recognizing it is recognizing my salvation.

³And it is also recognizing the salvation of the world.

⁴Once I have accepted my holiness, nothing can make me afraid.

⁵And because I am not afraid, everyone shares my understanding—which is God’s Gift to me and to the world. ^VI

5. W-40 “I am blessed as a Son of God.”^VII

²In this lies my claim to all that is good, and only what is good.

³I am blessed as a Son of God.

⁴All good things are mine because God intended them for me.

⁵I cannot suffer any loss, deprivation, or pain because of Who I am.

⁶My Father supports me, protects me, and guides me in all things.

⁷His care for me is infinite, and it is always with me.

⁸I am eternally blessed as His Son. ^VIII

---

^I My holiness envelops everything I see because now I see everything from my holiness. It has always been there; the difference is that now I recognize it in myself.

^II Forgiveness and prayer are the only resources available to you in this world of illusion. You walk in fear, absorbed in your own thoughts of condemnation, sin, and death; you see them as though they were outside yourself, unaware that they are of your own making. This lack of responsibility for the world you believe you see is what makes you a victim of yourself. Forgive what you think you see, not out of moral superiority and goodness, but because none of it is real; it is the product of your own hallucinations, and you do not want to go on suffering.

The greatest difficulty you will face in approaching your own liberation is that you have not yet truly decided that, indeed, you want to stop suffering. You have confused pleasure with pain, and you perceive them in reverse. Notice the perverse pleasure you find in guilt and vengeance, and you will realize it is so. The suffering of others often consoles you; your own suffering you sometimes find redemptive.

What this Course calls “true perception” will free you from these false interpretations. This is not yet true vision, but it is what leads you toward it. It is the necessary process of purification through which you must pass in order to claim your right to perform miracles.

^III My holiness blesses the world because that is what holiness does; that is its condition. Holiness is the condition of existence; existence is holy and creates by extending itself. In the world, that extension, that creation, is called “to bless.”

^IV In reality, holiness can only do one thing: extend what it is. Do not ask holiness for anything else, for it cannot give it to you. Do not ask it to “improve” your illusions or to adjust reality to your expectations, for that would only perpetuate the deception. Holiness does not accommodate illusions; it simply dissolves them by affirming the truth.

What it will do, however, is see itself in everything it beholds. By recognizing its own essence in all things, it undoes the false ideas you hold about yourself, freeing you from illusions. The world is not real; it is a mirror in which you see reflected the idea you have of yourself. But when you look with holiness, you no longer see distorted projections, but a reflection of the truth you share with God. Then all idols vanish, and the only thing that remains is what has always been: holiness itself, your true condition.

^V My holiness is my salvation because my holiness is my condition. My holiness is the truth about me, whether I recognize it or not.

^VI From this side of the mirror, here in this world of illusions, real values such as holiness are incomprehensible to you. You have so limited your mind that you are only able to handle illusory concepts; that is why the notion of holiness seems inaccessible to you. The realm in which you believe you live is a perfect inversion of Heaven, and that is why it is much easier for you to deal with negative concepts.

Given your sad situation, you may better understand this idea if you say: “My innocence is my salvation.” The idea of innocence you understand well, for it is a negative concept. It comes from the Latin innocens, formed from the negative prefix in- and the word nocens, which comes from the verb nocere, “to harm.” Therefore, innocent means “not harmful,” and that you can understand and accept.

Do not be surprised, then, by the “negative” character of this Course, which advocates concepts such as “forgive”—NOT to take into account—, “meditate”—NOT to consider your own thoughts—, or “listen to the Voice of the Holy Spirit and follow His guidance”—NOT to decide for yourself. The Gospel Jesus already warns: “My kingdom is NOT of this world.”

Heaven and world are antithetical concepts, as are God and self. The inversion of the thought system this Course proposes leads you to reality by the denial of the illusory. If these “negative” postulates inspire you with some fear or sadness, realize that this is because you still harbor some hope of finding something of value in this world you believe you inhabit.

But realize two things: this is NOT life, and your legitimate aspirations to be happy will never be fulfilled in what changes. Not only do you deserve more than you think you want; you deserve everything, for everything was given you, and you will never be content with less than that.

^VII I am blessed because God created me through His blessing. This is irrevocable, as is everything God creates; this, too, cannot change. I may tell myself whatever I please and believe it, but that cannot change reality. The only thing that can change, and indeed does change, are my opinions about myself and about everything, which proves their insubstantiality.

^VIII These five Lessons, so inspiring, are nevertheless quite difficult to accept from our human perspective of identification with false personal identities. But that is precisely the reason we are doing this Course: to change the idea we have about ourselves.

I will feel as holy as I allow myself to feel, and as I see myself, so will I see everything else. What I behold with benevolent eyes will confirm the holiness I have granted myself. It is a virtuous circle of positive affirmations grounded in a truth I still find difficult to recognize, but which will become more evident as I practice it.

If these five maximalist ideas seem excessive to you because they confront too sharply the image you hold of yourself, do not give up. Use them, but moderate them a degree: instead of reading “holiness,” read “goodness,” and perhaps they will then seem more acceptable to you. Remember: the important thing is not that you come to see yourself as holy—though you are—but that you move in that direction.

If you are still unable to recognize holiness in yourself, at least improve the opinion you hold about others and about the world. Stop thinking about yourself and focus only on the good, on the positive aspects of everything around you. Be grateful to God, to others, and to life, and thus, without realizing it, you will end up reconciling with yourself.

Today we review the following: W-31 to W-35

1. W-31 “I am not the victim of the world I see.” ^I

²How can I be the victim of a world that can be entirely undone by my decision?

³My chains are loosened.

⁴I can drop them off just by desiring to do so.

⁵The prison door is open.

⁶I can leave simply by walking out.

⁷Nothing holds me in this world.

⁸Only my wish to stay keeps me a prisoner.

⁹I would give up these insane desires and walk into the sunlight at last.

2. W-32 “I have invented the world I see.”^II

²I made up the prison in which I see myself.

³Only by recognizing this will I be free.

⁴I have deceived myself into believing it is possible to imprison the Son of God.

⁵I was bitterly mistaken in this belief, but I do not want to continue believing it.

⁶The Son of God must be forever free.

⁷He is as God created him, and not what I would make of him.

⁸He is where God would have him be, and not where I tried to hold him prisoner.

3. W-33 “There is another way of looking at the world.” ^III

²Since the purpose of the world is not the one I ascribed to it, there must be another way of looking at it.

³I see everything upside down, and my thoughts are the opposite of truth.

⁴I see the world as a prison for the Son of God.

⁵Then the world must really be a place where he can be set free.

⁶I would look upon the world as it is, and see it as a place where the Son of God finds his freedom.

4. W-34 “I could see peace instead of this.”^IV

²When I see the world as a place of freedom, I will realize it reflects the Laws of God instead of the rules I made up for it to obey.

³I will understand that peace, not war, abides in it.

⁴And I will perceive that peace also abides in the hearts of all who share this place with me.

5. W-35 “My mind is part of God’s. I am very holy.” ^V

²As I share the peace of the world with my brothers, I begin to understand that this peace comes from deep within myself.

³The world I look upon reflects the light of my forgiveness and returns that light to me.

⁴In this light I begin to see what the illusions I held about myself were hiding.

⁵Now I begin to understand the holiness of all living things, including myself, and their oneness with me.

---

^I You are only a victim of yourself: of your own interpretations, of the stories you tell yourself. Take a close look: you spend all your time chattering with yourself in your mind. You sustain your particular description of the world with that incessant talk that consumes you. Observe that compulsive and unstoppable dialogue well: it never ceases. You cannot stop it. It is an endless story you repeat to yourself all the time, reflecting the fears and desires of your ego. It is riddled with small or large resentments and revenges, with small or large gestures through which your ego expresses its sense of grandiosity, retaliation, and vainglory. None of that is you. It is nothing but an immense foolishness that keeps you hypnotized in a nonexistent world.

This is what Jesus refers to when he says in Lesson 10: “My thoughts do not mean anything.” You may know someone who suffers from logorrhea and speaks compulsively and incessantly. They are unaware of others and do not use their words to communicate anything to anyone. They are utterly insensitive to the needs or interests of those before them. Their minds work very, very poorly. It is the tiresome and pitiful monologue of drunkards.

And the same thing happens to you, except that you do not usually voice aloud that boring narrative. Keep in mind that while you are telling yourself all that nonsense—those stories engendered from apparent affronts and desires of the past—you are missing the present right before you. That is why your mind “is preoccupied with past thoughts”; that is why “you have invented the world you see.”

To stop the internal dialogue and to see with innocent eyes what lies before you is a prodigious feat that you are completely incapable of achieving; but if you ask for it with your whole heart, it will be granted. To approach it, you can begin first by becoming aware of that compulsive chatter, which is really a monologue. As soon as you notice it, it will cease, but after a while, without realizing it, it will return. Then, notice it again, and it will once more stop. Do not despair; on the contrary, rejoice. You are simply beginning to become aware of how the ego functions in your mind. This is, no doubt, an unpleasant perception, but it will affect you only if you identify with it. In reality, you are beginning to disassociate yourself from that sickly way of using your mind.

Forgive that dialogue you hold with yourself; let it pass, do not judge it or condemn it: it is not real. In fact, that voice you hear has nothing to do with you; that is not who you are. Yet the discourse contains, woven within itself, the notion that what you hear comes from you and are your own thoughts. And, in truth, it is not so; but that is the reason why it is so hard for you to let it go.

^II My mind knows only the stories it tells itself about everything. The world does not exist, but my mind tells itself a story about a world it imagines, just as it does while it sleeps and says it dreams. My mind invents worlds without end. At times, I recognize that those worlds I imagine are fantasies, but most of the time, the stories I tell myself bear a label that says: “This is real.” Once I have read that label and believed what it says, I am utterly lost to truth, and only suffering will lead me to seek an alternative.

Yet suffering is not necessary at all. Train and discipline your mind to systematically forgive the ego’s narrative.

^III Indeed there is another way of seeing the world, but it is not up to me to say what it is. In fact, I find myself now in a pitiful situation precisely because I assigned myself that role of deciding what the world is. I do not know, but I will be told. It is a knowledge that will surface in my mind when I simply allow it.

^IV Of course! Peace is an absolutely real concept; conflict, however, is an invention. Be radical about this. It is a non-negotiable reality. Always refuse conflictive interpretations; they are unreal and you do not want them.

^V This is the only truth. Dare to embrace it, even if only for an instant, and you will have opened the doors of your release. Familiarize yourself with this idea, and it does not matter if you do not yet believe it.

The best way, the fastest and most effective way to embrace it is to ascribe holiness to others. Set your will on seeing your brother as holy, even if your mind and your gut reject the idea. Insist on it with absolute determination.

You may be certain that, in time, your efforts will be rewarded, and you will begin to see the world and everyone in it with benevolent eyes, and at the end of it all, even yourself.

Today we review the following: W-26 to W-30

1. W-26 “My attack thoughts are attacking my invulnerability.” ^I

²How can I know who I am when I see myself under constant attack?

³Pain, sickness, loss, aging, and death seem to threaten me.

⁴All my hopes, desires, and plans appear to be at the mercy of a world I cannot control.

⁵Yet perfect safety and complete fulfillment are my inheritance.

⁶I have tried to exchange my inheritance for the world I see. ^II

⁷But God has safeguarded it for me.

⁸My own real Thoughts will teach me what it is.

2. W-27 “Above all else I want to see.” ^III

²By recognizing that what I see reflects what I think I am, I realize that Vision is my greatest need.

³The world I see bears witness to the fearful nature of the image I have made of myself.

⁴If I am to remember who I am, it is essential that I let this image of myself go.

⁵When it is replaced by truth, Vision will surely be given me.

⁶And with that Vision, I will look upon the world and on myself with gentleness and love.

3. W-28 “Above all else I want to see things differently.”^IV

²The world I see maintains the fearful image I have of myself and ensures its continuation.

³As long as I see the world as I see it now, the truth cannot enter my awareness.

⁴I will let the door behind this world be opened to me, so I may look past it to the world that reflects the Love of God.

4. W-29 “God is in everything I see.” ^V

²Behind every image I have made, the truth remains unchanged.

³Behind every veil I have drawn across the face of Love, its Light remains untouched.

⁴Beyond all my insane desires is my will, united with the Will of my Father.

⁵God is still everywhere and in everything forever.

⁶And we who are part of Him will look past all appearances and recognize the truth beyond them all.

5. W-30 “God is in everything I see because God is in my mind.” ^VI

²In my own mind, behind all my insane thoughts of separation and attack, is the knowledge that all is one forever.

³I have not lost the knowledge of who I am because I have forgotten it.

⁴That knowledge has been kept for me in the Mind of God, Who has not left His Thoughts.

⁵And I, who am among them, am one with them and One with Him.

---

^I To feel vulnerable—that is, to think that you can lose or that something of real value to you can be diminished—undermines the very foundation of trust, which is the fundamental characteristic of God’s teachers. You cannot lose anything real, for everything real was given you by God forever, and this cannot change throughout all eternity.

Yet it is evident that you can be confused about what you are and tell yourself something else. Hence this Course is summed up in the recognition that “Nothing real can be threatened.” Remember that “only your own thoughts can affect you,” and your thoughts of attack and condemnation—which are the same—certainly endanger the idea you hold of yourself in your mind.

In truth, your attacks and condemnations cannot in any way change your true condition as the Son of God, but they do affect your fictitious identity, which is all you know while you believe you are in time. Forgiveness, and even prayer as you now understand it, serve to heal that small part of your holy mind in which your ego resides. That part of your mind is absolutely real, but what it conceives is not.

The purpose of this Course is precisely to heal that. The part of your mind where the Holy Spirit dwells needs no healing.

^II In Genesis 25:29–34 we read the story of Esau, who gives up his inheritance in exchange for a bowl of lentils. In this case, your inheritance is the “perfect safety and complete fullness” of Heaven, which you have tried to relinquish in exchange for the world you now behold.

^III This is a very serious statement. It expresses the firm will to place true vision before everything to which you assign value in this world. To say this from the heart is the expression of a deep longing; it is the true “spiritual call.” With this—as with everything—you must be very honest.

Vision is unfailingly granted to all who desire it with their whole heart, and in this there are no exceptions. If you do not truly see the Love of God underlying all things, it is because you prefer to see something else. Your lack of honesty, your resistance to recognizing your true desires, is what leads you to attack this Course, which is perfectly honest; you are not.

Honesty is a basic characteristic of God’s teachers; in fact, it is the first within time. Without honesty, nothing can be done. Work on it before all else and ask yourself if, in truth, vision is the most important thing for you. If it is not, it is probably best for you to plunge into the world and try to attain what you consider more important than seeing. Soon you will see that it was a mistake, and you will begin to understand the importance of vision for freeing your mind from the inevitable suffering you will encounter.

It is always better to turn back on your path with your eyes open than to go forward with your eyes closed, deceiving yourself. But this is not necessary. Deep within your heart there is a profound longing to enjoy your rightful heritage. Persevere with humility and trust in finding it, and it will not be hard, for it is what lies behind all your worldly desires. You do indeed want that, but you are a little confused.

^IV This is the thought that must arise in your mind whenever your heart indicates, through its unease, that you are misusing your mind. You ask for a new interpretation of the dream you are immersed in because the one your ego has given you makes you suffer. You are perfectly within your rights to do so, and it is what serves you best. If you do not, what you will hear next is the ego’s proposal to “fix” that situation, and that will inevitably lead you to disaster… as it always has.

^V Only the innocent, those who know themselves to be sinless, can see God in all things. Those who condemn themselves see only their own “sins” all around them. Do not condemn yourself or condemn others; it is not worth it, it harms you, and it serves no purpose but to make you suffer. Forgive, and you will see God.

^VI You may be absolutely certain that this is so; the issue is that you have reserved a part of your mind for yourself alone. What has led you to this is your own sense of personal importance. The idea you have of yourself is not important, for it is absolutely false; do not uphold, support, or defend it. In the very instant you abandon all sense of personal importance, you will become utterly unreachable by suffering and enjoy the safety and peace of the truly humble.

Today we review the following: W-21 to W-25 ^I

1. W-21 “I am determined to see things differently.”^II

²What I now see are only signs of sickness, disaster, and death.

³This cannot be what God created for His beloved Son.^III

⁴The very fact that I see such things proves that I do not understand what God is.

⁵Therefore, I do not understand what His Son is either.

⁶What I am seeing shows me that I do not know who I am.^IV

⁷I am determined to see the witnesses to the truth in me, rather than those that show me an illusion of myself.

2. W-22 “What I see is a form of vengeance.”^V

²The world I see is certainly not a picture of loving thoughts.

³It is an image in which everything attacks everything.^VI

⁴It is anything but a reflection of the Love of God and the Love of His Son.

⁵It is my own thoughts of attack that produce this image.

⁶My loving thoughts will save me from this perception of the world and bring me the peace God intended me to have.

3. W-23 “I can escape from the world by giving up attack thoughts.”

²In this, and only this, lies my salvation.

³Without attack thoughts, I could not see a world of attack.

⁴As forgiveness allows love to return to my awareness, I will see a world of peace, safety, and joy.^VII

⁵And this is what I choose to see, instead of what I look upon now.

4. W-24 “I do not perceive my own best interests.”^VIII

²How can I recognize what is in my best interests when I do not know who I am?

³What I think is in my best interests would only bind me further to the world of illusions.

⁴I am willing to follow the Guide God has given me, to learn what is truly in my best interests, for I recognize that I cannot perceive it by myself.

5. W-25 “I do not know what anything is for.”

²To me, the purpose of all things is to prove that my illusions about myself are real.^IX

³With this in mind, I try to use everything and everyone.

⁴I believe that this is what the world is for.

⁵And so I fail to recognize its true purpose.

⁶The purpose I have given the world has led me to see it as a fearful place.

⁷Let me open my mind to its true purpose by withdrawing the one I have given it, and thus learn the truth about the world.

---

^I The five ideas from the reviews can be combined to build meaningful sentences, phrased as you like. For example, today you could say: “I want to see everything differently, because it is evident that what I see now is a form of vengeance, but I am sure I can escape from this wicked world I perceive simply by relinquishing my condemning judgments. It is also perfectly clear that I never perceive what is in my best interests, and this must be so because, in truth, I do not know what anything is for.”

Formulating the ideas of this Course in your own terms, as you understand them, is a very powerful learning tool; it greatly helps to make them your own and incorporate them into your thought system. This is a resource Jesus frequently proposes to us, and its effectiveness lies in the fact that, in doing so, instead of simply learning the Course, you teach it—though in this case, to yourself. Throughout the Course it is repeated that teaching and learning are the same, and that when you teach an idea, you strengthen it in your mind.

It is well to remember that your thoughts are under the Guidance of Christ, but not under His control. This means they are solely and exclusively under your own control. In fact, only you control your mind, and since learning is changing the mind, only you can change yours. If you see this clearly, only you are capable of teaching yourself. Ultimately, this Course is a compendium of proposals to change your way of thinking.

Although the third volume of this work is called the Manual for Teachers, in reality, the entirety of the Course is a true manual for teachers—for you, teacher of yourself. Therefore, every effort you make by taking the content of this Course and transforming it, by putting it in your own words for yourself, will elevate the quality of your learning and take the teaching to a new dimension.

^II This is the famous phrase that Bill said to Helen which gave rise to the appearance of this Course in the world.

Jesus found in the minds of the scribes, united in a shared purpose of salvation, the ideal channel to convey His true teaching to the world.

^III Matthew 3:17: “And behold, a voice from Heaven said, ‘This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased.’”

^IV I see what I want to see, and “to want” is to place the will in something. If that word existed in Spanish, we could say that “to want” is “to will.” And will is the function of the soul responsible for creating, that is, for extending its own existence. That is why, when we “create” in the illusion, we are projecting the idea we have about ourselves. Hence those who believe themselves innocent extend innocence, and those who feel guilty project their own guilt and see a guilty world.

^V I project outward my own guilt and resentments. The mind, being unable to tolerate the weight of its own guilt, throws it outward, constructing a world in which that guilt seems to pursue me. This is what the Course calls the “world’s vengeance”: the projection of my own wickedness upon everything around me, which then seems to attack me. It is a closed cycle: I project my guilt and, seeing it reflected in the world, I perceive it as an external threat. Thus I justify my fear and my defense, reinforcing the belief in a hostile and dangerous world. The world I see is, therefore, nothing but a mirror of my own attack thoughts. That is why, as I perceive it, it is “an image in which everything is attacked by everything.”

This projection mechanism is the same as what happens in night dreams. When dreaming, I visualize my fears and resentments, believing they threaten me from outside, when in fact they are creations of my own mind. The difference is that, upon waking, I recognize that they were not real, but mere projections of my sleeping mind.

In the same way, by practicing this Lesson, I begin to awaken from the world’s dream. I start to realize that the perception of attack and vengeance does not come from the world itself, but from my attack thoughts projected outward. Then I understand that the problem is not in the world, but in my mind.

The solution, therefore, does not consist in trying to change the world or defend myself from its apparent attacks, but in changing my thoughts. “My loving thoughts will save me from this perception of the world,” because by choosing loving thoughts instead of attack thoughts, I project love instead of guilt. This is what allows me to experience the peace that God intended me to have. By changing my perception, the world I see ceases to be a threat and becomes a reflection of my own love. Thus “what I see” ceases to be “a form of vengeance” and becomes a mirror of God’s Love and the Love of His Son.

^VI Because I have first attacked myself by defining myself as guilty.

^VII My forgiveness will let me see a forgiven world: the real world, an illusion that reflects the Love of God to the eyes of a mind still fragmented.

^VIII What is in my best interests is what I deserve. The problem here is that God and I have different ideas about that.

^IX “I do not know what anything is for.” This statement reveals the root of my ignorance: I have assigned meaning and purpose to everything I see in order to uphold my separate and false identity. I have done so without questioning it, believing that the world is here to confirm my illusions about myself. My unconscious purpose is to use everything and everyone to prove that my identity as a separate “self” is real. Thus I justify my personal existence, reinforcing my beliefs about what I am and how the world should be to maintain that sense of identity. Everything and everyone becomes a means to an end: to confirm that my view of myself and of the world is correct.

This egocentric use of everything I see leads me to perceive the world as a constant threat. Why? Because, by projecting my guilt and fear, I see a world that seems to conspire against me, that seems to attack me and challenge my identity constantly. In this way I build a terrifying image of the world, full of competition, conflict, loss, and death.

The purpose I have given the world is, therefore, to maintain my sense of separation. I have unconsciously decided that the world is here to prove to me that I am alone, vulnerable, and in need of defense. This forces me to live in a constant state of alert, seeing threats everywhere.

However, the world has no inherent purpose; every purpose I attribute to it comes from my mind. This is one of the most liberating teachings of A Course in Miracles: purpose is not in things, but in the mind that perceives them. Realizing this, I can choose to set aside the purpose I have projected onto the world.

“Let me open my mind to its true purpose by withdrawing the one I have given it.” This line reveals the path to freedom. Only when I stop projecting my own purposes onto the world can I learn the truth about it. Only then can I allow the Holy Spirit to show me the true purpose of all things: to reflect the Love of God.

The function of the world, according to A Course in Miracles, is to be a classroom. It is not here to confirm my illusions or to attack my identity. It is here so that I may learn to see differently, to learn to forgive, to learn to love. By withdrawing the purpose I have given it, I allow its true purpose to be shown to me, and in doing so, I transform my perception from fear to love.

This change of purpose is the miracle that the Course offers. By ceasing to use the world to confirm my separate identity and allowing it to become a classroom of forgiveness and love, I begin to remember who I truly am. Then the world ceases to be a prison and becomes a bridge to the peace of God.

Today we review the following ideas: W-16 to W-20

1. W-16 “I have no neutral thoughts.”

²It is impossible to have neutral thoughts because every thought has power.

³My thoughts either build a false world or lead me to the real one.

⁴But thoughts cannot be without effect.^I

⁵Just as the world I see arises from the errors in my thinking, so will the real world rise before my eyes when I allow my errors to be corrected.

⁶My thoughts cannot be both true and false.

⁷They must be one or the other.

⁸What I see shows me what they are.

2. W-17 “I see no neutral things.”^II

²What I see is a witness to what I think.

³If I did not think, I would not exist, for life is thought.^III

⁴Let me look upon the world I see as the reflection of my own state of mind.^IV

⁵I know that my state of mind can change.

⁶And so I know that the world I see can change as well.^V

3. W-18 “I am not alone in experiencing the effects of my seeing.”^VI

²If I have no private thoughts, I cannot see a private world.

³Even the wild idea of separation had to be shared before it could form the basis of the world I see.

⁴But that was a sharing of nothing.^VII

⁵I can also call upon my real Thoughts, which share everything with everyone.^VIII

⁶Just as my thoughts of separation call to the separation thoughts in others, so too do my real Thoughts awaken real Thoughts in them.

⁷And the world my real Thoughts show me will dawn upon their sight as well as mine.

4. W-19 “I am not alone in experiencing the effects of my thoughts.”

²I am not alone in anything.

³Everything I think, say, or do touches the whole universe.^IX

⁴A Son of God cannot think, speak, or act in vain.

⁵He cannot be alone in anything.

⁶Therefore, I have the power to change every mind along with mine, for mine is the Power of God.

5. W-20 “I am determined to see.”

²Recognizing the shared nature of my thoughts, I am determined to see.^X

³I want to behold the witnesses that show me the world’s way of thinking has been changed.

⁴I want to see the proof that what has happened through me has enabled Love to replace fear, laughter to replace tears, and abundance to replace loss.

⁵I want to look upon the real world, and let it teach me that my Will and the Will of God are One.^XI

---

^I The effect of a thought is the content of that thought—the idea it expresses.

Content, cause, and effect are simultaneous and the same.

Thoughts cannot fail to have effects because they are the expression of the will that sustains them. You have the thoughts you want to have because your will is the cause of everything you perceive.

The question here is: what is your will, Son of God? Remember, even more than a Course about forgiveness, this is a Course about will.

^II I do not see neutral things because will is never neutral; it is always positive and assertive.

It manifests what it wants to manifest.

^III This is a reference to Descartes’ famous principle: “I think, therefore I am,” only here it is stated in the negative: “If I did not think, I would not exist.”

Jesus comments that this had a positive effect on Descartes: “He no longer really questioned the reality of what he perceived, because he KNEW that he was there” (T-3.XI.11:6).

“Life is thought.” This idea is very difficult to grasp because it is very simple. It cannot be understood, but it can be known and experienced.

To live is to think; to think is to live. There is no life without thought, for without thought there is no reality; there is nothing.

And this is not understood by the mind that believes in the physical, though by now you have already learned that all you call “physical” is nothing but having conferred “non-ideal” attributes onto an idea within the mind itself.

The “physical,” the “material,” does not exist apart from the mind that conceives it, and the individual mind could not have conceived it, for it too remains an idea in the confused mind of the Son of God.

Being, Existence, God, Life… it is all the same: one idea. This idea can be considered from different perspectives and interpreted as different aspects, but from a strictly ontological point of view, all of It is the same, and the denial of that idea is nonexistence—what does not exist.

^IV This other idea, however, is fully functional.

The world is in my mind and is of my own making, but the ego always avoids assuming that responsibility.

Yet to assume it bestows upon the mind the natural power of the miracle: the power to transform illusion so that it reflects the Love of God underlying all that exists.

The mind can do all things because the mind is all there is, the only thing that exists.

^V Remember: to perceive is to project, so you will see what you want to see.

To understand and exercise this principle requires radical honesty.

^VI I am not the only one who experiences the effects of my way of seeing because those “others” I think I see are also the expression of my will, and I see them as I do because I want to see them that way.

^VII To share an idea that has no real content is not true sharing, and this gives rise to the notion that thoughts are private and minds are separate.

This is not true, but it can be believed by that part of the mind that considers it true.

You cannot share an idea that has no content and, consequently, no cause and no real effects.

That kind of idea can only operate within the realm of illusion.

^VIII My real Thoughts, or true ones, are those I share with God and with all the Souls that make up the Christ Body. Those Thoughts are the Creations of the Son of God and are like the Son and the Father.

However, understood within the realm of the illusory world, this means that only loving thoughts can be effectively shared, because only love is real.

On the other hand, my illusory thoughts, devoid of love, cannot be shared, but they can be “spread.” In that case, nothing is shared, though one may harbor the illusion that it has been.

Particular minds can harbor similar private illusions, but they will always be their own interpretations, distinct and exclusive. It will seem that I am communicating something when I do so, but in truth I am only stirring in that apparent other the same absences I experience, though in this case they are his own.

That is why in the following line the word “appeal” is used.

^IX It not only “affects” but actually “shapes” the universe I believe I live in.
That was already seen in the fourth line of the second paragraph.

^X That is to say, I want to see the Reality before me—the expression of God’s Love underlying this dream of fear I now believe I behold. I do not want to imagine the absences of love that the ego’s voice stirs in me. To see is to Know, and to Be and to Love. The fact that we share one mind is what makes true vision possible, the knowledge of what is real, the love we share.

^XI These five Lessons of today are an invitation to watch our mind and be attentive to what we think, since it is our thoughts that shape the reality we perceive and the image we have of ourselves. Yet this task is not exhausting; on the contrary, it is an energizing practice, for it frees you from clinging to a limited and depressing view of reality. What truly exhausts is paying attention to the weary and repetitive thoughts of the ego.

Today we review the following: W-11 to W-15

1. W-11 “My meaningless thoughts are showing me a meaningless world.”

²Because the thoughts I am aware of mean nothing, the world they show me cannot have meaning either.^I

³What gives rise to this world is insanity, and so the world it produces is insane.^II

⁴Reality is not insane, and I have both real and insane Thoughts.^III

⁵Therefore, I can see a real world if I choose to let my real Thoughts guide my seeing.^IV

2. W-12 “I am upset because I see a meaningless world.”^V

²Insane thoughts are disturbing, and they produce a world where no order can be found.

³Only chaos rules a world that mirrors a chaotic way of thinking, and chaos has no laws.

⁴I cannot live in peace in such a world.

⁵I am grateful that this world is not real, and that I need not see it at all unless I choose to give it value.^VI

⁶And I choose not to value what is wholly mad and without meaning.

3. W-13 “A meaningless world engenders fear.”

²What is wholly insane engenders fear, because it is completely unpredictable and offers no trust.^VII

³In madness, nothing is dependable.

⁴It offers neither safety nor hope.

⁵But such a world is not real.

⁶I have given it the illusion of reality, and I have suffered because I believed in it.

⁷Now I choose to withdraw my belief from it and place my trust in Reality.^VIII

⁸By making this choice, I will escape all the effects of a fearful world, because I am recognizing that such a world does not exist.

4. W-14 “God did not create a meaningless world.”^IX

²How can a meaningless world exist if God did not create it?

³He is the Source of all meaning, and everything real is in His Mind.

⁴It is also in my mind, because He created it with me.

⁵Why should I continue to suffer from the effects of my own insane thoughts, when my home is the perfection of Creation? ^X

⁶Let me remember the power of my decision and recognize where I truly dwell.

5. W-15 “My thoughts are images I have made.”

²Everything I see reflects my thoughts.^XI

³It is my thoughts that tell me where I am and what I am.

⁴The fact that I see a world of suffering, loss, and death shows me that I am seeing only the image of my own insane thoughts, and that I am not allowing my real Thoughts to cast their loving light on what I see.^XII

⁵But God’s way is sure.

⁶The images I have made cannot prevail against Him, because it is not my will that they do so.^XIII

⁷My will is His, and I will have no other gods before Him.^XIV

---

^I To understand this, it is key to remember that to perceive is to project. The only thing I see, what I call “the world,” is nothing but my own thoughts projected onto the screen of my conscience. And since those thoughts, in truth, have no meaning, what I believe I see—the world—has none either. That is the truth. Yet, if I am honest with myself, I must admit that my mind does not function that way in practice. To me, the world is full of meaning, and although I am willing to recognize—with great effort—that I am the one who has assigned those meanings, the world I live in still seems profoundly meaningful to me.

Think of this: you are on the bus, standing, reading on your phone the Lesson of the day from this blessed Course, which happens to be Lesson 11: “My meaningless thoughts are showing me a meaningless world.” You think you understand it and are willing to accept that what it says is true. But then someone bumps into you, your phone falls to the floor, and suddenly you are filled with anger. Five seconds earlier, you had assumed that the world means nothing, and yet a small incident is enough for your old thought system to spring instantly into action, implicitly acknowledging that, in fact, even the tiniest trifle has enormous importance to you.

That is why, in practicing these Lessons, it is essential to be honest and realistic. Understand and accept the enormous distance between knowing the statement of truth and fully embracing it. That distance is called learning, and like any process, it requires time, patience, trust, and unwavering determination.

Your main challenge with this Course is not to understand what it says, nor even to recognize it as true, but to find the motivation to apply it at every moment and in every circumstance. But remember this: only accomplishments build certainty, and that certainty is essential for consolidating your learning.

^II My insane thoughts, insane because they are generated without love, give rise to an insane world, equally devoid of love.

The opposite is also true: my loving thoughts will let me see a world full of love. My thoughts are the cause, and the world is the effect.

^III Reality is the Thoughts I think with God, my Creations.

^IV When I rely on my real Thoughts to interpret reality, I see only love, beauty, and peace, which is what I have created with God.

^V It deeply disturbs me to see a world that has no meaning because that is utterly at odds with my true identity as the Son of God, which is pure meaning, love, and infinite peace.

^VI To give value to the world I behold is what makes it real, but only to me, for in itself that world I see has no reality; it is only the product of my imagination.

I have invented it, I, the Son of God, in the same way that I have invented a spurious personality for myself.

^VII Meaninglessness is the opposite of knowledge, just as fear is the opposite of love.

^VIII This is the same as saying that, from now on, I choose only to think the Thoughts I share with God, and I will know how to distinguish them from the others because they inspire me with peace, love, and security.

^IX Only a demented god could have created a world that means nothing, but such a thing would not even be possible, because that would not be creation, but belief; the fabrication of illusions.

This is how the part of the Son of God’s mind that believes itself separated from its Father operates; that is its demented god in an impossible equation.

^X Of course, that makes no sense and would be madness; nevertheless, that is how those who stubbornly cling to their false identities, separate and independent from God’s reality, think: the people who have come to dwell in a demented world.

^XI My thoughts shape that incessant inner dialogue with which I tell myself a fantastic story of lacks, sins, guilt, grudges, desires, and vengeance.

Although, from time to time, a loving thought also slips in among them, and then I breathe a sigh of relief.

^XII Yet, in that desperate situation, sometimes a thought of forgiveness arises; at times I behold my brothers with tenderness and mercy, and then my heart leaps with joy: the light has come, and the world timidly reflects the Love of God.

I need no other guide than that to know that, in those moments, I am in my Right Mind; the madness has lifted, and now I can truly see.

What other guide do I need?

^XIII Matthew 16:18: “You are Peter, and on this rock I will build my church, and the gates of hell shall not prevail against it.”

^XIV Exodus 20:3: “You shall have no other gods before Me.”

Today’s review covers the following ideas: W-6 to W-10

1. W-6 “I am upset because I see what is not there.”^I

²Reality is never frightening.^II

³It is impossible that it could upset me.

⁴Reality brings only perfect peace.

⁵When I am upset, it is always because I have replaced reality with illusions I made up.

⁶Illusions disturb me because I have given them reality; therefore, I see reality as an illusion.

⁷Nothing in God’s Creation is affected in any way by this confusion of mine.

⁸I am always upset over nothing.^III

2. W-7 “I see only the past.” ^IV

²When I look around, I condemn the world I look upon.

³And I call that seeing.

⁴I use the past against everyone and everything, and thus I turn them into my “enemies.”

⁵When I have forgiven myself and remembered who I am, I will bless everyone and everything I see.

⁶There will be no past, and therefore no “enemies.”

⁷And I will look with God upon all that I failed to see before.

3. W-8 “My mind is preoccupied with past thoughts.”^V

²I see only my own thoughts, and my mind is preoccupied with the past.

³What, then, can I see as it is?

⁴Let me remember that I look upon the past to prevent the present from dawning in my mind.^VI

⁵Let me understand that I am trying to use time against God.^VII

⁶Let me learn to give up the past, realizing that in doing so I am letting go of nothing.

4. W-9 “I see nothing as it is now.”^VIII

²If I see nothing as it is now, then truly I am not seeing at all.

³I can only see what is here now.

⁴The choice is not between seeing the past or the present; it is simply between seeing or not seeing.

⁵What I have chosen to see has cost me Vision.

⁶Now I would choose again, that I may see.

5. W-10 “My thoughts do not mean anything.”^IX

²I have no private thoughts.

³Yet I am aware only of my private thoughts.

⁴What can these thoughts mean?

⁵They do not exist; therefore, they mean nothing.

⁶But my mind is part of Creation and of its Creator.

⁷Would I not rather join the thinking of the universe, than obscure all that is really mine with my pitiful “private” thoughts that mean nothing?

---

^I I see “what is not there” because, in truth, I only relate to my own interpretations, the stories I tell myself, which are nowhere but in my mind, for being ideas, they have never left the source from which they came. Out there there is nothing, because there is nothing outside my mind, since my mind, which is God’s, is all that exists. What disturbs me is not anything “out there,” but the story I have just told myself, which is the story of a disturbance.

^II I do not yet know this, because I do not remember what “Reality” is, and this is because I have forgotten it by replacing it with the voice of the ego, that which I have called “my thoughts.” Now my mind finds itself in a kind of “hypnotic” state, gazing at images I am projecting onto the screen of my conscience. Something like watching a movie at the cinema. Reality is Existence, a perfect abstraction that we can interpret in its three aspects of Love, Truth, and Power, the divine triad. To exist is an absolutely satisfying condition that inspires not fear, but certainty, love, and infinite power.

^III It is nothing because it is an illusion that has no being in itself; it is the symbol of an impossible idea: the notion of being an individual entity separate from God. And what I say I see is nothing but the “story” I am telling myself.

^IV “I see only the past” because my mind relates only to meanings I assigned in the past, and the forms I believe I see are symbols of those ancient meanings. It is exactly the same as in night dreams, where everything I see is nothing but formulations of meanings I myself attributed in the past.

^V The verb “To preoccupy” is very peculiar, since it means to concern oneself with something before dealing with it, which is absurd. It is a concept that refers to the mental state preceding the decision to act.

For the mind to be absorbed in that “pre-occupation” implies an awareness that something must be changed because it is “wrong,” or at least could be “better.” The perception of that need to change something always entails a certain uneasiness and discomfort—the motivation—that can become very sharp.

In truth, to pre-occupy oneself is nothing other than to suffer while contemplating in fear and helplessness a demand for life’s response that exceeds what you consider yourself capable of.

^VI It is important to understand that the mind cannot handle two things simultaneously: either it occupies itself with the past, or it occupies itself with the present. One must choose between those two sole options.

You tend to choose the past because that is where sin and guilt are found, and dealing with them is the ego’s perverse pleasure. In the innocence of the present, the ego dissolves. Guilt is what guarantees the ego’s continuity. The innocence of the present is the price you pay for being absorbed in the past.

^VII Time, in its imaginary aspects of past and future, is the gesture the mind makes to separate itself from concepts it denies itself access to.

God is real and exists only in the real aspect of time: the present.

^VIII The fundamental characteristics of the present are innocence and peace; the perfect absence of guilt and threat.

The present is always perfectly satisfying. If it is not, it is clear evidence that you are contemplating the past or anticipating the future, the nonexistent aspects of time.

^IX Again the idea of Lesson 4 is repeated. It is a crucial idea in the paradigm of this Course. So important is it that it is impossible to be too aware of it, for it is constantly forgotten.

Realize that the mind was created to behold the truth; that is why it considers true whatever appears before it, whether reality or illusion. The mind always tends to regard as truthful what it beholds; hence forgiving is the undoing of that mental impulse.

To forgive, at bottom, is to undo an understandable error, for the mind must deal with strange and improper forms arising from an utterly false primordial idea: that you are separate from God. Once your mind has accepted that monumental error, it is inevitable that phantoms will arise from it, and your poor mind, accustomed to truth, is inevitably deceived by those offspring of madness.

So whenever something disturbs you, remember that the thought which gave rise to that unease—the voice of the ego within you—really means nothing. Forgive it, do not hold it against yourself, and behold the present with the love it deserves.

Introduction

1. Today we begin a series of review sessions.^I

²Each one will cover five of the ideas presented earlier, starting with the first and ending with the fiftieth.

³Each idea is followed by a brief comment, which you should consider as you review it.

⁴The exercises are to be practiced as follows:

2. Begin the day by reading the five ideas and the accompanying comments.

²After that, there is no need to follow a specific order in how you think about them, although each one should be practiced at least once.

³Spend two minutes or more in each practice period reflecting on the idea and its related comment.

⁴Do this as often as you can throughout the day.

⁵If one of the five ideas appeals to you more than the others, focus on that one.

⁶But be sure to review them all once more at the end of the day.

3. There is no need to approach the comments in a literal or exhaustive way during the practice periods.

²Try instead to grasp the central point of each idea and think about it.^II

³These review exercises should be done with your eyes closed and, if possible, when you are alone in a quiet place.

4. This is especially important for the practice periods at your current stage of learning.

²However, it is equally important that you begin to learn not to require any special setting in order to apply what you have learned.

³In fact, you will need to apply it even more in situations that seem disturbing than in those that appear quiet and peaceful.

⁴The purpose of your learning is to enable you to bring stillness with you wherever you go and to heal distress and turmoil.

⁵This is not achieved by avoiding difficult situations or seeking a place of seclusion.

5. You will learn that Peace is part of you, and only requires your presence to bring peace to any situation in which you find yourself.

²Eventually, you will understand that it does not matter at all where you are in order to see your Peace reflected in everything, just as it is within you.^III

6. You will notice that in this review, the ideas are not always presented in the exact form in which they were originally given.

²Use them as they are presented now.

³There is no need to return to their original formulations or to apply them exactly as was suggested at the time.

⁴What we emphasize now is the way in which these first fifty ideas are related and the consistency of the thought system to which they lead you.

---

^I Notice the pedagogy that Jesus is applying in this Workbook. First of all, repetition. When the idea to be practiced during the day is first presented, you are asked to repeat it, bringing it to mind with a certain frequency throughout the day. The reason for this is that, figuratively speaking, for a given stimulus to become a specific response, a particular behavior, or interpretation, it must travel a certain path through the impenetrable jungle of your mind. That is why it is necessary to open a trail between those two points and keep it open, accessible, and familiar by walking it many times. In this way, traveling through it becomes easy and familiar.

Now, with this review, we once again walk the path we have not taken for several weeks, and thus we make sure that we know the way well. But this time we make the journey somewhat differently. Now Jesus adds a new resource: we use different vehicles to travel it, we use slightly different words, and He even encourages us to use the ones that come to us. This way we learn that the wording of the idea is not some kind of magic spell, but that what really matters is the concept the words convey. Thus, we learn to distinguish between form and content.

^II Perhaps this is the most important part of the exercise: try to understand the essence of what Jesus is attempting to convey with each idea. Try to express it in your own words, or better still, try to reach the concept itself without any word crossing your mind; try to reach the essence of the idea through a feeling. If you are able to understand the idea without words, then you have truly understood it.

From there, do not treat the idea as a statement or formulation; remain with the pure understanding and recognize that this understanding is the truth. This is the most effective way to incorporate it into your thought system as something functional.

Understand that a thought system is not a set of ideas that must necessarily be formulated in a certain way. It is true that it can be described that way, but also in many others. A thought system, in itself, is a specific “position” of the mind, a mental paradigm; it is a way of using the mind, or rather, the way your mind approaches what it perceives or conceives.

^III Take these last lines very much to heart. Remember that this is a Course in mind training. In reality, it is training for the “lower” part of your mind; the other part needs no training, for it is the dwelling place of the Holy Spirit and functions perfectly in eternity. What you are doing now is simply cleaning and ordering the house where the ego dwells, although perhaps it would be more accurate to say that what you are doing with these practices is expelling the ego from that part of your holy mind where it had shamelessly settled. It has no right to be there. You are simply getting rid of an extraordinarily troublesome and disturbing tenant.

You can also interpret the situation in an even more appropriate way. Understand that the ego, in reality, does not exist; it is no one and nothing—it is only a poor way of using your mind. In this Course the term “ego” is used with a purely didactic purpose and as a learning device, but the ego has no entity whatsoever. That is why, when you read of “wrong-mindedness,” it is really referring to the ego: the wrong way of using your holy mind. The problem is that, for now, it is the only one you know; the other way you hardly remember at all, but you certainly yearn for it.

In this process of “cleaning and ordering” your house, it is essential that you use the resources provided as often as possible and, above all, whenever you face a disturbing situation, a problem, or an upset. Remember the introduction to Chapter 30: “These steps are not new to you, but they are still only ideas, and not the rules by which you live. Therefore, we must practice them for a while until they become the rules by which you live. What we are seeking is that these rules become habits to be available for ANY need” (T-30.I.1:6-8).

LESSON 51

Today’s review covers the following ideas: W-1 to W-5 ^I

1. W-1 “Nothing I see means anything.”

²The reason this is so is that I am seeing what is nothing, and nothing has no meaning.^II

³I must recognize this in order to learn how to see.

⁴What I think I see now has taken the place of Vision.

⁵I must let it go by recognizing that it means nothing, so that Vision may take its place.

2. W-2 “I have given everything I see all the meaning it has for me.”^III

²I have judged everything I look upon.

³And it is this, and only this, that I see.

⁴That is not seeing.

⁵It is merely an illusion of reality, because I have made my judgments entirely apart from Reality.

⁶I am willing to acknowledge the invalidity of my judgments because I want to see.

⁷My judgments have hurt me, and I do not want to see through them any longer.

3. W-3 “I do not understand anything I see.”

²How can I understand what I see when I have misjudged it?

³What I see is the projection of my own errors of thought. ⁴I do not understand what I see because it is not understandable.^IV

⁵There is no point in trying to understand it.

⁶And yet it is entirely reasonable to let it go, to make room for what can be seen, understood, and loved.^V

⁷I can exchange what I see now for that, simply by being willing to do so.

⁸Is this not a better choice than the one I made before?

4. W-4 “These thoughts do not mean anything.”^VI

²The thoughts I am aware of do not mean anything because I am trying to think without God.

³What I call “my” thoughts are not my real Thoughts.^VII

⁴My real Thoughts are the Thoughts I think with God.

⁵I am not aware of them because I have allowed “my” own thoughts to take their place.

⁶I am willing to recognize that “my” thoughts mean nothing and to let them go.

⁷I choose to replace them with what they were meant to replace.

⁸“My” own thoughts mean nothing, but all of Creation resides in the Thoughts I think with God.^VIII

5. W-5 “I am never upset for the reason I think.”

²I am never upset for the reason I think because I am constantly trying to justify “my” own thoughts.

³I am constantly trying to make them true.

⁴I make everything my “enemy” so I can justify my anger and my attacks.^IX

⁵I have not realized how much I have misused everything I see by assigning this role to my thoughts.

⁶I did this to defend a thought system that has hurt me and that I no longer want.

⁷I am willing to let it go.

---

^I Helen was a somewhat finicky editor and disliked the idea of repeating the review lesson subtitles. That is why Jesus offered her a different formulation for each one.

^II This line explains very well what is happening in your mind. Nothing you see means anything because, in truth, you are not seeing anything at all; you are only projecting images onto the screen of your conscience, and you call that “seeing.” What you believe you see is nothing but an illusion, except that your mind has labeled what it has conceived as “something” or “things.” It has also applied the labels “outside me” and “reality.” And, to complete the process, it has assigned an even longer label describing their function: “what this thing is for.”

What appears on all those labels is not exactly “false,” but rather “fictitious,” entirely whimsical and arbitrary. Of all the labels, the one that harms you the most is the one that says “real,” because that is precisely the one that leaves you utterly confused and the one that most hurts you. If you had not placed that label, nothing could affect or disturb you, and you would understand that everything is the product of your fertile imagination, of your capacity to create imaginary worlds—a kind of artistic production.

^III This should be obvious, even to you, as you begin studying this Course. Surely you notice that you interpret the present moment very differently from the person next to you, still more differently than the dog accompanying you, not to mention the ant you just stepped on, for example. In truth, you are not relating to anything but your own interpretations of what you perceive.

Moreover, what you perceive is not even “outside” you; it is in your mind, just like what you call “my body” and the idea you have of yourself. Though this may frighten you somewhat, all of it is fictitious. Yet there is no reason for fear; if you feel afraid, it is a sign that you are doing the exercises correctly.

However, if working with these ideas does not stir up at least a certain uneasiness, it may be that you are not yet fully grasping their meaning. Do not be troubled by this, but seek to go deeper into the true sense of what is being proposed to you.

^IV Of course you do not understand anything you see! In fact, you do not even understand what it means “to understand,” since you confuse it with “remembering” your own interpretations and judgments. Yet, if you engage in a small exercise of honesty, you will notice that once you remove from what you see all the “labels” you yourself have placed there, your mind is left blank. Then what you behold evokes nothing that comes from you.

In reality, the only real aspect of the contents of your mind is the love it manifests.

^V To understand this line, it may help you to take a quick look at Lesson 29.

^VI The magnitude of what this idea implies is such that it can hardly be expressed in words, for the idea itself denies and undermines words altogether. Moreover, if you recall, the idea is reiterated and reinforced in Lesson 10 with a similar statement. This is one of the many devastating declarations for the ego that the student of this Course usually admits and accepts lightly, without major consequences in his personal life.

Perhaps you consider yourself a student of A Course in Miracles, perhaps you say you accept its postulates and are dedicated to its reading; you may even try to practice it with all the honesty of which you are capable, yet you have probably noticed that problems keep arising. Your old thought system has its own inertia and resists change. And that is normal. Do not worry about it. Persevere and trust.

Understand that, although change could be instantaneous, it usually involves a process that unfolds over time. Also remember that, ultimately, your old thought system will not change itself. That is impossible. Jesus tells you that the final step is taken by God. It is up to you to do what you can to create the conditions for this to happen as soon as possible—nothing more.

^VII Realize that what you call “my” thoughts is nothing but the ego’s voice in your mind. Do not be afraid to set aside that insidious voice and relinquish those thoughts of “yours.” Do not be possessive, for that greedy impulse is precisely the effect of the ego in your mind. You cannot lose anything real; do not forget that.

^VIII “The thoughts I think with God” are Creation itself, all of Creation, and the only thing that exists, in other words, Reality.

^IX Do not judge yourself harshly for thinking this way and functioning in this manner. You must realize that you do so because, though you may not acknowledge it, you are deeply frightened; you are very afraid. The profound terror you feel, but conceal from yourself, is so intolerable that you cannot endure it within and try to rid yourself of it by projecting it outward in angry forms. Your attacks on your brothers, and theirs on you, are nothing but this: the projection of an unbearable fear. Both they and you, in truth, are asking for help in that difficult situation. Forgive yourself for this, and forgive them as well. Only forgiveness and prayer will save you. Remember that it does not matter where you are; what matters is where you are headed.

The Love of God sustains me.

1. Here is the answer to every problem you will face today, tomorrow, and throughout time.

²You believe that what sustains you in this world is anything but God.

³You place your faith in the most trivial and insane symbols: in pills, in money, in “protective” clothing, in “influence,” in “prestige,” in being liked by others, in knowing the “right” people—an endless list of forms that are nothing, to which you assign magical powers.

2. All these things are your replacements for the Love of God.^I

²You give them value to ensure your identification with the body.

³They are hymns of praise to the ego.

⁴Do not put your faith in what is worthless; it cannot sustain you.

3. Only the Love of God will protect you in all circumstances.

²It will lift you out of every difficulty and raise you above all the dangers you perceive in this world to a place of perfect peace and safety.

³It will carry you to a state of mind in which nothing can threaten, disturb, or interfere with the eternal calm of the Son of God.

4. Do not place your faith in illusions.

²They will fail you.

³Place all your faith in the Love of God within you—eternal, unchanging, and forever unfailing.

⁴This is the answer to whatever you confront today.

⁵Through the Love of God in you, you can resolve all seeming difficulties without effort and with complete confidence.

⁶Repeat this to yourself often today.

⁷It is a declaration of release from the belief in idols.

⁸It is your acknowledgment of the truth about yourself.^II

5. Let today’s idea sink deep into your consciousness for ten minutes twice—once in the morning and once at night.

²Repeat it, reflect on it, let related thoughts come to help you recognize its truth, and allow peace to envelop you like a protective cloak.^III

³Do not let any foolish or meaningless thought enter to disturb the holy mind of the Son of God.

⁴For such is the Kingdom of Heaven.^IV

⁵Such is the resting place where your Father has placed you forever.

---

^I The world is a pitiful parody of the Kingdom of Heaven. In the world there is nothing intrinsically new or original. All you will find in it is an infinitely diminished version of what you enjoy in Heaven. When the mad idea of being separate from God fleetingly crossed the mind of the Son of God, it created nothing at all, for it is impossible to create apart from God; in fact, it is impossible to be apart from God. Instead of creating, the one who believed himself human began to believe in illusions; the first of these, his own identity: the ego.

This version of himself—also infinitely diminished and qualitatively different, for it is limited and lacking—must be satisfied with the only thing it now knows: illusions. And the substitute illusions it pursues, necessarily and because of its utter lack of creativity, must emulate what the Son of God knows and enjoys in the Kingdom of God.

Thus, in a certain way, it could be said that the world is the sad analogy of Heaven, where the abstract has become concrete, the unlimited, limited, and the eternal, temporal. Nevertheless, even so, the worldly inevitably retains a parallel with the divine. Everything you long for and pursue here you have in Heaven in infinite measure. Here you will find nothing intrinsically original; everything is a poor copy of what you already have and enjoy in your Father’s house.

^II The Love of God is something that you, ego, do not understand; yet you, Son of God, know nothing else but that. And note that here it speaks of “apparent” difficulties, because in truth there are none at all. Also realize that this is a Course for you, ego, because the Son of God needs no Course whatsoever—how could he! The Love of God, in reality, will resolve nothing, because there is nothing to resolve. Yet when you feel the Love of God within you, indeed all difficulties will vanish. The problem with your problems is that they are important to you, and again, the only problem you really have is the importance you give them. Change your mind, forgive, place the Love of God above all else, and you will see what happens.

^III This line is very important. That letting related thoughts come to you is what will make your mind “take on the color” of the Love of God and resonate with that experience. This is because, as has already been said, the mind is like a chameleon: it has the potential to blend with what it evokes and becomes that very thing. Thinking or reading something that brings to your mind the idea that the Love of God protects and cares for you will lead you to live that experience.

What will lead you to the Love of God is your yearning for Him, not the speculations and ponderings you make in your mind about such a concept. Your yearning, in fact, is a form of prayer. Yearn with your heart and trust. Nothing else is needed. The experience of His Love will be granted to you.

^IV Matthew 3:2: “Repent, for the Kingdom of Heaven is at hand.” This has often been understood as “confess your sins because the end of the world is near.” Another way of understanding it, more plausible when we look at the original Greek in the Bible and examine it in the light of this Course, is: “Change your mind; Heaven is as near to you as your hand.”

Matthew 19:14: “But Jesus said, ‘Let the children come to me, and do not hinder them, for the Kingdom of Heaven belongs to such as these.’”

The expression “Kingdom of Heaven” appears 32 times in the Bible, all of them in the Gospel according to Matthew, and it also appears 20 times in the seven volumes of this Course. Elsewhere the expression “Kingdom of God” is used, as in Mark 1:15.

The Voice of God speaks to me all through the day.

1. It is quite possible to listen to the Voice of God all through the day without interrupting your usual activities in any way.^I

²The part of your mind in which truth abides is in constant communication with God, whether you are aware of it or not.

³It is the other part of your mind that functions in the world and obeys its laws.

⁴That is the part that is constantly distracted, disorganized, and very uncertain.

2. The part that is listening to the Voice of God is calm and quiet, always at rest, and completely certain.

²It is the only part of your mind that truly exists.

³The other is a frantic, wild illusion, disturbed and unreal.

⁴Try not to listen to it today.

⁵Try instead to identify with the part of your mind where stillness and peace forever reign.

⁶Try to hear the Voice of God calling to you in love, reminding you that your Creator has not forgotten His Son.

3. Today we will need at least four five-minute practice periods, and more if possible.

²Today we will try to truly hear the Voice of God reminding you of Him and of your Self.^II

³We approach this thought with confidence, the happiest and holiest of all, knowing that in doing so, we are joining our will to the Will of God.

⁴He wants you to hear His Voice.

⁵He gave It to you so that you might hear It.

4. Listen in deep silence.

²Be very still and open your mind.^III

³Leave behind the strident voices and sick imaginings that hide your real thoughts and obscure your eternal link with God.

⁴Sink deeply into the peace that waits for you beyond the frantic, riotous thoughts and the sights and sounds of this insane world.

⁵You do not live in that world.

⁶We are trying to reach your real home.

⁷We are trying to reach the place where you are truly welcome.

⁸We are trying to reach God.

5. Do not forget to repeat today’s idea often.^IV

²Do so with your eyes open when necessary, but close them when possible.

³And be sure to sit quietly, repeating today’s idea whenever you can, closing your eyes to the world and acknowledging that you are inviting the Voice of God to speak to you.

---

^I That is so. That is simply a fact, though you probably don’t see it that way. The reason you do not hear it is also very simple: you are not listening. You do not set your will on hearing it, and that is why you do not hear it. You may also be unaware of the fact that your mind’s power to block the Voice of God is as great as the Power of God to make Himself heard, because the power of your mind is precisely the Power of God. Through that Power He created you and gave it to you wholly, along with the freedom to use it as you would.

You cannot hear two voices at once. Your mind always chooses one and disregards the other. That is inevitable. This Course tells you that one is the voice of the ego and the other, the voice of the Holy Spirit. And perhaps this leaves you somewhat confused, because you are not clear about which voices it refers to. In fact, it is very simple. The voice of the ego is the one you know as your own voice. It is that incessant inner dialogue you maintain with yourself, and also the words that come out of your mouth when you speak, without knowing exactly how they occur to you or where they come from. All of that is the voice of the ego, and it is something that in truth has nothing to do with you, even though you witness it. The sad circumstance is that you confuse being a witness with being an author, and you claim as yours what you hear. The truth is that it is not, but you believe it is.

The voice of the Holy Spirit also occurs in you; it comes from God and is the perfect answer to any matter you consider. In this case, it is not a compulsive voice, like the ego’s, but one you must “activate” through your invitation to hear it. In reality, the Holy Spirit has no discourse of His own: He is your Father’s answer to all your requests, nothing more, but nothing less than that.

To hear the voice of the Holy Spirit is the same as to want to hear it and to believe that it will tell you what is best and what you need because, ultimately, it is a belief resting on reality. Therefore, to hear it requires that you engage your will and your trust. Realize that this, in truth, is a Course in the exercise of the will, and remember that trust is the fundamental characteristic of God’s teachers.

^II This is the fourth time you are urged to try to pay attention to the part of your mind where the Voice of God resides. Today’s is an exercise of pure will that requires great determination and honesty, but also great innocence and trust. Realize that you will begin the exercise from the lower part of your mind, which rules the ego, but if you do it well you will find yourself, to your surprise, in the other part, in your higher mind, for both are you.

^III Psalm 46:10: “Be still, and know that I am God. I will be exalted among the nations, I will be exalted in the earth!”

^IV The fact that you remember to do it will give you an indication of what your heart truly desires. Do not be afraid. You will not hear a resounding heavenly proclamation; you will hear precisely what is most fitting for you in that very moment. The content of what you hear will be determined by the position of your heart at that instant. If you are preoccupied with trivialities, you will hear a wise answer to that triviality. If you are distressed for any reason, you will receive a message of comfort, safety, and peace. Try to remember throughout the day what is truly best for you; listen.

There is nothing to fear.^I

1. Today’s idea simply states a fact.

²To those who believe in illusions, it is not a fact.

³But illusions are not facts.

⁴In truth, there is nothing to fear.^II

⁵This is very easy to recognize.

⁶But it is very difficult to recognize for those who want illusions to be true.^III

2. Today’s practice periods will be brief, simple, and frequent.

²Simply repeat the idea as often as possible.

³You can do so with your eyes open at any time and in any situation.

⁴However, it is strongly recommended that you take a minute whenever possible to close your eyes and repeat the idea silently, slowly, several times.

⁵It is especially important to use the idea immediately whenever anything disturbs your peace of mind.

3. The presence of fear is a sure sign that you are trusting in your own strength.^IV

²The awareness that there is nothing to fear shows that somewhere in your mind—though not yet fully recognized—you have remembered God and allowed His Strength to take the place of yours.

³In the instant you are willing to do this, you stop being afraid.

---

^I This brief Lesson is one of the most beloved by many students of this Course, and with good reason.

This Lesson is deeply cherished for its simplicity and its profound capacity to console. “There is nothing to fear” speaks directly to the heart, offering a sense of peace and calm in the midst of the challenges of daily life. Its message cuts through the complexity of our worries and anxieties, reminding us that fear is an illusion rooted in the ego. The idea that we are always safe in the presence of God’s Love, beyond the illusions of the world, brings immense relief. Its universal truth resonates with everyone, making it a powerful mantra in moments of doubt, anxiety, or distress.

^II Remember the celebrated introductory lines of this Course: “This Course can therefore be summed up very simply in this way: Nothing real can be threatened. Nothing unreal exists. Therein lies the Peace of God.”

This statement encapsulates the essence of its teaching: “There is nothing to fear.”

If we interpret it more freely, placing these words on Jesus’ lips, they might sound like this: “My brother, enjoy the Peace of God and do not be afraid, for what is real in you is in no danger whatsoever. Everything you think you could lose, in truth, does not exist and has never been real.”

This is a Course about healing, and as the Text states: “Healing is the removal of fear.”

The evangelical message of Jesus has always been: “Do not be afraid; rejoice, for your true reality abides in God and is therefore unchangeable.”

That is all. It is what the awakened brother says to the brother who is still dreaming, as he watches him suffer in his nightmares: “There is nothing to fear.”

Now, our experience in the world seems to show us the opposite. We feel that danger stalks us continually, we fear the disasters we imagine around the corner, and we live on the edge, afraid of losing something we value. Moreover, the certainty of our future death does not cease to haunt us. This is how most of us perceive “reality.”

The question is: is that really true? Have we ever lost anything that is truly real? Undoubtedly, as time has passed we have watched everything we considered “ours”—body, job, relationships, or ideas—change. Everything keeps transforming. Strictly speaking, time seems to destroy anything we think we possess.

But there is something that never changes: our consciousness of being.

When Jesus tells us there is nothing to fear because what is real in us is not in danger, he is referring to that unchanging awareness, to our true Self. Everything else belongs to the realm of illusion. And it is not merely that we could lose it: in truth, it has never existed. It was an illusion.

The Peace of God protects what He has created, not the illusions our egoic mind fabricates. Every fear of loss is born of the unconscious devotion we keep offering our fantasies—this story of fears, desires, and supposed lacks we have built around ourselves—even though we are glorious Sons of God.

Let us recognize that, ultimately, what frightens us is awakening from a nightmare, and it is worth asking: is it reasonable to fear ceasing to fear and returning to reality?

^III Read this line with great attention. Think it over carefully, and then consider whether it is your case.

^IV 2 Corinthians 12:9: “And He said to me, ‘My grace is sufficient for you, for My power is made perfect in weakness. Therefore I will most gladly boast in my weaknesses, so that the power of Christ may rest upon me.’”  Here, Paul recognizes a profound spiritual paradox: it is precisely in acknowledging our human frailty that we open to divine strength. When we stop relying on our limited abilities and instead rest in God’s grace, we discover a power that is not our own, but infinitely greater. This aligns perfectly with the teaching of the Course, which holds that fear arises from trusting in our own strength, while peace comes from trusting in the Strength of God within us.

Similarly, Philippians 4:13 affirms: “I can do all things through Christ who strengthens me.” This is not a call to ego-driven personal achievements, but an invitation to recognize that through our union with Christ—the symbol of our true Self—we have access to limitless strength. There is no situation we cannot face, no fear we cannot dissolve, because we do not face it alone.

Both verses gently shift our focus from self-sufficiency to reliance on the divine. Once we truly embrace this truth, fear loses its power. After all, if “My grace is sufficient for you” and “I can do all things through Christ,” what could possibly remain to fear?

God is the Strength in which I trust.^I

1. If you rely on your own strength, you have every reason to be apprehensive, anxious, and afraid.

²What can you predict or control?

³What is there in you that you can depend on?

⁴What gives you the ability to be aware of all facets of any problem, and to resolve them in such a way that only good can come of it?

⁵What is there in you that enables you to recognize the right solution, and ensure that it will be achieved?

2. You can do none of these things by yourself.^II 

²To believe you can is to place your trust where it is unwarranted, and this results in fear, anxiety, depression, anger, and sorrow.

³Who can put his faith in weakness and feel safe?

⁴And who can put his faith in Strength and feel weak?

3. God is your sure protection in every circumstance.

²His Voice speaks for Him in every situation and in every aspect of each situation, telling you exactly what to do to call upon His Strength and His protection.

³There are no exceptions to this, because God makes no exceptions.^III

⁴And the Voice that speaks for Him thinks as He does.

4. Today we will try to go past your weakness and reach the Source of true Strength.

²Four five-minute practice periods are required today, and more and longer sessions are strongly encouraged.

³Close your eyes and begin, as usual, by repeating the idea for today.

⁴Then spend a minute or two searching your mind for situations in your life that you have invested with fear, and dismiss each one by saying to yourself:

⁵God is the Strength in which I trust.

5. Now try to let go of all concerns related to your own sense of inadequacy.

²Clearly, any situation that causes you concern is associated with feelings of insufficiency, for otherwise you would believe you could handle it successfully.

³Placing your trust in yourself is not how you build confidence.

⁴But the Strength of God in you will always succeed.^IV

6. Recognizing your own frailty is a necessary step in the correction of your errors.

²But it is not sufficient to give you the confidence you need and are entitled to.

³You must also gain awareness that your trust in your true Strength is fully justified in every circumstance and with respect to everything.^V

7. In the final phase of practice, try to go deep within your mind to a place of true safety.

²You will recognize that you have reached it if you experience a sense of deep peace, no matter how briefly.

³Let go of the trivial thoughts that crowd the surface of your mind and sink beneath them to the Kingdom of Heaven.

⁴There is a place in you where perfect peace abides.

⁵There is a place in you where nothing is impossible.

⁶There is a place in you where the Strength of God resides.

8. Repeat today’s idea often.

²Use it as your response to any disturbance.

³Remember that Peace is your right because you trust in the Strength of God.

---

^I Notice how these last Lessons deal with the three aspects of Being, the divine triad of Knowing, Loving, and Creating.

W-44: God is the Light in which I see. (Seeing–Ajna/I understand)

W-45: God is the Mind with which I think. (Mind–Sahasrara/I am)

W-46: God is the Love in which I forgive. (Loving–Anahata/I love) W-47: God is the Strength in which I trust. (Power–Will–Manipura/I can)

^II To recognize this is nothing more than an exercise in simple honesty; it is something that not even the Son of God, by himself, can do, for the Son of God, by himself, is nothing but a human being. As Jesus reminds us: “Jesus therefore answered and said to them, ‘Truly, truly, I say to you, the Son can do nothing of Himself, but what He sees the Father do; for whatever things He does, these also does the Son likewise’” (John 5:19).

^III Here Jesus reminds us once again that the Voice of the Holy Spirit is always within our reach. It speaks to us in every circumstance, for it dwells in the right part of the mind, sometimes referred to as the “higher mind.” If at times we do not hear It, it is not because the Voice is absent, but because to hear It we need to be willing to listen and to pause our inner dialogue for a moment. After all, how could we hear the Voice of the Holy Spirit if we do not give It space and go on conversing with ourselves without end?

^IV In your present situation, it is natural that this statement—no matter how beautiful and joyful it may seem to you—does not yet strike you as entirely believable. Perhaps you read it with good will, yet still consider it little more than a well-intentioned, somewhat idealistic story.

Listen attentively and open your mind to the truth: nothing is closer to truth than this! To harbor the idea of God in your mind—to think of your Father, even if only for an instant—makes you absolutely invulnerable under any circumstance. To remember Him, even for a brief moment, places you beyond all threat in this illusory dream of death and destruction. To think of God fills you with such power and joy that, even though it does not physically remove you from this world, it protects you with a mantle of sanity and shields you from all harm. Do you not realize that to call upon God is to bring Reality to illusion, Love to fear, Truth to error, and Strength to weakness? But do not rely on these words alone: see for yourself! Think of God when you feel afraid, when doubts assail you, or when you do not know which path to take… and watch carefully what happens. You will be astonished.

^V “True strength” refers to the Strength of God that dwells within you, not to that which your ego seeks to claim for itself.

Remember also that trust is the first and most important characteristic of God’s teachers, and it rests precisely upon that Strength. As the Course states:
“God’s teachers trust in the world because they have learned it is not governed by the laws the world made up. It is governed by a Power in them, but not of them” (M-5.1.1:4-5).

That Power, in the end, is the Strength of God.

God is the Love in which I forgive.

1. God does not forgive, because He has never condemned.

²And before forgiveness becomes necessary, there must have been condemnation.

³Forgiveness is the greatest need of this world, but that is because this is a world of illusions.

⁴Those who forgive are thus released from illusions; those who do not forgive are bound by them.^I

⁵Just as you truly only condemn yourself, in the same way, you only forgive yourself.

2. Although God does not forgive, His Love is nevertheless the foundation of forgiveness.

²Fear condemns, and Love forgives.^II

³Forgiveness undoes what fear has made, and brings the mind back to the awareness of God.

⁴For this reason, forgiveness can truly be called salvation.

⁵Forgiveness is the means by which illusions disappear.

3. Today’s exercises require at least three full five-minute sessions, along with as many shorter applications as possible.

²Begin the longer practice periods by silently repeating today’s idea, as usual.

³Close your eyes while doing so, and spend one or two minutes searching your mind for those you have not forgiven.

⁴It does not matter “how much” you have failed to forgive them.

⁵You have either forgiven them completely, or not at all.^III

4. If you do the exercises properly, you should have no difficulty finding many people you have not forgiven.

²A helpful rule is to consider anyone you do not like as a suitable subject.

³Name each one specifically and say:

⁴God is the Love in which I forgive you, [name].

5. The purpose of the first part of the practice is to better prepare you to forgive yourself.^IV

²After you have applied today’s idea to everyone who came to mind, say to yourself:

³God is the Love in which I forgive myself.

⁴Then spend the remainder of the practice adding related thoughts, such as:

⁵God is the Love with which I love myself.

⁶God is the Love in which I am blessed.

6. The form of these applications may vary considerably, but the central idea must not be lost.

²You might say, for example:

³I cannot be guilty because I am a Son of God.

⁴I have already been forgiven.

⁵It is not possible to hold fear in a mind that God loves.

⁶There is no need to attack, because Love has forgiven me.

⁷Do not forget that the practice should end by repeating today’s idea in its original form.

7. The shorter applications may simply consist of repeating the idea in its original form, or in a related form if you prefer, or through more specific applications when necessary.

²These specific applications will be needed any time during the day when you become aware of any kind of negative reaction toward someone, whether that person is present or not.

³In such cases, repeat silently:^V

⁴God is the Love in which I forgive you.

---

^I Matthew 16:19: “And I will give you the keys of the Kingdom of Heaven; and whatever you bind on earth shall be bound in Heaven, and whatever you loose on earth shall be loosed in Heaven.”

John 20:23: “If you forgive the sins of any, they are forgiven them; if you retain the sins of any, they are retained.”

This is the key to forgiveness. When you forgive, you are telling yourself that it is not important, precisely because it is an illusion. Moreover, realize that this is not merely a mental process, for your heart also implores you, through its discomfort, to change your way of thinking.

Forgiveness is healing for your Soul; whenever you forgive, your Soul rejoices, and that is no fantasy, for you feel it in your whole being. Regaining your spiritual health also has repercussions on your body, which heals as well.

Remember that your body is nothing more than an idea in your mind about yourself, and when you force that idea to coexist with other poisonous ones of condemnation, it attunes itself to those malignant ideas and becomes ill.

Condemnation is the judgment that inevitably binds you to illusion—not so much because of its negative character, but because it makes illusion inescapably real to you. You only condemn what you consider certain and real.

This is the great spell of condemnation: granting reality to the illusory. In the same way, but in perfect opposition, the foundation of forgiveness is precisely the recognition that what is being considered is not real, and that is why it is forgiven, let go.

Who would linger with an illusion if he knew it to be one?

^II This statement carries extraordinary light and tremendous liberating power.

If you become aware that every condemnatory judgment is, at its core, nothing but an expression of fear, you would not devote yourself so eagerly to your favorite activity: blaming.

Human beings blame with ease because, in condemning, they see themselves as most dignified judges in possession of truth. Yet if they became aware that in condemning they are, in fact, merely expressing their fear, they would be far more cautious in their judgments, for they would hardly find any dignity in being afraid.

^III This, like virtually every declaration of this Course, is maximalist and true, in sharp contrast to the relativistic approaches of the world, founded on compromise.

Forgiveness is either total, or it is not forgiveness at all, because to forgive is to release, to let go—and this only occurs when the release is complete.

If you retain something, even in its mildest form, it remains fully with you. Failing to see this is like failing to understand why you are being electrocuted when you touch the electrical wire “just a little.”

Just as error implies separation from truth, forgiveness implies separation from error. And separation is an absolute concept: it either is, or it is not.

^IV Today’s exercise is extraordinarily practical and effective, and if done wholeheartedly, it brings great release and healing. But to do it well requires absolute honesty. The way the proposal is formulated has little importance; what is essential is that there be a true willingness to forgive and to let go of past judgments.

^V…and wholeheartedly:

God is the Mind with which I think.

1. Today’s idea holds the key to understanding what your real thoughts are.^I

²They are nothing you think you think, just as nothing you think you see bears any resemblance to true vision.^II

³There is no relationship between what is real and what you think is real.

⁴Nothing you regard as your real thoughts resembles your true thoughts in any way.

⁵Nothing you think you see bears any likeness to what Vision will show you.

2. You think with the Mind of God.

²Therefore, you share your thoughts with Him, just as He shares His with you.

³They are the same thoughts, because they are thought by the same Mind.

⁴To share is to make alike, or to make one.

⁵The thoughts you think with the Mind of God do not leave your mind, because thoughts do not leave their source.^III

⁶Therefore, your thoughts are in the Mind of God, just as you are.

⁷Your thoughts are also in your mind, where He is.

⁸As you are part of His Mind, so too are your thoughts part of His Thoughts.

3. Where, then, are your real thoughts?

²Today we will try to reach them.

³We must look for them in your mind, because that is where they are.

⁴They must still be there, for they cannot have left.

⁵What the Mind of God thinks is eternal, for it is part of Creation.

4. Our three five-minute practice sessions today will follow the same general form we used when applying yesterday’s idea.

²Today we will try to leave behind illusions and seek the truth.

³Today we will deny the world in favor of truth.

⁴We will not let the world’s beliefs hold us back or convince us that what God wills is impossible.

5. Instead, we will try to recognize that only what God wills for us is possible.

²We will also try to understand that only what God wills for us is what we truly want to do.

³And we will try to remember that we cannot fail in doing what He wills us to do.

⁴There are many reasons to be confident that today you will succeed.

⁵For that is God’s Will.

6. Begin today’s exercises by repeating the idea silently with your eyes closed.

²Then spend a fairly short time considering a few of your own thoughts that are relevant, holding the idea in your mind as you do so.

³Once you have added four or five of your own thoughts, repeat the idea again and say quietly to yourself:

⁴My real thoughts are in my mind.

⁵I would like to find them.

⁶Then try to go past all meaningless thoughts that cover the truth in your mind, and reach toward the eternal.^IV

7. Beneath all the senseless thoughts and mad ideas with which you have filled your mind are the thoughts you thought with God before time began.

²Those thoughts are still in your mind now, completely unchanged.

³They will always be in your mind, exactly as they always were.

⁴Everything you have thought since then will change, but the foundation on which they rest is absolutely unchangeable.

⁵Today’s exercises are aimed at reaching this foundation.

⁶That is where your mind is joined with the Mind of God.

⁷That is where your thoughts are one with His.

8. This type of practice requires only one thing.

²That you approach it as you would an altar dedicated in Heaven itself to God the Father and to God the Son.

³For that is the place you are trying to reach.

⁴You may not yet fully understand how high you are attempting to go.

⁵But even with the little understanding you have already gained, you should be able to realize that this is no idle game, but an exercise in Holiness and a reaching toward the Kingdom of Heaven.

9. In applying today’s idea in the shorter practice periods, try to remember how important it is for you to understand the Holiness of the mind that thinks with God.

²When you repeat the idea throughout the day, take one or two minutes to reflect on the Holiness of your mind.

³Lay aside, if only briefly, all thoughts unworthy of the One of Whom you are the host.

⁴And give thanks for the Thoughts He is thinking with you.

---

^I Today’s practice is an exercise in respect for your own mind. The word respect comes from the Latin respectus, the participle of the verb respicere, formed from the prefix re- and the verb specere, which means “to look.” To respect, in its etymological sense, is to look twice, to look attentively.

That is what this exercise proposes: that you contemplate your mind attentively and become aware of its intrinsic holiness, going beyond what you call “my thoughts,” which are nothing more than the voice of the ego in you.

Here Jesus speaks to us of our “true thoughts,” our “real thoughts,” and tells us that they have nothing to do with what we call “thinking.” The difference between the two is that one is form and the other content, with content understood as the “substance” of reality in its three aspects: love, truth, and creative power.

These concepts are abstract and ungraspable to the egoic human mind, which is illusory, limited, and knows only the concrete. Human thoughts, on the other hand, are insubstantial stories woven from absences of love, which is the substance of Reality. One is the opposite of the other.

To understand this, consider the following allegory: imagine a whiteboard on which something has been written in black ink. When you look at it, your mind focuses exclusively on those symbols and constructs a story. In reality, what you are considering is nothing more than the absence of light that the black ink produces on the surface of your retina, for you disregard the underlying light.

Think of the whiteboard as Reality and that light as the Love of God, your real thoughts. The others—what you call “my thoughts”—are the stories the black ink has led you to construct as you interpret the absences of light caused by its staining of the board.

In truth, all that is there is light; yet what you see are shadows. And that you call “thinking.”

^II You believe you see and live in a world of forms, but spiritual vision regards the figures you perceive as symbols of causes manifested to you in that way.

Spiritual vision interprets the “dream of the world” in a manner analogous to Freud’s celebrated work The Interpretation of Dreams. Those figures that make up your perception are symbols, effects whose cause lies in the very nature of the ego within you.

Your fears and your desires appear in that “reality” as forms in a world you imagine, Son of God. The mechanism of that “seeing” is the same as that which produces the scenarios you witness in your nightly dreams.

^III This is a fundamental notion in the paradigm of this Course. Ideas do not leave the source that conceived them to become “things” in a “space” external to the mind that thinks them.

Recognize that what you call “things” are nothing but ideas whose content is precisely to appear as something outside you. Those ideas, like everything you believe exists in an imagined outer world, are in your mind. The real thoughts, which are the same as you and whose true nature utterly escapes your present understanding because you do not remember Who you are, also remain in your mind, which is one with the Mind of God.

^IV The purpose of this part of the exercise is to make you aware of the contrast between your usual thoughts and your real thoughts, which are perfectly abstract and eternal. Later, these thoughts will be called the “Creations of the Son of God.”

It is important that you realize that what you call “my thoughts” have absolutely nothing to do with you and are not “yours” at all. That is precisely the voice of the ego, which you endorse when, confused, you call them “my thoughts.”

You are merely the witness of the stories that voice tells you, woven from ghosts of old grievances and desires born of the ego’s vocation to feel special and lacking. None of that is yours, but the false identity with which you have identified yourself—the ego as effect—has inherited the greedy character of its progenitor—the ego as cause.

God is the Light in which I see.

1. Today we continue with yesterday’s idea, adding another dimension to it.

²You cannot see in darkness, nor can you make light.

³You can make darkness and then think you see in it, but light reflects life, and is therefore an aspect of Creation.

⁴Creation and darkness cannot coexist, but light and life must go together, for they are merely different aspects of Creation.

2. To see, you must recognize that light is within you, not outside.

²You see nothing outside yourself.^I

³What enables you to see is not outside you.

⁴An essential part of what enables you to see is light.

⁵And the light is always with you, making vision possible under all circumstances.^II

3. Today we will attempt to reach that light.^III

²To do so, we will use a method of practice we have introduced once before and will use increasingly.^IV

³It is a practice especially difficult for an undisciplined mind and represents one of the major goals of mental training.

⁴This practice requires precisely what an untrained mind lacks.

⁵Yet if you wish to see, this is the training you must undertake.

4. Practice at least three times today, for three to five minutes each.

²Longer periods are strongly encouraged, but only if they flow with little or no sense of strain.

³This form of practice is as natural and easy for a trained mind as it is unnatural and difficult for an untrained one.

5. But your mind is already somewhat trained.

²You are quite ready to learn the form of today’s practice, though you may still experience strong resistance.

³The reason is very simple.

⁴When you practice in this way, you leave behind all the thoughts and beliefs you have made.

⁵This is, in essence, the release from hell.

⁶But to the ego, it seems like the loss of personal identity and a descent into hell.

6. If you can step back from the ego even slightly, you will recognize that its fears are meaningless.

²It may help you to remind yourself from time to time that reaching the light is escaping from the darkness, even if you believe otherwise.

³God is the Light in which you see.

⁴And you are attempting to reach Him.

7. Begin the practice by repeating today’s idea with your eyes open, then slowly close them while repeating the idea several more times.

²Then try to sink into your mind, letting go of every kind of interference and intrusion, gently descending beyond them.

³There is nothing preventing your mind from doing this except you.

⁴Your mind is simply following its natural course.

⁵Try to observe the thoughts that come without getting involved in them, and glide quietly past them.^V

8. Although this exercise requires no specific focus, it is important that you consider what you are doing to be of great value to you, and that you be fully aware that you are attempting something very sacred.

²Salvation is your happiest achievement and the only one that has real meaning, for it is the only one that truly benefits you.

9. If you encounter any kind of resistance, pause and repeat today’s idea with your eyes closed, unless you feel afraid.

²In that case, opening your eyes briefly will likely reassure you.

³However, try to return to the exercise as soon as possible.

10. If your practice is successful, you should experience a sense of relaxation, a feeling of approaching the light, and even entering into it.

²Leave the thoughts of the world behind and try to imagine a light without form or boundaries.

³And do not forget that they can only hold you back if you give them that power.^VI

11. Repeat today’s idea frequently throughout the day, both with eyes open and closed, as suits your needs at the moment.

²And, of course, do not forget it.

³Above all, make a firm resolve not to forget it today.^VII

---

^I You see nothing outside yourself because there is nothing outside you. Everything you perceive is within you and made by you; the only thing is that you have convinced yourself that what you have conceived lies outside of you.

Today’s Lesson is meant to help you stop associating the idea of seeing with the experience of perceiving “things.” That is not seeing—that is imagining—because in that experience you are not knowing anything; you are merely projecting images onto the screen of consciousness, and you call that “seeing.”

True vision is a direct relationship with truth, and since truth is precisely what you are, when you truly see something you have the feeling that you have become what you are seeing—that you are that. Which, if you think about it, makes perfect sense, because Knowing is one of the three aspects of Being; that is, Knowing and Being are the same.

Therefore, in the realm of Knowledge there is no distinction between the knower and the known. Only unity exists. What we call “vision” in the Course is the beginning of the return to that unity. It is not about perceiving different objects with a new clarity, but about experiencing the essence behind all appearances, recognizing that what you see is not separate from you.

When you truly “see,” there is no longer any sense of distance between you and what you perceive. There is no “observer” and “observed.” Instead, there is a direct and immediate experience of unity. That is why true vision is often described as a state of deep peace, for there is no conflict in unity: there is no division, no opposition, no “other.”

This is radically different from the perception of the ego, which is built upon duality: subject and object, self and other, inside and outside. The ego’s “vision” is always filtered through judgment, comparison, and interpretation. But real vision transcends all that. It does not interpret; it simply recognizes what is.

The practice of today’s Lesson consists in beginning to loosen the grip of the ego’s way of seeing. You are invited to notice that what you think you see “out there” is, in reality, a projection from within. And by questioning the reality of these external appearances, you open your mind to the possibility of another kind of vision—one that reveals the truth that has always been there, within you.

^II The term “light,” which this Course uses so profusely, is a symbol representing comprehension, understanding, and knowledge of the aspects of reality that are reflected and perceived within the illusion.

In the context of the Course, “light” is not merely a metaphor for visual clarity, but a symbol of spiritual awareness: the recognition of truth beyond appearances. It represents the shift from perceiving through the ego’s distorted lens to perceiving through the vision of Christ, which sees beyond form to the eternal essence of all things.

Light represents the state of mind in which the darkness of ignorance, fear, and separation has been dispelled. It is not something external that we must seek, but an inner presence that has always been there, waiting to be acknowledged. The Course reminds us that light is not outside us, because nothing is outside us.

This inner light does not reveal the illusions of the world, but the unchanging reality that exists beyond them. It is the awareness that what we thought was hidden has always been present, and that our true nature is not defined by the forms we perceive, but by the changeless truth that lies beyond perception.

Therefore, when the Course invites us to “reach the light,” it is not asking us to achieve something new, but to remember what we already are. It is about removing the barriers we have placed in our minds—false beliefs and judgments—that block our awareness of this ever-present light.

In this sense, light is synonymous with knowledge—not in the intellectual sense, but as direct, experiential knowing: the kind of certainty that requires no proof because it arises from the recognition of what is eternally true.

^III The light we are going to try to reach today is Knowledge, one of the three aspects of your Being (Knowledge-Love-Will) already mentioned—in particular, the light of Knowledge.

If this were a treatise on tantra yoga, it would say that you are going to work with the ajna chakra.

This reference to the ajna chakra, often known as the “third eye,” is symbolic of inner vision and higher perception—qualities closely aligned with what the Course calls true vision or spiritual vision. Just as the ajna chakra represents the capacity to perceive beyond the physical senses, the light of Knowledge in the Course points to an awareness that transcends the limitations of ego-based perception.

However, though the Course does not employ the same framework as tantra yoga, both traditions point to the same essential truth: the shift from external, fragmented perception to inward, unified awareness. In the Course, this process is not about activating energy centers, but about removing the mental blocks that prevent us from recognizing the light that has always been within us.

^IV Today’s practice is a variation of the meditation exercise taught in Lesson 41.

In a way, one could say that this Course brings together and requires the practice of various “yogas.” Fundamentally, it is an extraordinary manual of jnana yoga—the yoga of knowledge—through its ontological and epistemological principles, which can be found in the purest form of advaita vedanta. It is also an impeccable proposal of karma yoga—the yoga of action—through its emphasis on detachment from worldly matters and on forgiveness.

Undoubtedly, bhakti yoga—the yoga of devotion—is omnipresent throughout the Course. Yet the different meditation practices proposed in the Workbook are approaches characteristic of raja yoga, the yoga of mental techniques.

This convergence of yogic principles within the Course illustrates its integral approach to spiritual awakening. Like jnana yoga, it guides the mind to question deeply rooted beliefs and illusions, leading us toward the recognition of ultimate truth. Like karma yoga, it emphasizes the transformative power of forgiveness as a means to transcend the ego’s attachments. The bhakti element is expressed in the Course’s recurring call to surrender to divine Love, fostering a profound sense of devotion to God and to our true Self. Meanwhile, the meditative practices reflect the disciplines of raja yoga, training the mind to silence its incessant chatter and open itself to inner stillness. This synthesis allows the Course to resonate with seekers of various paths, for it is not confined to a single method but integrates the wisdom of multiple traditions to support the process of remembering our oneness with God.

^V Today’s most important exercise is a guided formal meditation in which the idea “God is the light in which I see” is stated, and then, with the mind utterly relaxed, the pure idea of light is evoked.

It is natural for distracting thoughts to arise; when they do, simply dismiss them without giving them any importance. The only thing that matters is the firm determination to evoke the light and move toward it.

This practice is not about controlling the mind or forcing it into silence, but about gently redirecting your attention each time distractions appear. Each time you notice your mind has wandered, calmly return to the idea of light, as though following a gentle current back to its source.

Allow the concept of light to expand in your mind, not as a physical phenomenon, but as an inner presence—a silent radiance that is already there, waiting to be acknowledged. You do not need to create the light; you only need to remove the veil of thoughts that seem to conceal it.

Approach this meditation with patience and an attitude of openness. Even brief moments of clarity, when you feel the connection with the inner light, are invaluable. Over time, these glimpses will deepen, and the experience of light will become more natural and constant.

Remember, the goal is not to achieve a specific result, but to cultivate the willingness to experience the truth. The light is always there, because it is what you are. This exercise is simply a way of remembering that eternal fact.

^VI If meditation practice is not new to you, you will not experience fear at all. The fear in this exercise arises from the dizziness the ego feels at losing its grip on the mind. That is why it is important not to take the exercise personally, for it is not about that at all, but quite the opposite.

You are attempting to transcend the lower mind—the realm of the ego—and rise to the higher part of your mind. And it is essential that you realize you are not going anywhere foreign to yourself; that part of your mind is more truly you than the “self” you think you are. Yet you do not know this clearly yet, for it is not something that is learned, but something that is experienced.

This process is not about facing something alien or unknown; rather, it is about returning to what has always been within you, though forgotten. The ego may resist because it perceives this shift as a threat to its identity, but in truth, nothing real is at risk. What you are moving toward is your true Self: the eternal, changeless awareness that has never been touched by the illusions of separation, fear, or time.

During the exercise, if you feel any discomfort, simply observe it without judgment. Recognize that the fear is not yours; it is merely a temporary reaction of the ego trying to maintain its illusion of control. You need not fight it or analyze it. Simply acknowledge its presence, gently return your attention to the practice, and allow the resistance to dissolve on its own. The key is to approach meditation with trust, openness, and a willingness to let go of the familiar thought patterns that have defined your identity until now. The light you are seeking is not outside you—it is you. The practice is simply an invitation to remember that truth.

^VII Today’s exercise is very important and has enormous transformative power, because it unites two fundamental ideas that are absolutely real and true: the idea of God and the idea of the light within you.

To evoke them together is not to imagine any fantasy, but to begin to see reality. Remember that you perceive what you want to see, which is why your desire for light is essential for this exercise to succeed.

This practice is not an intellectual exercise; it is an opening of the heart and mind to the recognition of what has always been present. Light is not something you need to create or reach; it is the essence of your being. When you bring the idea of God into this awareness, you are not invoking something separate from you, but recognizing the Source of that light within you.

The key to this exercise is willingness. Even if you feel resistance or doubt, your sincere desire to experience the light will gently guide you beyond those barriers. The Course reminds us that we do not need perfect faith to begin; we only need the smallest willingness to allow the truth to reveal itself.

As you sit in silence with the idea “God is the light in which I see,” do not try to force an experience. Simply hold the thought gently in your mind, like a silent invitation. If distractions arise, return to the idea with patience and trust. Over time, you may notice subtle changes: a sense of peace, a feeling of expansion, or a serene joy arising without external cause.

These glimpses are signs that you are beginning to see with the light of truth instead of with the eyes of the ego. The more you practice, the more natural this vision will become, until it is no longer something you seek but something you live.

God is my Source; I cannot see apart from Him.

1. Perception is not an attribute of God.^I

²The realm of God is Knowledge.

³But God created the Holy Spirit as a Mediator between Knowledge and perception.

⁴Without this link to God, perception would have replaced Knowledge in your minds forever.^II

⁵Thanks to this connection with God, perception will change so completely, and be so thoroughly purified, that it will lead to Knowledge.

⁶This is the function of perception as the Holy Spirit sees it.

⁷Therefore, this is its true function.

2. In God, you cannot see.

²Perception has no function in God, and it does not exist.^III

³Yet in salvation, which is the undoing of what never was, perception has a powerful purpose.

⁴Conceived by the Son of God for an unholy goal, it must now be transformed into the means for restoring the awareness of his Holiness.

⁵Perception has no meaning in itself.

⁶Yet the Holy Spirit gives it a meaning very close to that of God.

⁷Healed perception becomes the means by which the Son of God forgives his brother, and thus forgives himself.^IV

3. You cannot see apart from God because you cannot be apart from God.

²Everything you do occurs within Him.

³Everything you think, you think with His Mind.

⁴If Vision is real—and it is, to the extent that it shares the Holy Spirit’s purpose—then you cannot see apart from God.

4. Three five-minute practice periods are required today.

²One as early as possible, and another as late as possible.

³The third should be done at the most convenient time, depending on your circumstances and readiness.

5. Begin the practice by silently repeating the idea with your eyes open.^V

²Then look around you, applying today’s idea specifically to what you see.

³Four or five subjects are sufficient for this phase of the exercise.

⁴Say, for example:

⁵God is my Source.

⁶I cannot see this desk apart from Him.

⁷God is my Source.

⁸I cannot see that picture apart from Him.

⁹Although this part of the practice should be fairly brief, be sure to choose the subjects randomly, making no conscious effort to include or exclude anything.

6. For the second and longer phase, close your eyes, repeat today’s idea again, and then allow any relevant thoughts to come, incorporating them into the idea in whatever way feels natural.

²Thoughts such as:

³I see through the eyes of forgiveness.

⁴I see a blessed world.

⁵The world can show me myself.

⁶I see my own thoughts, which are like God’s.

⁷Any thought more or less related to today’s idea is appropriate.

⁸The thoughts need not bear an obvious connection to the idea, but they should not contradict it.

7. If you notice your mind wandering, become aware of thoughts clearly in conflict with today’s idea, or find that no thoughts come at all, open your eyes, repeat the first phase, and then return to the second.

²Do not allow yourself to become caught in irrelevant thinking.

³To avoid this, go back to the first phase as often as needed.

8. In the shorter practice periods, you may vary the form of the idea depending on the circumstances and situations you encounter throughout the day.

²When you are with someone, silently say:

³God is my Source.

⁴I cannot see you apart from Him.

⁵This variation is equally applicable to strangers and to those you know well.

⁶In fact, avoid making distinctions of this kind.

9. Also apply today’s idea to the various situations and events that may arise, especially those that disturb you in any way.

²For this kind of application, use this form:

³God is my Source.

⁴I cannot see this apart from Him.

10. If no specific subject occurs to you, simply repeat the idea in its original form.

²Try not to let too much time pass without remembering today’s idea, for doing so is remembering your function.

---

^I The mind is an abstract potential for creation; by itself it does nothing and creates nothing. It must unite with something in order to generate a proposal.

On the other hand, to perceive is to construct stories by linking symbols through a given syntax. But the mind, by itself, can neither build any story nor perceive. For that it needs a partner, a counselor, a guide, an author who will use its neutral creative potential to elaborate a meaningful proposal.

And in that scenario there are only two possible candidates: the ego and the Holy Spirit. There are no others; do not be mistaken about that.

You are not the third candidate; you are the mind. You do not craft stories nor interpret what you perceive. You merely subscribe to a given interpretation, and your only freedom is to choose to whom you will offer your creative potential so that they may elaborate a story you will call “perceiving.”

Having chosen to separate from God in order to have an individual identity—which is only possible in the illusory world—your perception through time would be forever bound to the authorship of the ego were it not for the presence of the Holy Spirit in you. In that case, you would experience a permanent dream of fear, guilt, and death.

However, the stories—the interpretations of what is perceived—that we build hand in hand with the Holy Spirit are aligned with the truth and lead us toward Knowledge, which is one of the three aspects of Being. These are reflected in the three functions of the Soul: Knowing, Loving, and Creating (T-3.IX.1:2).

In this Lesson we are reminded that, in God’s realm, perception as we understand it does not exist, but Knowledge does: the certainty of perfect Unity and Love.

Yet in the face of the mind that has identified with separation, the Holy Spirit acts as an enlightened interpreter, redirecting perception toward its true function: not to reinforce separation, but to lead back to the fullness of Knowledge.

Without this divine link, perception—conceived by the prodigal Son of God to sustain the illusion of separateness—would have permanently replaced Knowledge. Now, thanks to the Holy Spirit’s intervention, perception is purified and transformed into an instrument of salvation.

In the reality of God, seeing is not required, because nothing there is separate. By contrast, within the process of freeing the sleeping mind, perception takes on a powerful purpose: to become the way of forgiveness.

The Holy Spirit grants it a meaning close to God’s, that is, the meaning of Love that recognizes innocence in all things. Thus, healed perception gives the Son of God the opportunity to forgive his brother and thereby remember himself as part of that same innocence. This reinterpretation of perception is the essence of the Course’s path: it is not about denying what we see, but about reinterpreting it through the lens of forgiveness. Where the ego sees guilt, the Holy Spirit reveals innocence. Where the ego projects fear, the Holy Spirit uncovers love. And through this shift, perception ceases to be a tool of separation and becomes a bridge back to the awareness of our oneness with God.

^II This divine intervention—this Answer to the idea of separation—is what guarantees the definitive healing of the Son of God’s mind.

In eternity, this occurred instantaneously, but in time it is called the Atonement and unfolds throughout the entire “history” of time itself. That is the script that is already written and that the Text mentions, for it is written in eternity, even though in time it seems still to be yet to occur.

Atonement is not a corrective process that takes place because something real went wrong. Rather, it is the undoing of what never truly happened: the belief in separation. From the perspective of eternity, the problem was corrected in the very instant it seemed to arise. The Holy Spirit was given as the Answer in the exact instant the illusion of separation was conceived.

However, within the illusion of time, this correction appears to unfold as a process. That is why we experience learning, growth, and stages of healing, although, in truth, we are already healed. The journey we perceive is simply the gradual recognition of what has always been true.

“The script is written,” not because our lives are predestined by some external force, but because time itself is an illusion: a projection of the mind that attempts to explore what it would be like to be separate from God. From outside of time, everything has already happened; the entire arc of perceived history exists simultaneously.

What we are doing in this Course is not rewriting the script, but choosing how we experience it. Events may seem to unfold in a certain way, but the meaning we give them—the perception we maintain—is where our freedom resides. This is the Holy Spirit’s role: to reinterpret the script in a way that leads us back to peace, shifting our perception from fear to love.

Thus, the Atonement is not merely the correction of a past error, but the recog-nition that no real error occurred. It is the acceptance that separation never truly happened and therefore nothing real has been lost.

Through this acceptance, we are not changing the world, but changing our mind about the world. And in so doing, we awaken from the dream, realizing that the journey was only a dream from the beginning, and that we never left Home.

^III In God—pure Existence—there is no perception, but a perfect, continuous, and full Being. God is real; perception is not.

To perceive is to consider that there exists something different from the perceiver and that, moreover, this something changes or can change—that is, that it can cease to be and become something else, that it can die and return to existence in a different, always limited, form.

Perception inherently implies duality: subject and object, observer and observed, “I” and “other.” It is based on the illusion of separation, which is the foundation of the ego’s thought system. In contrast, God is One, an indivisible totality in which there exists no “other” to be perceived. Only Being exists: immutable, eternal, and complete.

That is why, in God, perception has no function. There is no need to perceive what is already perfectly known. In the realm of Knowledge—which is God’s domain—there is no subject–object relation, because everything forms part of the same unified reality.

Perception arises only as a substitute for Knowledge when the mind chooses to believe in separation. In this illusion, perception becomes the mechanism by which the mind tries to make sense of a fragmented world that it itself has imagined. It seeks to bestow meaning upon appearances, unaware that the meaning it assigns comes from within itself.

Perception, however, is unstable because it rests upon change. It shifts constantly, influenced by emotions, judgments, and past experiences. What we perceive today we may see differently tomorrow—not because reality has changed, but because our interpretation has. This is a clear sign that perception cannot reveal truth, because truth does not change.

The Holy Spirit’s role is to purify perception, transforming it from a tool of separation into a bridge back to Knowledge. Through forgiveness, we learn to see beyond appearances and to recognize the unchanging essence behind forms. We begin to perceive not through the body’s eyes but by means of the Vision of Christ: a perception that reflects the unity and innocence that still exist beneath the illusion of separation.

Ultimately, the goal is not to perfect perception, but to transcend it altogether. When the mind is fully healed, perception will no longer be necessary, because the illusion of separation will have been undone. What remains is the direct and unquestionable experience of Truth, beyond any need to “see” it, because we will simply be that Truth. In this sense, salvation does not consist in changing the world we perceive, but in undoing the belief in the reality of perception itself. In its place, what has always been true will shine unobstructed: the perfect, eternal, and unlimited reality of God.

^IV This Course has a purpose and a strategy to achieve it. Forgiveness is the remedy Jesus proposes to awaken from the death-dream of egoic perception.

In the Course’s context, forgiveness is not what we commonly mean by the term. It is not about absolving others for their supposed errors or offenses. Rather, it is the recognition that there was never anything to forgive, because the offenses we perceive are illusions—projections of our mind’s belief in separation.

The ego’s perception rests on judgment, guilt, and fear. It constantly seeks to validate the illusion of separation by making others responsible for our pain or by reinforcing the belief that we ourselves are guilty and unworthy of love. This dynamic creates an endless cycle of suffering, as we continually project and perceive guilt both within and without.

Forgiveness, as the Course teaches it, breaks this cycle. It is the process of looking past appearances to recognize the truth: that nothing real has been harmed, that no sin has been committed, and that the Son of God remains innocent and whole.

This shift in perception is not something we accomplish by our efforts alone. It requires the Holy Spirit’s guidance, who reinterprets every situation, person, or memory through the lens of love instead of fear. When we allow the Holy Spirit to “judge” for us, we begin to see with the Vision of Christ—a vision that does not depend on the body’s eyes, but on the recognition of our shared divinity.

Forgiveness, then, is not about changing others, or even ourselves. It is about releasing the belief that something has gone wrong. It is the realization that what we thought was real—conflict, loss, betrayal, guilt—was simply a misperception, a dream from which we can awaken.

The Course’s strategy is to guide us through daily practices that help us undo the ego’s thought system. Each Lesson invites us to:

• Recognize the false beliefs we hold.
• Question the reality of these beliefs with the Holy Spirit’s help.
• Choose again: to see through the eyes of forgiveness instead of judgment.

Through constant practice, we begin to experience moments of true peace—glimpses of the reality beyond the dream. These moments grow as our trust deepens, and eventually forgiveness becomes not merely a practice, but our natural way of seeing.

Ultimately, forgiveness leads us to the Atonement, which is the total acceptance that separation never occurred. When we reach this recognition, the dream dissolves and we awaken to the truth of what we are: the eternal, beloved Son of God, forever at peace in His Love.

^V The FIP Spanish version here says “with eyes closed” in all its editions, but that is an error. The FIP English version says with eyes open, as do the Urtext and the Notes. This is one of the very few slips in the FIP Spanish translation.

This discrepancy is significant because it alters the practice intended in the Lesson. In the Course, the instruction to keep the eyes open or closed during an exercise is not a trivial detail; it often reflects the specific purpose of the practice.

When the instruction is to keep the eyes open, it is usually related to integrating the Lesson into the outer world, applying the teaching to what we perceive around us. It symbolizes the idea that forgiveness and healing are not limited to meditative states of stillness, but must extend to our daily, waking experiences.

By contrast, practices with eyes closed tend to be more introspective, focused on inner reflection, stillness, and direct communion with the Holy Spirit.

Correcting this detail helps align the practice with its original purpose: to build a bridge between inner awareness and outer perception, reinforcing the idea that God’s Presence is not limited to moments of solitude, but accompanies us at all times—even in the midst of the world we see.

God is my Strength; Vision is His Gift.

1. Today’s idea brings together two very powerful thoughts, both of great importance.^I

²It also establishes a cause-and-effect relationship that explains why your efforts to reach the goal of this Course cannot fail.

³You will see, because it is God’s Will.

⁴It is His Strength, not yours, that gives you power.

⁵And it is His Gift, not yours, that offers you Vision.

2. God is indeed your Strength.^II

²And what He gives is truly given. ³This means you can accept and receive it at any time and in any place, regardless of circumstances.^III

⁴Your journey through time and space is not accidental.

⁵You cannot but be in the right place at the right time.

⁶Such is the Strength of God.

⁷Such are His Gifts.

3. Today we will have two longer practice periods, each lasting three to five minutes.

²The first should be done as early as possible after waking, and the second as close as possible to the time you go to sleep.

³It is better to wait until you are ready to sit quietly by yourself than to be overly concerned about the exact time.

4. Begin by repeating today’s idea slowly while looking around you.

²Then close your eyes and repeat the idea again, even more slowly. ³After that, focus only on the thoughts that come to you related to today’s idea.^IV

⁴You might think, for example:

⁵Vision must be possible.

⁶God truly gives.

Or:

⁷I must have God’s Gifts, for He gave them to me.

5. Any thought clearly related to today’s idea is suitable.

²In fact, you may be surprised by the deep understanding of the Course’s teachings reflected in some of the thoughts that come to you.

³Do not block them, unless you realize that your mind is simply wandering and has let in thoughts that are clearly irrelevant.

⁴If you reach a point where no thoughts come, open your eyes and slowly repeat the idea while looking around.

⁵Then close your eyes, repeat it once more, and continue searching your mind for thoughts related to today’s idea.

6. Remember that you are not to strain to find suitable thoughts.

²Simply allow them to come.

³If this proves difficult, it is better to spend the practice alternating between slow repetitions of the idea with your eyes open and closed, rather than trying to force appropriate thoughts to appear; just let them come.

7. You may do as many shorter practice periods as you wish; they will be very helpful.

²Today’s idea is a first step toward unifying your thoughts and teaching you that this Course presents a unified thought system, lacking nothing and free of all contradiction.

8. The more frequently you repeat today’s idea throughout the day, the more you will be reminding yourself that the goal of this Course is important to you, and that you have not forgotten it.

---

^I Many spiritual paths, including this Course, recognize the sacred triad—the three aspects of Being (existence): Strength (creating/will), Vision (understanding/knowledge), and Love (loving/bliss). This lesson concerns the first two.

The Course introduces the idea of God as your Strength and Vision as His Gift. Here, “Strength” is not a personal force nor a resource obtained through effort, but the unshakable strength of Love and Truth. “Vision” refers to the mode of true perception that is granted to us when we stop seeing with the ego’s eyes and allow the Holy Spirit to look through us.

The cause-and-effect relationship mentioned is that the Will of God is the Cause, and our new way of seeing (Vision) is the effect. Since that is His Will, it cannot fail. This answers the Course’s central logic: what is born of infinite Love is already accomplished, because in the Mind of God there is no real opposition.

This is the key to understanding why our efforts in this Course are destined to succeed: not because of our personal strength or discipline, but because we are simply aligning with a Will that has already been fulfilled. We are not trying to create vision; we are opening to receive what has already been given.

“God is my strength; vision is His gift.” This is not a promise of something yet to come; it is an affirmation of what already is. Our practice, then, is not about striving, but remembering; not about attaining, but allowing. When we set aside the ego’s frantic attempts to control, fix, and understand through its limited lens, we create space for something far greater to emerge: the effortless clarity of Vision, powered not by us, but by the very Source of all that is true.

^II 2 Samuel 22:33 “God is my strength and power, and He makes my way perfect.”

This verse beautifully reflects the essence of today’s lesson: “God is my strength; vision is His gift.” It mirrors the timeless truth that true strength does not arise from personal effort, but from our connection with the Divine. God is the source of all real power—not as a force to be acquired, but as the very foundation of our being.

“He makes my way perfect” alludes to the same principle the Course teaches: when we surrender to God’s Will—when we stop trying to control, judge, and force our path—we discover we have always been guided. Perfection does not consist in avoiding challenges, but in recognizing that every step, every lesson, and even every apparent mistake is part of a larger and loving design.

This aligns with the Course’s teaching that our journey through time and space is not random: “You cannot but be in the right place at the right time. Such is the strength of God. Such are His gifts.” (W-42.2:5–7)

Both the biblical verse and the Course remind us that we are never alone, never without support. Our strength is not fragile because it does not depend on us to sustain it; it is God’s strength in us—immutable and eternal. When we trust this truth, we cease struggling to perfect our path through effort. Instead, we allow the perfection already present to unfold before us, trusting that His vision will guide us where our eyes cannot see.

^III This statement is crucial. Believe it and make its content your own, for it redefines the paradigm of your personal life. Believe it, and it will illumine your life.

Now everything makes sense; even the tiniest detail of what happens to you has purpose. Life is perfect, for it is a constant lesson in what you need to learn—that is, everything you must change in your mind so you may come to see it thus.

Everything that happens and displeases you is simply urging you to forgive it and see it differently, in the right way, which is what confers its true meaning. And when this happens, your heart confirms it, because then you “feel” well; then your mind is thinking something that is true.

Do not fear life. In it everything works in your favor, even if you do not believe it. You are constantly being provided the optimal opportunities to learn something essential for your happiness.

Do not be arrogant in thinking you know better than infinite divine wisdom what is best for you. You certainly do not, and by now that should be evident. Never be displeased; always be grateful.

God’s Gifts surround you everywhere, and your Father is in you, just as you are in Him, regardless of what your ego tells you. That bitter voice has always deceived you, and it will do so here as well.

You are not alone; you are constantly guided through life itself—your great teacher of change.

Remember this and never forget it: the measure of your displeasure is always the exact measure of what you have to learn at any given moment.

Our passage through time and space is not accidental. God’s Strength—His loving plan—guarantees that, in each instant, we are offered the opportunity to remember the Truth. Even when we feel lost, we are on the perfect stage to carry out the learning that is ours.

This understanding not only changes how we interpret challenges; it redefines the entire purpose of our life. Instead of seeing problems as obstacles, we begin to recognize them as gifts, each designed to awaken us and guide us back to the awareness of who we truly are.

Nothing is against you. Everything is for you. The question is not, “Why is this happening to me?” but rather, “What is this here to teach me?” When you adopt this perspective, life ceases to feel like a struggle and begins to become a sacred classroom, where every moment, every encounter, and every emotion is part of a divine curriculum designed for your awakening.

^IV This is the formal introduction, after a brief appearance in Lesson 38, of letting thoughts related to the idea of the day come freely. It is a practice in which we first repeat the idea and then remain mentally silent, allowing kindred thoughts to arise spontaneously.

It is a very important exercise that greatly fosters and develops creativity, opening the doors to a part of your mind you did not know and that holds immense potential.

The exercise itself has the structure of a prayer, for you begin by invoking in faith the proposed idea and then remain in silence, awaiting the answer. The key to this entire practice lies in the confidence with which you carry it out and in the mental silence you protect from ego intrusions.

If you do it well, you will be inspired with thoughts full of light from the upper part of your mind. This is an exercise that, consciously or unconsciously, all creative people use who are able to bring into this world ideas from beyond, for it is the source of creativity. And, as the lesson says, its results will surprise you.

The mind is chameleonic; it becomes what it evokes and holds as true. Thus, if the idea of weakness reaches it, it weakens; if it brings in the idea of strength, it strengthens. And this occurs with everything it thinks upon.

Now then, can you conceive of ideas more powerful than God’s Strength and Vision? Then imagine the effect of bringing them into your mind, embracing them, and resting in them.

This practice is not about forcing understandings or chasing after deep revelations. It is about creating a space: a silent opening where truth can gently arise without interference. You are not trying to control the process; you are allowing it to unfold naturally, trusting that the light of inspiration will arrive—not because you demand it, but because it is already there, waiting to be received.

Think of it as opening a window in a dark room. You do not have to create sunlight; you simply remove the barrier, and the light enters on its own. In the same way, when you clear the mind of clutter and allow the day’s idea to settle, insights arise effortlessly, like ripples on still water.

This is the doorway both to inner peace and to true creativity.

God goes with me wherever I go.

1. In time, today’s idea will help you completely overcome the sense of loneliness and abandonment that all who believe they are separate experience.^I

²Depression is an inevitable result of separation.

³So too are anxiety, worry, a deep sense of helplessness, misery, suffering, and an intense fear of loss.

2. The separated have invented countless “cures” for what they believe are the “ills of this world.”

²Yet the one thing they never do is question the reality of the problem. ³But its effects cannot be healed because the problem is not real.^II

3. Today’s idea has the power to end all this foolishness forever.

²For that is what it is: foolishness, no matter how grave or tragic its forms may appear to be.

³At the very core of your being lies everything that is perfect, ready to radiate through you to the entire world.

⁴This will heal all sorrow and pain, all fear and lack, because it will heal the mind that thought those things were real and suffered by being loyal to such beliefs.

4. You can never be deprived of your perfect Holiness, because its Source goes with you wherever you go.

²You can never suffer, because the Source of all Joy goes with you wherever you go.

³You can never be alone, because the Source of all Life goes with you wherever you go.

⁴Nothing can disturb your Peace of Mind because God goes with you wherever you go.^III

5. We understand that you do not believe all this.^IV

²How could you, when the Truth is hidden deep within you, beneath a heavy cloud of insane, dense, and dark thoughts that make up everything you see?

³Today we will attempt for the first time to go past that heavy cloud, to pass through it and reach the Light beyond.^V

6. Today there will be only one longer practice session.

²In the morning, preferably as soon as you wake, sit quietly for three to five minutes with your eyes closed.

³Begin by repeating today’s idea very slowly.

⁴Then, make no effort to think of anything.

⁵Try instead to feel yourself going inward, beyond all idle thoughts.

⁶Try to reach the deepest part of your mind, free from any distracting thought.^VI

7. If helpful, you may repeat today’s idea occasionally.

²But above all, try to go deep within, away from the senseless thoughts of the world.

³You are trying to transcend all such things.

⁴You are trying to leave appearances behind and move toward Reality.

8. It is perfectly possible to reach God.

²In fact, it is very easy, because it is the most natural thing in the world.

³You could even say it is the only natural thing in this world.

⁴If you believe this is possible, the way will open before you.

⁵This exercise can bring remarkable results, even the first time it is attempted, and sooner or later it is always successful.

⁶As we progress, we will deepen this type of practice.^VII

⁷But it will never fail completely, and instant success is possible.

9. Use today’s idea frequently throughout the day, repeating it very slowly and preferably with your eyes closed.

²Think about what you are saying, about the meaning of the words.

³Focus on the Holiness they bestow upon you, on the unfailing Companionship that walks with you, and on the perfect Protection that surrounds you.

10. For you can indeed afford to laugh at thoughts of fear, remembering that God goes with you wherever you go.

---

^I It could be said that this lesson is, in a sense, quite “special,” for it is particularly powerful. It is both an invocation and an affirmation of truth. Its power lies precisely in that, and in the fact that God is included in the idea.

That feeling of loneliness, of abandonment, of depression, are clearly effects of separation. But what exactly is this idea? What is it based on? What feeds it? Think carefully and you will realize it is not an anonymous notion. In reality, it is the will to be separate that sustains it. You feel separate, you believe you are separate, because that is exactly what you want: you want to be you, period.

From the recognition of this premise arises the solution to the problem: the relinquishment of your false identity, the forgiveness of the idea you hold of yourself, and the openness to experience your reality without the conditions imposed by your ego’s interpretation. In other words, you must let go of that story you have told yourself about who you are in order to experience your reality directly.

Remember: you are not a story; you are real, you are Reality Itself.

This is the true power of today’s lesson: it calls you beyond narrative, beyond the roles and identities you have constructed, into the direct experience of what has always been true. “God goes with me wherever I go” is not just a comforting phrase; it is an affirmation of absolute reality. You are not, and never have been, separate. You are not alone, because you cannot be.

The belief in separation is only that—a belief. It has no foundation in truth. The moment you cease feeding it with your attention and desire, it begins to dissolve. What remains is what has always been there: the presence of God, the reality of your being, the simple and undeniable fact that you are, and that in your very existence, God is wholly present. This is not something you need to attain. It is something you need to remember. And today’s lesson is a gentle yet powerful invitation to do so.

^II When we take separation (and all its manifestations) as real, we attempt to “resolve” it within a thought system that, rather than correcting it, reinforces it. The ego tries to find countless worldly solutions to address ills like depression, anxiety, or loneliness, but it rests on the premise that separation is real. This Course proposes a radical shift: to recognize that the problem does not exist in God’s reality, but only within an illusion of the mind. Once the illusion is exposed, the problem is undone at its source.

The “problem of evil” has haunted the judging mind throughout history. We say something is “wrong” when it does not meet our expectations, when it does not align with our definition of how things should be. The truly astonishing fact is that, systematically, we question reality itself, yet never question the validity of our own premises.

With our minds, our emotions, and our behavior, we manifest the assumption that our judgment is sound and timely, and that life itself is a regrettable mistake. Do you see the arrogance in such an attitude? It is as if we were saying: “Reality got it wrong, but I know how it should be.” This is the hallmark of the ego: it places itself as judge and jury of existence, assigning meaning based on its limited and distorted perspective. And yet the ego never questions its own authority to render such judgments.

The Course invites us to do exactly that: to question the very foundations of our thought system. What if the problem is not out there, in the world? What if the problem is the lens through which we look? What if the true problem is not the supposed “evils” we see, but our belief that we are separate from the Source of all peace, love, and wholeness?

When we question the validity of our premises, we open the door to a profound shift. We begin to see that the problem was never real in the first place. It was a misunderstanding, a mistaken belief. And in the moment we stop defending that belief, the illusion collapses.

Reality does not need to change. Only our perception does.

^III When you read these four affirmations, allow yourself to think they are true, even if you may believe otherwise. Consider this: what you believe or do not believe will not change the truth in the slightest; what it will change is your state of mind. Your heart tells you that what is best for you is to feel well, to experience joy within.

Therefore, even if only for a brief time, set aside your judging mind and give yourself the opportunity to think only of what brings you peace and makes you feel good. Again, for a while, do not ask yourself whether it is true or not; simply welcome these thoughts into your mind and embrace them.

There will come a moment when you will realize, with absolute clarity, that your mind, for now, is incapable of distinguishing truth from error. Your heart, however, knows the difference perfectly. This is the essence of letting go: releasing the need to analyze, dissect, or confirm with logic. Instead, you allow yourself to feel the resonance of truth—not as an intellectual conclusion, but as a silent certainty, an inner recognition that requires no defense.

Truth does not need your belief to be true. But you will find peace when you cease resisting it.

^IV Of course you do not believe this. If you did, you would not think you are here, or that you need to learn a Course to return to peace of mind. The egoic mind functions through beliefs. Those aligned with truth draw it closer to the experience of its Self, while false ones lead it away and into depression.

For that reason, and within time, the pedagogy of this Course rests on choosing among beliefs—selecting those that will carry you beyond all belief into the direct experience of your true Self.

This is the key: the goal is not to accumulate “better” beliefs, nor to replace negative thoughts with positive ones as if stacking bricks. The goal is to recognize that belief itself is a temporary tool, a stepping stone. Eventually, you move beyond even the most beautiful beliefs, for truth is not something to believe in; it is something to know, something to experience, something to embody.

Beliefs are like scaffolding around a building. They are useful during construction, but once the structure is complete, the scaffolding is removed. Similarly, the Course invites you to use these ideas not to cling to them forever, but to allow them to carry you to the point where belief is no longer necessary because you have reached knowledge.

Peace does not come from believing in peace. It comes from recognizing that peace is what you already are.

^V This “dense cloud of insane thoughts” is what the Course calls the ego’s thought system: the constant mental activity that reinforces our separate identity and generates fear, guilt, and lack. The exercise proposed in this lesson—sitting in silence and trying to sink “deep within your mind”—is a way of moving beyond the confused surface and reaching that “inner space” where oneness with God can be experienced more clearly.

The Course, especially in the second half of the Workbook, places great emphasis on moments of quiet and inner listening. This lesson anticipates what, with practice, will allow us to recognize God’s Voice in us with greater clarity. The ego thrives on mental noise—on the endless chatter of judgments, comparisons, and narratives. It keeps us busy with surface concerns so we never pause long enough to question its validity. But truth does not shout; it whispers in the spaces of silence where the ego’s voice begins to fade.

These moments of stillness are not merely pauses between Lessons; they are the Lessons themselves. In quiet, you are not trying to achieve something, but creating the conditions to receive what has always been there. You are not attempting to make God’s Voice speak; you are realizing it has never stopped speaking.

Stillness is not the absence of activity; it is the presence of awareness. And it is in that awareness that you will remember who you truly are.

^VI Repeating slowly, “God goes with me wherever I go”, is not a magic formula, but a way to anchor the mind in a true thought that directly contradicts the feeling of being alone and separate. The exercise suggests not forcing the mind with thoughts, but allowing it to grow quiet. In that silence, we let go of identification with the endless stream of ideas and concerns characteristic of the ego.

This inward turning is essential in the Course: we are invited to discover what lies beyond the mental noise, where the light of Truth shines. The practice is not about creating peace; it is about discovering it. Peace is already there, beneath the layers of fear, guilt, and distraction. The repetition of the idea is like gently parting the clouds to reveal the sun that never left—it was only hidden.

Each time you return to the phrase, you are not trying to convince yourself of something new, but remembering what has always been true. You are not asking for God’s presence; you are recognizing it. You are not seeking connection; you are realizing separation never happened.

In this way, the practice ceases to be mere words and becomes an experience: an experience of stillness, of openness, of feeling held in a truth that requires no defense. And as the mind grows quiet, the heart remembers: you were never alone.

^VII This is the first true meditation exercise in the Workbook, and the directions given are foundational for the practices of meditation to come. The text reminds us that we do not need long delays to recognize God’s Presence. At any moment, if we are truly willing, the cloud of thoughts can suddenly part to let us glimpse the peace that already dwells within us.

Yet it is common for the ego to resist such an experience, for it threatens its very existence. That is why daily practice—disciplined yet unforced—accustoms the mind to release the ego’s constant noise.

This lesson teaches us that the central problem—the belief in separation—is not solved by seeking “remedies” in the world, but by recognizing that the problem is not real in the Mind of God. By practicing inner stillness and the constant reminder, “God goes with me wherever I go,” we begin to dismantle the belief in separation and, with it, undo the root of fear, depression, and loneliness.

The essential point is this: we do not need to achieve being with God, because we already are. What we can practice is the willingness to remember this Truth. Each time we do, whether in serenity or in turbulence, we open a space of healing within ourselves. And even if the experience of perfect peace does not seem to come immediately, the Course assures us that the practice “never fails completely,” for nothing can undo the truth that we are one with God.

In sum, this lesson invites us to move beyond the appearance of separation and to rest in the recognition of our inseparability from the Source, of the unfailing companionship and perfect protection this entails. Thus, the experience of loneliness is corrected by remembering that, wherever we go, God and His Love are always with us.

I am blessed as a Son of God.

1. Today we begin to affirm some of the happy things to which you are entitled, being what you are.^I

²Long practice periods are not required today, but very frequent short ones are necessary.

³A practice every ten minutes is highly recommended, and you are urged to try to adhere to this schedule whenever possible.^II

⁴If you forget, try again.

⁵If there are long interruptions, try again.

⁶Whenever you remember, try again.

2. You do not need to close your eyes for the exercises, although it will probably be more beneficial if you do.

²However, you may be in situations throughout the day where closing your eyes would not be appropriate.

³Do not miss a practice period because of this.

⁴You can practice quite well under almost any circumstance, if you really want to.

3. Today’s exercises require very little time and no effort.

²Repeat today’s idea and then add several attributes you associate with being a Son of God, applying them to yourself.

³One practice might, for example, go like this:

⁴I am blessed as a Son of God.

⁵I am happy, peaceful, loving, and content.^III

⁶Another might be:

⁷I am blessed as a Son of God.

⁸I am calm and quiet, assured and confident.

4. If only a brief period is available, merely tell yourself that you are blessed as a Son of God.

---

^I Your blessed condition as a Child of God is not a desideratum—it is simply the truth. You are a Child of God because God created you, and therefore you are blessed. Yet this is not at all obvious to you. You think something very different, and the opinion you hold about yourself is rather poor. Not only do you not love yourself, you feel a deep aversion toward yourself. The idea you harbor about yourself is so terrible that it fills you with panic and unbearable shame to share it with others. That is why you do not want to open your mind and truly communicate; instead, you keep it private, even though you do not like what it contains at all.

The most curious part of this situation is that you have never asked yourself whether all that you think about yourself is true. You have never questioned that opinion. You believe that the evaluation you make of yourself is perfectly honest, but you never question your capacity to make it.

Your confusion about your identity arises from the fact that you have indeed witnessed terrible thoughts passing through your mind—sometimes filled with hatred, cruelty, and utter mercilessness. Yet you have never questioned their authorship; you have taken for granted that those were “your” thoughts, and this is not true. What you have heard within has been the voice of your ego—but you are not your ego. In your confusion, you have subscribed to those fearful thoughts and assumed them as your own. That has been your mistake.

You are the holy Child of God, the pure Love of your Father, absolutely innocent and beyond any idea of sin. Yet within you, you can hear two voices offering completely opposite teachings. The Voice of the Holy Spirit always tells you the truth, and the ego always lies. You have no voice of your own, for you have nothing to say; you are the Child of God, and your function is to create, not to speak.

Therefore, in this dream of the world, and in your confusion in believing you are a person, your only freedom is to choose which voice you want to listen to. But understand this: you will never be what the ego says you are. Even if you decide to hear and heed its voice, you will still remain the holy Child of God.

Today, before beginning the practice, open your mind to the possibility that you have been completely wrong. It is not necessary that you recognize this perfectly; simply be receptive to the possibility, begin the practice, and trust.

^II Notice that you are being asked to repeat today’s idea about a hundred times throughout the day.

This lesson is about exercising your will—the will to consider yourself blessed. Here you are not being asked to believe that you are blessed as the Child of God; you are being asked to want to believe it. That is enough. It is the most you can do. You cannot be required to believe something, but you can be required to want to believe it. With these repetitions, you are being asked to make a profession of faith.

Many students feel dishonest when practicing this lesson (and others like it) because they do not feel what they are saying. What they must understand is that it is not necessary to believe or feel it, but it is essential that they want to believe and feel it.

Remember the Introduction to this Workbook: “It is not necessary that you believe the ideas. It is not necessary that you accept them. And it is not necessary that you welcome them. Some of them you may actively resist. None of this will matter, or reduce their efficacy. But do not allow yourself to make exceptions in applying the ideas. Whatever your reaction to the ideas may be, use them. Nothing more than that is required.” (W-In.7)

This is the key: the practice is not about instantly reaching a specific mental state. It is about opening the door, even just a little, to the possibility that what the Course says is true. Repetition is not meant to force you into belief, but to create a space in your mind where a new perception can gently settle.

Each time you repeat the idea, even if you neither feel it nor believe it, you are planting a seed. With time, patience, and willingness, that seed will grow—not because you forced it, but because you allowed it. Willingness is the fertile soil in which miracles take root.

^III In the next Lesson you will find this warning: “Think about what you are saying, about the meaning of the words” (W-41.9:2). This instruction is especially important when you make statements about yourself. It is not enough to understand intellectually what the words say; it is also essential to feel what they express. Only when thought and emotion unite does the practice become truly transformative.

Isn’t it true that when you reproach yourself you feel bad? That happens because thought and emotion have aligned, but in a negative direction. In the same way, when you introduce into your mind a positive idea about yourself—a true idea—it must be accompanied by the feeling that corresponds to it and by the inner certainty that it is real.

We can understand these declarations as the integration of three fundamental elements:

MEANING + EMOTION + CERTAINTY

Thus, when you say to yourself, for example, “I am peaceful,” you must clearly understand what it means to live from peace, allow yourself to feel the calm and expansiveness that peace generates, and affirm yourself with conviction in that truth, at least in that moment. Only then will the idea cease to be a phrase and become a living experience.

My holiness is my salvation

1. If guilt is hell, what is its opposite?

²Like the Text for which this Workbook was written, the ideas used in these lessons are very simple, very clear, and entirely unambiguous.

³We are not interested in intellectual feats nor logical playthings.

⁴We are concerned only with the very obvious, which has been overlooked in the clouds of complexity in which you think you think.

2. If guilt is hell, what is its opposite?

²Clearly, this is not a difficult question.

³Any doubt you may experience in answering it does not come from the question’s ambiguity.

⁴But do you truly believe that guilt is hell? ^I

⁵If you did, you would see at once how direct and simple the Text is, and you would not need a Workbook at all.

⁶No one needs to practice to gain what he already has.

3. We have said that your holiness is the salvation of the world.^II

²But what about your own salvation?

³You cannot give what you do not have.

⁴A savior must be someone who has already been saved.

⁵How else could he teach what salvation is?

⁶Today’s exercises are for you, recognizing that your salvation is essential to the salvation of the world.

⁷As you apply the exercises to your own world, the whole world benefits.

4. Your holiness is the answer to every question that has ever been asked, is being asked now, or will be asked in the future.

²Your holiness brings an end to guilt, and therefore to hell.

³Your holiness is the salvation of the world, and your own salvation.

⁴How could you, who are holy, be excluded from salvation?

⁵God does not know anything that is not holy.

⁶Is it possible that He does not know His Son?

5. Today you are asked to devote a full five minutes to each of the four longer practice periods, and it is recommended that the sessions be even longer and more frequent than that.

²If you wish to exceed the minimum requirements, it is better to do more frequent sessions rather than longer ones, though both are encouraged.

6. Begin the practice periods as usual, by silently repeating today’s idea.

²Then, with your eyes closed, search your mind for any thoughts that show a lack of love in any form—whether it appears as anxiety, depression, anger, fear, worry, attack, insecurity, etc.

³It does not matter what form it takes. If it is not loving, it is fearful.

⁴And that is why you need to be saved from it.

7. Specific situations, events, or people you associate with any kind of unloving thought are suitable subjects for today’s exercises.

²It is imperative to your own salvation that you see them differently.

³And blessing them is what will save you and give you Vision.

8. Slowly, without making conscious selections or placing undue emphasis on any particular one, search your mind for every thought that stands between you and your salvation.

²Apply today’s idea to each of them like this:

³My unloving thoughts about ____ are keeping me in hell.

⁴My holiness is my salvation.

9. You may find it easier to practice by alternating with short periods in which you simply repeat the idea slowly in silence a few times.

²It may also help to include brief intervals of quiet in which you relax and try not to think at all.

³At first, it is very difficult to maintain concentration.

⁴But it will become much easier as your mind becomes more disciplined and less distracted.

10. In the meantime, you may vary your practice in any way that appeals to you.

²But do not change the central idea by varying the way you apply it.

³It does not matter how you apply it, as long as it reflects that your holiness is your salvation.

⁴Conclude each practice period by repeating the original idea once more, followed by:

⁵If guilt is hell, what is its opposite?

11. In the shorter applications, to be done three or four times an hour—and more if possible—you can ask yourself this question, or repeat today’s idea, or preferably both.

²If temptations arise, a particularly helpful form of the idea is:

³My holiness is my salvation from this.

---

^I It is evident that you do not believe guilt is hell. In fact, you believe the exact opposite: you think the guilt you feel in yourself, and which you then project onto others, is redemptive—it is your salvation. Guilt is the ego’s way of “atoning” for its “sins.”

When you feel guilty, or when you blame others for something, it is because you are using the ego’s criterion to interpret reality. First of all, you must realize that the ego is not a “something” in your mind. The ego is no one and nothing. It is simply a mistaken way of using your holy mind—nothing more.

That way of thinking is the inevitable result of harboring a false and extremely harmful belief. You think you have separated from God and that you created yourself. Obviously, that is madness, but it is precisely what the sick part of your holy mind believes. The other part of your mind—the sane part—remains united with its Creator, knows perfectly its identity, and is as it always has been and always will be.

That is the only reality; the rest are the delusional illusions you believe affect you. In truth they do not, but the power of belief has lent them the condition of truth… for you.

The judgment of guilt you have passed on yourself, in your arrogance of thinking you actually managed to separate from God, is one of your most cherished beliefs. You are unwilling to relinquish it, and it draws you with an irresistible force. Guilt is a drug that produces a perverse pleasure in the sick mind.

This is why you are unwilling to release it: because it gives you pleasure. If you rationalize the situation, logically you will find that position untenable, and surely you will deny that this way of attacking yourself has been desired and voluntary.

But look closely and ask yourself a very simple question: What is guilt for, whether in yourself or in others? What purpose does it serve? What do you hope to gain from it?

Guilt is the option you have chosen to resolve an evident absence of love. Do you really believe such an attack can be the remedy?

Examine it carefully and recognize that this is not the way. Your true salvation is your holiness.

Stop feeling guilty right now, because guilt, besides serving no purpose, hurts. To feel guilty is masochism, and to blame others is sadism. Do not justify the unjustifiable; do not protect or promote these mental illnesses.

Acknowledge that guilt serves no purpose for you. It does not correct or redeem; it only perpetuates the illusion of separation. In the moment you release guilt, you regain awareness of your inherent holiness—the truth that has never been lost. Your holiness is your salvation.

^II W-37.3:1 “Your holiness is the salvation of the world.”

This statement reveals a profound truth: your holiness is not just a personal attribute; it is the key to the world’s salvation. This is because the world you perceive is a projection of your mind. When you recognize your own holiness, you cease to see through the lens of guilt, fear, or separation. Instead, you see the world as it truly is: innocent, whole, and healed.

Salvation does not consist in changing the external world, but in transforming the way you perceive it. When your mind is healed, the world reflects that healing back to you. Thus, your inner peace becomes the peace of the world, your forgiveness becomes the world’s release, and your love becomes the light that dispels all illusions.

This is why your holiness is the salvation of the world. You do not need to fix the world; you need only recognize the truth within yourself. In doing so, you offer the world the greatest of gifts: the reflection of the love and innocence that have always been there.

There is nothing my holiness cannot do.

1. Your holiness reverses all the laws of the world.^I

²It is beyond every restriction of time, space, distance, or any limits of any kind.

³The power of your holiness is absolutely unlimited because it establishes you as a Son of God, in union with the Mind of your Creator.

⁴Through your holiness, the Power of God is made manifest.

⁵Through your holiness, the Power of God is made available to you.

⁶And there is nothing the Power of God cannot do.

2. Your holiness, then, can remove all pain, end all sorrow, and solve all problems.

²It can do so in connection with yourself and with anyone else.

³It can help anyone equally, because its power to save is the same for everyone.

⁴If you are holy, so is everything God created.

⁵You are holy because all things He created are holy.

⁶And all things He created are holy because you are.

3. In today’s exercises, we will apply the power of your holiness to all problems, difficulties, or suffering of any kind that you or anyone else may seem to experience.

²We will make no distinctions because there are none.

4. In the four longer practice periods—each preferably five minutes—repeat today’s idea, close your eyes, and then search your mind for any sense of loss or unhappiness of any kind, as you perceive it.

²Try to make as little distinction as possible between situations that are difficult for you and those that are difficult for someone else.

³Identify each situation specifically, and also name the person concerned.

⁴Apply today’s idea in this way:

⁵In the situation involving ____ in which I see myself, there is nothing my holiness cannot do.

⁶In the situation involving ____ in which ____ sees himself, there is nothing my holiness cannot do.

5. From time to time, you may wish to vary the procedure and add some thoughts of your own that seem relevant.

²You may, for example, include thoughts such as:

³There is nothing my holiness cannot do because the Power of God lies in it.

⁴Introduce any variation that appeals to you, but keep the exercises focused on the central idea: There is nothing my holiness cannot do.

⁵The purpose of today’s exercises is to begin instilling in you the awareness that you have dominion over all things because of what you are.^II

6. In the shorter and more frequent applications, use the idea in its original form, unless a specific problem arises for you or someone else.

²In that case, apply the idea specifically to that problem.

---

^I The “laws of this world” are the result of having misunderstood your own identity. They are the natural consequence of considering yourself separate from God and blaming yourself for it. They are the projection outward of this guilt, which now seems to threaten you.

That is not true. It is a situation you imagine and sustain in your mind through the power of your belief. You have imprisoned yourself with that description of yourself you have accepted as true. Again, it is not true.

The truth is that you are holy, because you remain as God created you, even though in your arrogance and confusion you think otherwise and punish yourself for it. Your holiness has the power to undo all this for the simple reason that it is the truth.

To exercise that power, to make it effective in your awareness so it can correct the nightmare you live in, you simply have to believe differently. Until that happens, you will not be able to make effective the power of your holiness, which, though all-encompassing, cannot restrict the freedom God gave you to create as you will.

There is nothing the power of your holiness cannot do, but it is also true there is nothing the power of your belief cannot make you believe. While you do not have the power to change what you are—the perfect Son of God—you do have the power to believe whatever you wish.

^II Genesis 1:28: “And God blessed them, and God said to them, ‘Be fruitful and multiply, fill the earth and subdue it, and have dominion over the fish of the sea and over the birds of the heavens and over every living thing that moves on the earth.’”

The word “dominion“ here does not refer to dominion over people or things, but over your own attack thoughts, which shape the world as you perceive it: “…all manner of problem, difficulty or suffering that may occur to you…” (3:1).

“…you have dominion over all things because of what you are”—the creator in your mind of your own thoughts.

Remember that the world you believe you live in is of your own making, for you have created it for yourself by believing in it.

This reinterpretation shifts the focus from an external sense of control to an internal dominion of the mind. To subdue is not to impose will upon the outer world, but gently to reclaim authority over the thoughts that generate illusions of fear, separation, and conflict.

The dominion granted in Genesis is, therefore, a reflection of your innate creative power: the capacity to choose the thoughts you believe in, to discern between truth and illusion. This is the true meaning of creation—not to shape the external world by force, but to shape your inner world through the recognition of your holiness.

In this understanding, the biblical passage transcends its traditional interpretation and aligns with the central teaching of the Course: “You have dominion over all things because of what you are.” This dominion does not refer to power over others, but to the sovereignty of the mind that remembers its unity with God.

My holiness blesses the world.^I

1. This idea contains the first glimmers of your true function in the world—the reason why you are here.

²Your purpose is to see the world through your holiness.

³In this way, you and the world are blessed together.

⁴No one loses; nothing is taken from anyone.

⁵Everyone gains through your holy vision.

⁶This marks the end of sacrifice, because it gives to everyone what is rightfully theirs.

⁷And everyone has everything, because that is their inalienable right as Sons of God.

2. There is no other way to remove forever the idea of sacrifice from the world’s thinking.

²Any other way of seeing will inevitably demand payment of someone or something.^I

³In such a case, and as a result, the one who perceives in this way will lose.

⁴And so the perceiver will lose, and will not understand why he is losing.^III

⁵Yet through your holy vision, his wholeness is restored to his awareness.

⁶Your holiness blesses him without asking anything of him.

⁷Those who see themselves as whole make no demands.^IV

3. Your holiness is the salvation of the world.

²It enables you to teach the world that it is one with you, not by preaching to it or by telling it anything, but merely by your silent recognition that in your holiness all things are blessed along with you.^V

4. The four longer practice periods today, each lasting three to five minutes, begin by repeating today’s idea, followed by about a minute of looking around you and applying the idea to anything you see:

²My holiness blesses this chair.

³My holiness blesses that window.

⁴My holiness blesses this body.

⁵Then close your eyes and apply the idea to anyone who comes to mind, using their name and saying:

⁶My holiness blesses you, [name].

5. If you wish, you may continue the practice with your eyes closed.

²Or you may open your eyes and apply the idea to what you see around you.

³You may alternate between applying it to your external surroundings and to your inner images.

⁴You can use whatever combination of these methods you prefer.

⁵The practice should end with a repetition of the idea with eyes closed, followed by another with eyes open.

6. The shorter exercises consist of repeating the idea as often as you can.

²It is especially helpful to apply it silently to anyone you meet, using their name as you do so.

³And it is essential to use the idea if you become upset with anyone.

⁴Offer them the blessing of your holiness immediately, so that you may learn to keep it in your own awareness.

---

^I In this lesson we arrive at the culmination of the Course’s learning process. We have healed our mind—or rather, we have recognized that our mind is holy—and now we proclaim our holiness and bless the world.

This change reflects a profound transformation: we are no longer seekers striving to find peace outside ourselves; instead, we recognize that peace has always dwelt within. By acknowledging our innate holiness, we naturally extend that recognition outward—not through grand gestures or words, but through the silent and powerful blessing that emanates from the simple awareness of our true nature.

To bless the world is not an act of superiority or condescension. It is an act of remembrance. Seeing the world through the lens of our holiness dissolves the illusions of separation, guilt, and fear. We do not bless to change the world; we bless because the world is already whole, and in recognizing it, we reaffirm our own wholeness. Thus, this lesson is not merely a practice but a declaration: my holiness blesses the world because that is the natural function of holiness—to extend effortlessly, illuminating everything with the light of truth.

^II Whenever you do not see holiness in what you behold, it is because you are unable to see it in yourself. You are looking in the wrong place. Instead of beholding your true Self, you have believed what the ego tells you that you are.

You are not that. You are not the opinion you hold about yourself; you are as God created you. Yet in believing that falsehood, and in your discontent, you project outward the “sins” you have seen in your false identity and think there is something that must change and “improve” in the world.

Every change entails some sacrifice and implies a sense of loss, even if only the loss of a condition once enjoyed. Every “improvement” carries a cost that someone or something must pay.

This is the ego’s logic, rooted in scarcity, conflict, and the belief that value can only be obtained at another’s expense. The truth, however, is that real transformation requires no sacrifice, for it is not about changing what is, but about remembering what has always been true. Holiness is not something to be attained; it is what is revealed when the illusions of lack and separation fall away. When you recognize your own holiness, you no longer see a world that needs fixing, but a world that reflects the wholeness within you. There is nothing to lose, nothing to sacrifice, no price to pay—only the joyful recognition of what has always been, intact and eternal.

^III Whoever perceives a lack of holiness in what he beholds will lose, for what he is seeing is, ultimately, a content of his own consciousness, to which he is demanding an “improvement,” a change, a sacrifice, and therefore a payment. That payment is really being demanded of himself, for all you do to others you do to your own mind, to yourself. To understand this, remember that to perceive is to project.

Many who embark on spiritual paths do so with the intent of becoming “better people”—kinder, more loving, more holy. Never attempt to “improve”; it is impossible. You were created perfect by a perfect Father. The idea of improving His Work is sheer folly, and to think you are qualified for such a task—to perfect what your Father created—is the height of arrogance.

This Course has nothing to do with behavior and everything to do with the healing of the mind. Read again T-18.VIII “I Need Do Nothing.”

Doing belongs to the ego; it is the substitute for creating, and creating is the extension of being. To bless the world from my holiness is the closest I can come to creating within this dream.

If you want to affect the world in a real way, you must realize that all reality is abstract, while doing—behavior—is concrete and specific. Blessing, however, is not; it is abstract, it is real, and for that reason it is the only thing that can truly affect the world.

Hold on to this idea and do not forget it, for it contains unlimited healing power: “To bless is the closest thing to creating in this world.” Here you can create only by blessing.

Do not try to improve; that is not your function. You do not change or awaken through your own efforts; that is something given to you, something that happens in you. Your function is rather to desire wholeheartedly a corrected mind and not to interfere with the process of correction. If you do not heed the voice of the ego, you will recognize what has been given you—what you already have and are.

When you notice some tendency, some aspect in yourself, some vice or weakness that displeases you, makes you unhappy, and clearly contradicts the Will of God, do the following: imagine a “heavenly mailbox” in which to deposit your aspirations. Formulate your requests clearly and leave them there. Then calmly return to your affairs and let go entirely of the outcome.

Leave your problems in Better Hands and trust. The changes you long for will happen in you without your intervention. That is the only way to achieve true transformation. And if you do not see those changes taking place, remain at peace and keep sending letters to Heaven with determination. Have faith, trust; you need do nothing else.

Whenever you feel inclined to “improve,” reread carefully the section “Rules for Decision” (T-30.I).

^IV When you see holiness, wholeness, and innocence in others, you are working a miracle and healing simultaneously the mind of the one who receives your miracle and your own. Moreover, you are perceiving correctly, for in that case you perceive only the truth, the perfection, and the love that are there and that are the only reality. To see anything else is only to behold absences, which by definition do not exist.

To think this is a fine discourse but unrealistic is to fall prey to a human cognitive bias so utterly widespread throughout the world and so reliable in its expression that it becomes extremely difficult to recognize it as utterly invalid. To perceive is to project. It is your imperfect way of seeing that leads you to perceive an imperfect world. True, or holy, vision sees only holiness and perfection.

This is not about denying the apparent flaws or struggles we observe in the world, but about understanding that such perceptions are reflections of our own mental projections. They are not objective facts; they are interpretations shaped by the filters of the ego. When we shift from this distorted lens to one based on the awareness of our shared holiness, the world itself seems to change—not because the world has changed, but because we have.

True vision requires no effort and no imposition; it arises naturally when we cease to insist on interpreting reality through the ego’s judgments. When we choose to see with the eyes of love, we witness the miracle—not only in others, but also in ourselves.

^V This is one of the foundations of this Course, and probably one of the most difficult for students to understand, accept, and apply, even though it is already stated in its introduction. This teaching repeats tirelessly one idea: your mission is to save the world… in your mind. That is, to save the world is to heal the mind that conceived it.

You need do nothing more than this: forgive everything and everyone… in your mind. You do not need to evangelize anyone, or to change or “improve” anything you think you see outside yourself; it is enough to see holiness and to bless. Until that happens, it is better to attempt nothing, for you are unwell and must heal yourself before trying to fix anything.

If the world is an illusion, a dream, attempting to “fix” anything in it will only draw you deeper into the nightmare and consolidate it, because you will be giving reality to what your deluded mind tells you is true. You need change nothing outside yourself because there is nothing outside yourself. And remember: what is real is not in danger, and what is unreal never existed.

To see holiness and perfection, moreover, is not such a foreign idea to your system of thought. It is what happens when you “fall in love.” The beloved appears perfect in your eyes; everything they do, say, or think is right. Furthermore, that person is not only “holy” in your eyes, but also changes the vision they hold of themselves in response to your love.

This shows how powerful perception truly is. When you choose to see someone through the lens of love, it transforms not only your experience, but often theirs as well. This is a glimpse of how healing works—not through correction, criticism, or attempts to change others, but through the simple and radical act of seeing them as they truly are: innocent, whole, and holy.

The Course invites us to extend this way of seeing beyond special relationships, beyond conditions, beyond the limitations of the ego. It asks us to recognize that the holiness we perceive in one person can be seen in all, because it is not in them but in us, reflected outward through the clarity of a healed mind.

My holiness envelops everything I see.^I

1. Today’s idea extends yesterday’s concept of the perceiver to what is perceived.

²You are holy because your mind is part of God’s Mind.

³And because you are holy, your vision must be holy as well.

⁴“Sinless” means without sin.

⁵You cannot be sinless in part.

⁶Either you are sinless, or you are not.

⁷If your mind is part of God’s Mind, you must be sinless, or a part of His Mind would be sinful.

⁸Your vision comes from His Holiness, not from your ego, and therefore not from your body.

2. Four practice periods of three to five minutes each are required today.

²Try to space them out evenly and use frequent short applications throughout the day to protect yourself.

³The longer practices should follow this format:

3. First, close your eyes and repeat today’s idea slowly several times.

²Then open your eyes and look slowly around you, applying the idea specifically to anything you notice in a casual survey.

³Say, for example:

⁴My holiness envelops that rug.

⁵My holiness envelops that wall.

⁶My holiness envelops these fingers.

⁷My holiness envelops that chair.

⁸My holiness envelops that body.

⁹My holiness envelops this pen.

¹⁰Close your eyes and repeat the idea to yourself several times during these practice periods.

¹¹Then open your eyes and continue naming objects as before.

4. For the shorter applications, close your eyes and repeat the idea, look around you while repeating it again, and conclude with one more repetition with eyes closed. ²All applications should be made very slowly, without effort, and with as little haste as possible.

---

^I The previous lessons have focused on the nature of our mind and its real identity: we are part of the Mind of God, and this makes us holy. Now, this lesson takes a step further and applies that holiness—first recognized in ourselves—to everything we see. If the one who sees (the mind) is holy, what it perceives can only be seen as covered by that holiness. It is the same logic of cause and effect: the cause (our mind in communion with the Mind of God) produces an effect (a holy vision free of sin).

“My holiness envelops everything I see” means, above all, recognizing that our holiness does not depend on personal merit, but on the union of our mind with the Mind of God. That divine root defines us as sinless from the very act of Creation, so that the source of our vision is not the ego but the Holy Spirit. Flowing from this source, everything we behold is inevitably illuminated by that intrinsic holiness. At the same time, this frees us from the need to seek sin or error outside ourselves, for the true starting point is the certainty that we are already innocent. From there, the mind ceases to project guilt onto the world and begins to discover the same innocence in everything it sees.

To practice today’s idea you must detach yourself from the concept you now have of yourself by forgiving it, acknowledging that you do not know who you are, and opening to a new interpretation of yourself. But to accomplish this you will need firm willingness and a little faith. You do not truly know what faith is, you do not know how to increase it, and you do not know how to use it. Do not worry—faith itself resolves all of that.

Practice today’s Lesson with faith. Do not question it; simply do it wholeheartedly, and watch what happens. You will be surprised. You, who have no faith and do not even know what it is, will work miracles… through faith. Faith exists only in action and in the present. It manifests suddenly in the present and transforms everything with its unlimited power. Faith will allow your holiness to envelop everything you see and transform it with its healing power. Simply have faith and look upon the world with new eyes.

This Lesson reinforces the idea that holiness cannot be perceived partially. In affirming “My holiness envelops everything I see,” we declare that nothing and no one is excluded from the vision of Love. It is a total vision, because holiness is neither divided nor “rationed.” With this practice, we train ourselves to recognize holiness within and to extend it to all we behold, undoing the tendency to separate the “sacred” from the “profane,” for all is seen as wrapped in the same Light. At the same time, we integrate mind and external perception, cultivating the experience of being one with God and, therefore, with all of Creation.

The Course thus invites us to a radical change of mindset: to stop seeing the world as something separate or potentially sinful, and to begin beholding it as an extension of the very holiness that dwells in us. In this way, the lesson becomes a practical exercise in unification and forgiveness, reminding us of the power we have to see the world through the loving vision that flows from our true Self.